Liren Large Software Subsidy 14/14.iso/s/s005/5.ddi/BUNDLE/OS2_HELP_WPINDEX.HLP

OS/2 Help File | 1993-04-29 | 422.7 KB | 15,156 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select from the topics listed under this heading.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Changing Mouse Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the mouse settings (for example, to customize your mouse for
left-hand use):

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Mouse.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Use the Timings page to change how quickly actions occur when you use the
mouse.  Use the Setup page to customize the mouse for left-hand use or
right-hand use.  If you change the setting, the button settings on the Mappings
page are automatically updated; however, you also can customize them
individually.

Note:   Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can
        reconfigure the operating system to support another pointing device
        without having to reinstall the entire operating system. Refer to
        Adding options after installation below.

Related Information:

Adding options after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Changing Country Formats ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can set up your system to display information with all or some formats and
characters used for the date, time, numbers, and currency of a specific
country.  To change country formats:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Country.

You can select a specific country and all the formats are changed
automatically, or you can make individual format selections.  For additional
help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Note:   Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can
        reconfigure the operating system to support another national language
        without having to reinstall the entire operating system. Refer to
        Adding options after installation below.

Related Information:

o Adding options after installation
o COUNTRY command


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Changing the System Warning Beep ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can indicate whether a beep should be heard when a warning message is
displayed or an invalid key is pressed.  To customize the sound settings:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Sound.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Changing Settings of Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Objects have default settings that you can customize to your preference; for
example, you might want to set up your mouse for left-hand use rather than
right-hand.  To view or change the settings:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.

You can change the settings on any page of the notebook.  You do not need to
save the change.  This is done automatically.  To change the settings to those
that were active before the window was displayed, select Undo.  Select Default
to change the settings to those that were active when you installed the system.

For additional help , select the Help push button after the window is
displayed.

Note:   If you change your DOS settings, save them using the Save push button.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Associating program and data objects
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Copying from a Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Insert your diskette in the diskette drive.
 2. Double-click on the drive object (for example, Drive A).  The contents are
    displayed.
 3. Select the object you want to copy.
 4. Press and hold Ctrl.
 5. Press and hold mouse button 2 while pointing at the object.
 6. Drag the object to any folder including the Desktop folder.  (If you do not
    know how to drag an object, select that topic below.)

If you want to copy multiple objects:

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the first object you want to select.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 1; then move the pointer over the other objects
    you want.
 3. Release the mouse button.
 4. Press and hold Ctrl.
 5. Press and hold mouse button 2 while pointing at the objects.
 6. Drag the objects to any folder.

Related Information:

o Selecting more than one object
o Dragging an object
o COPY command


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Copying to a Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Insert your diskette in the diskette drive.
 2. Select the object you want to copy.
 3. Press and hold Ctrl.
 4. Press and hold mouse button 2 while pointing at the object.
 5. Drag the object to the drive object (for example, Drive A).  (If you do not
    know how to drag an object, select that topic below.)

To copy multiple objects:

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the first object you want to select.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 1; then move the pointer over the other objects
    you want.
 3. Release the mouse button.
 4. Press and hold Ctrl.
 5. Press and hold mouse button 2 while pointing at the objects.
 6. Drag the objects to any drive object.

Related Information:

o Selecting more than one object
o Dragging an object
o COPY command


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Dragging an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the object you want to drag.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
 3. Move the object by sliding the mouse around your desk.
 4. Position the object where you want it (for example, on the Desktop folder
    or in another folder).  If the cannot drop symbol appears during a drag
    operation, you cannot drop the object at that location.
 5. Release mouse button 2.

To select multiple objects to drag:

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the first object you want to select.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 1; then move the pointer over the other objects
    you want.
 3. Release the mouse button. The selected objects are highlighted.
 4. Position the pointer on any of the highlighted objects; then drag the group
    to a new folder.

Related Information:

o Selecting more than one object
o Considerations when copying and moving files or data-file objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. Arranging Objects in Open Folders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are several ways to organize objects:

o You can arrange all the objects on the desktop.
o You can arrange objects within individual open folders.
o You can arrange minimized objects within the Minimized Window Viewer.

To rearrange all the objects on the desktop:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder by clicking mouse button 2
    on an area not covered by any objects or windows.
 2. Select Arrange.  The icons are automatically arranged.

To organize the objects within an open folder:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the open window by moving the mouse pointer to
    an empty area within it; then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Arrange.

To organize minimized objects:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Minimized Window Viewer by pointing at the
    object; then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Arrange.

Related Information:

o Opening a folder
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Creating Another Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Create another choice is identical to creating an object from the Templates
folder.  The object created has the default settings and data.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Create another.

The Create another choice has a cascaded menu.  If you click on Create another
from the pop-up menu of an object, a default object is created.  If you select
the arrow to the right of Create another, a cascaded menu is displayed.  This
menu contains a listing of all the template objects you have created.  You can
click on one of the choices to create another object from that template.

For example, suppose you created a "Company letterhead" template.  This
template would be listed as a choice on the cascaded menu.  Whenever you need
to create a similar letter, you could click on Company letterhead from the
cascaded menu. The new letter (data-file object) would contain whatever was in
the "Company letterhead" original and it would have its associations.

Related Information:

o Changing names of objects
o Copying an object
o Creating a folder or object from a template
o Associating program and data-file objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Copying an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a duplicate of an object and its contents:

 1. Select the object you want to copy.
 2. Press and hold Ctrl.
 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
 4. Drag the object to the same folder or any other open or closed folder.  (If
    you do not know how to drag an object, or if you want to copy multiple
    objects, select the appropriate topic below.)
 5. Release mouse button 2.  (If you copy to the same folder, the duplicate is
    given a slightly different name than the original.)

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Copy.  When the notebook is displayed, you can copy several ways.
    For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is
    displayed.

Related Information:

o Dragging an object
o Selecting more than one object
o Copying multiple objects
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Considerations when copying and moving files or data-file objects
o Changing names of objects
o Creating another object
o Copying from a diskette
o Copying to a diskette
o COPY command


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Copying Multiple Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To make duplicates of multiple objects:

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the first object you want to copy.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 1; then move the pointer over the other objects
    you want to select.
 3. Release the mouse button.
 4. Press and hold Ctrl.
 5. Press and hold mouse button 2 while pointing at the objects.
 6. Drag them to any open or closed folder.  (If you do not know how to drag an
    object, select that topic below.)

Related Information:

o Dragging an object
o Selecting more than one object
o Considerations when copying and moving files or data-file objects
o Changing names of objects
o Copying an object
o Copying from a diskette
o Copying to a diskette
o COPY command


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Moving an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you move an object, you can relocate it within the current folder or to
another folder.  To move an object:

 1. Select the object you want to move.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
 3. Drag the object to another open or closed folder. (If you do not know how
    to drag an object, select that topic below.)
 4. Release mouse button 2.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Move.  When the notebook is displayed, you can move several ways.
    For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is
    displayed.

Note:   Some objects cannot be moved unless you press and hold Shift while
        dragging the object (for example, to move an object from the Templates
        folder, you must press Shift or the default action of Create another
        occurs instead.)

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Dragging an object
o Selecting more than one object
o Considerations when copying and moving files or data-file objects
o Copying an object
o MOVE command


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Moving Multiple Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To relocate multiple objects:

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the first object you want to move.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 1; then move the pointer over the other objects
    you want.
 3. Release the mouse button.  The selected objects are highlighted.
 4. Drag the objects to another open or closed folder.  (If you do not know how
    to drag an object, select that topic below.)

Related Information:

o Dragging an object
o Selecting more than one object
o Considerations when copying and moving files or data-file objects
o Moving an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. Creating a Shadow of an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Create shadow choice is used to create a new object that represents the
original of an object and its contents.

This choice differs from Copy because the original and the copy do not
automatically exchange data, but a shadow does.  In effect, a shadow works with
its original, while a copy works independently.  An action done to a shadow
(for example, a name change) occurs in the original as well.  The exceptions
are move and delete.

To create a shadow copy of an object and its contents:

 1. Select the object you want to shadow.
 2. Press and hold Ctrl+Shift.
 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
 4. Drag the object to any folder.
 5. Release mouse button 2.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 2. Select Create shadow.  When the notebook is displayed, you can copy several
    ways.  For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is
    displayed.

Note:   The Create shadow choice is useful because you can access data-file
        objects or program objects that are on other physical devices; for
        example, a second hard disk, without physically moving the data-file or
        program object to your primary hard disk (where your desktop is
        located).

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Changing names of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. Deleting an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Before you delete an object, consider that you might not be able to recover it.
To delete an object:

 1. Select the object you want.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
 3. Drag the object to the Shredder.  (If you do not know how to drag an
    object, select that topic below.)
 4. Release mouse button 2.

Or:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Delete.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

If you receive messages about confirming the deletion, respond to them.  If you
prefer to suppress these messages, select Confirming delete messages below.

Note:   If you delete an object by mistake, you might be able to recover it.
        Select Recovering deleted or erased files below.

Related Information:

o Recovering deleted or erased files
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Dragging an object
o Selecting more than one object
o Confirming delete actions
o ERASE command


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Opening an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Open choice is used to start a program object or display the contents of an
object.

To open an object, move the mouse pointer to the object and double-click mouse
button 1.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Open.

When this choice is selected, the resulting action depends on the type of
object that is opened.  A program object starts the program.   A device object
displays the settings or current view.  A data-file object appears in the
program object it is associated with.  A folder object opens and displays its
contents in a view.  You can change the view by selecting the arrow to the
right of Open.  For more information, select Opening a folder below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Associating program and data-file objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. Opening a Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To open a folder and display the contents in its default view, move the mouse
pointer to the folder; then double-click mouse button 1.

Or, if you prefer to use a menu (for example, to display a different view):

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the folder by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2. (To display the pop-up menu for the Desktop
    folder, click mouse button 2 on an area away from all objects.
 2. Select Open.

You can select Icon view, Tree view, Settings or Details view.  Icon view
arranges the objects randomly within the folder. Tree view arranges the objects
in a hierarchy; Settings view enables you to view or change the current
properties of the object; and Details view displays the settings of the objects
(for example, the date and time created, the full name, and any special
attributes).

Note:   You can customize a folder to be a work-area folder to save time.  For
        more information, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Arranging objects in open folders
o Changing settings of objects
o Changing the view of an object
o Creating a work-area folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. Closing an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can close an open object by double-clicking on the title-bar icon located
in the upper left-hand corner of the window.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the open object by moving the mouse pointer to
    it; then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Close.

Note:   If you want to leave an object open, but not have it on the desktop
        (for example, processing in the background), you can hide the open
        window in the Window List.  For information on hiding open windows,
        select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Hiding open windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. Enlarging a Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To enlarge a window to its largest size, select the maximize button located in
the upper right-hand corner of the window.

Or:

Double-click on the title bar.

Or, if you prefer to use a menu:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Window.
 3. Select Maximize.

Note:   You also can size a window by dragging the window borders.  For more
        information, select the topic below.

Related Information:

o Sizing a window
o Restoring a maximized window
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. Restoring a Maximized Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can restore an open window to its original size several ways.  Select the
restore button located in the upper right-hand corner of the window.

Or:

Double-click on the title bar.

Or, if you prefer to use a menu:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Window.
 3. Select Restore.

Related Information:

o Enlarging a window
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. Restoring a Minimized Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To restore an object that is minimized to an icon on the desktop (rather than
hidden in the Window List), double-click on the icon.

For information on customizing window behavior to enable windows to minimize
rather than hide, select the topic below.

Related Information:

Customizing window behavior


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. Displaying Window List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Window List can be used to switch to an active program, to tile or cascade
open program windows, to show hidden windows, or to close a program.

 1. Move the mouse pointer to an area of the screen that is outside all windows
    and objects.
 2. Press and hold mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time.

Note:   If you have work-area folder in the Window List, any action that occurs
        to the folder applies to the objects within it.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Switching between running programs
o Creating a work-area folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. Displaying Help for an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Help for a general description of the object.  If you select the
    arrow to the right of Help, a pop-up menu is displayed that enables you to
    access further help information.

To get help on any pop-up menu choice, use the cursor keys to highlight the
choice; then press F1.  If you need help on a entire window, select the Help
push button.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Displaying contextual help


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. Displaying Help on Pop-up Menu Choices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Use the cursor keys to highlight the menu choice for which you want help.
 2. Press F1.

Related Information:

Displaying help for an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. Displaying Pop-up Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Every object has a pop-up menu that contains actions that are currently
applicable.  To display the pop-up menu for any object:

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the object.
 2. Click mouse button 2.

If the object (for example, a folder) is open, you also can display the menu by
clicking mouse button 2 on a blank space in the folder or by clicking on the
title-bar icon in the upper-left corner.

To display the pop-up menu for the Desktop  folder,  click mouse button 2 on an
area not covered by any objects or windows.

To display a pop-up menu that is applicable for a group of objects, select all
the objects; then display their menu.  (If you do not know how to select more
than one object, select that topic below.)

Note:   Arrows to the right of a menu choice indicate that there are additional
        menu choices available.  A button-like arrow indicates that a cascaded
        choice is preselected (has a check mark next to it) and is the default
        action when you select the main choice.  A flat arrow indicates that
        selecting the main choice opens another menu.

Related Information:

Selecting more than one object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. Displaying the OS/2 Tutorial ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select Information.
 2. Select Tutorial.

The tutorial contains an overview of the operating system and teaches you the
basics such as how to use a mouse or how to manipulate windows.  Each topic in
the tutorial provides some animation and user interaction.

It was automatically started the first time you installed the operating system.
To start it after the initial installation, select Tutorial in the Information
folder by double-clicking mouse button 1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. Restarting Your System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To restart your system:

 1. Shut down the operating system.
 2. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del.

Related Information:

Shutting down the operating system


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. Displaying Help for Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select OS/2 window or OS/2 full screen.
 4. Type HELP followed by the OS/2 command name. The OS/2 Command Reference
    opens to the command information.  For example,

HELP DISKCOPY

To return to the command prompt:

Double-click on the title-bar icon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. Viewing Notebook Pages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To see additional pages of a notebook, select either a tab or an arrow in the
lower-right corner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. Refreshing Folder Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the contents of a folder are changed, the changes are not automatically
updated. To update changed information within a folder to its current status:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the folder by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Refresh.

This choice is available only for folders whose contents can change
independently (for example, diskette folders or LAN folders).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. Locating Previous OS/2 Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 2.1 user interface includes many changes from the OS/2 version 1.3
interface.  For information on how to use these changes, refer to the OS/2 2.1
Using the Operating System book.

To summarize the major changes:

o The File Manager and Desktop Manager are collapsed into the OS/2 Workplace
  Shell as objects: program objects, folder objects, and data-file objects.

o The Print Manager is broken up into print objects, basically a different
  object for each printer queue or direct printer.

o The Control Panel is broken up into objects such as the Mouse, Keyboard, and
  Color Palette.

o The Task List is now called the Window List and is displayed by moving the
  mouse pointer to an area of the screen that is outside of all windows and
  icons; then pressing mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time.  (If you prefer,
  you can customize the mouse buttons using Mouse object in the System Setup
  folder.)

o Program groups you might have set up in OS/2 version 1.3 are organized into
  folders on the desktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. Installing the OS/2 Operating System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Refer to the Installation Guide for information about installing the OS/2*
operating system.

You can add options after installation without reinstalling the entire
operating system.  (For example, if you chose not to install the Command
Reference, you can add it now.) You use the Selective Install object to add the
options.

Related Information:

o Adding options after installation
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. Installing the HPFS and FAT File Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Refer to the Installation Guide for information about installing both the High
Performance File System (HPFS) and File Allocation Table (FAT) file systems.

Related Information:

o File Allocation Table (FAT)
o High Performance File System (HPFS)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35. Installing Multiple Operating Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Refer to the Installation Guide for information about installing multiple
operating systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36. Adding OS/2 to a DOS System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Refer to the Installation Guide for information about adding the OS/2*
operating system to a system that already contains DOS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37. Adding Options after Installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Selective Install object to add features that you did not include when
you originally installed the operating system (for example, a CD-ROM).

You also can use the Selective Install object to change the mouse, display
adapter, or country information for your system.

Make sure you have your installation diskettes before you begin this procedure.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Selective Install.
 4. Select from the System Configuration window any of the choices that you
    want to change or add.
 5. Select OK.
 6. Select the check box to the left of any feature you want to add. If a More
    push button is displayed to the right of a feature, select it to see
    additional choices.

For additional help, select Help after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38. Adding Online Documentation after Installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Make sure you have your installation diskettes before you begin this procedure.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Selective Install.
 4. Select OK when the System Configuration window is displayed.
 5. Select the check box to the left of Documentation.
 6. Select More to the right of Documentation.
 7. Select the check box to the left of any documentation unit you do not want
    to add.
 8. Select OK.
 9. Select Install.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39. Deleting Online Documentation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete online documentation (such as the Command Reference) that you
previously installed, do the following:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Drives.
 3. Select the drive in which your operating system is installed.
 4. Select OS/2 to display the contents of that folder.
 5. Select Book.
 6. Select the book you want to delete.
 7. Press and hold mouse button 2.
 8. Drag the book to the Shredder.
 9. Release mouse button 2.

If you want to also remove the book object from the Information folder, do the
following:

 1. Select Information.
 2. Select the object that you want to delete.
 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
 4. Drag the object to the Shredder.
 5. Release mouse button 2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40. Installing Device Drivers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can install any device driver that is included on the installation
diskettes by adding the appropriate DEVICE statement to your CONFIG.SYS file.
The DEVICE statements are described in the OS/2 Command Reference.

If you have installed the Command Reference, you can select the command name
below to link to the information in the Command Reference. After you read the
general information about installing device drivers, select the appropriate
DEVICE statement to see its syntax.

If you have not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online
documentation after installation" in the "Related information" list.

If you are installing a device that comes with a Device Support Diskette, do
the following:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Device Driver Install.

You will be prompted to insert the Device Support Diskette for that device.
For additional information, refer to the documentation that came with the
device.

Related Information:

o DEVICE
o Adding online documentation after installation
o Installing printer drivers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41. Features Added to OS/2 2.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

New OS/2 2.1 features include:

o Support for Windows** version 3.1 programs
o Device drivers for CGA, VGA, XGA*, and SVGA display monitors
o Advanced power management and PC Card (PCMCIA**) support
o Multimedia audio and video capabilities

Also new hardware support was added, including:

o Device drivers for popular printers, such as PostScript** printers
o Optical disc drives that you can lock or unlock from the desktop pop-up menu
o Small computer system interface (SCSI) adapters
o SCSI attached CD-ROM drives


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Windows Version 3.1 Program Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 2.1 operating system has been enhanced to provide support for Windows
version 3.1 programs. The OS/2 feature that provides Windows program support is
called WIN-OS/2*.  The WIN-OS/2 feature allows Windows programs to use features
of the OS/2 operating system, such as multitasking, and cutting and pasting
information between programs referred to as Sharing Data.

If you selected WIN-OS/2 support when you installed OS/2, folders were created
and stored on the desktop.

                                 WIN-OS/2 Groups

Look inside the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder, you might find two more folders:

WIN-OS/2 Main

This folder contains Windows programs that enable you to organize files and
directories, configure hardware, and view the contents of the WIN-OS/2
Clipboard.

WIN-OS/2 Accessories

This folder contains Windows programs that enable you to create drawings, play
multimedia files, and keep track of your appointments.

                                Windows Programs

The Windows Programs folder contains Windows programs that are installed on
your system.  These programs have preselected settings that work best to
optimize the performance of your program.

To continued to find out more about new features of OS/2 2.1, select a topic
from the list below:

o Device drivers for CGA, VGA, XGA, and SVGA display monitors
o Advanced Power Management and PC card (PCMCIA) support
o Multimedia audio and video capabilities


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Video Graphics Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 operating system supports a variety of display adapters, such as the
color graphics adapter (CGA), enhanced graphics adapter (EGA), video graphics
adapter (VGA), 8514/A adapter, extended graphics adapter (XGA), and super VGA
(SVGA) adapter.

OS/2 2.1 also supports the following SVGA chip sets:

o ATI**28800
o Headland Technologies** HT209
o Trident Microsystems** TVGA 8900B and 8900C
o Tseng Labs** ET4000
o Western Digital** WD90C11, WD90C30, and WD90C31 (in WD90C30 compatibility
  mode)

You can change screen resolution for your XGA display adapter. To change the
screen resolution for an XGA display adapter:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select System.
 4. Select the Screen tab.
 5. Select the resolution from the Screen Resolution field.  (The resolutions
    that are supported by your adapter are listed, and the current one is
    selected.)
 6. Restart your system to put the resolution you selected into effect.

Note:   The Screen tab appears on the System Settings notebook only if you have
        an XGA display adapter.

To continue to find out more about new features of OS/2 2.1, select a topic
from the list below:

o Support for Windows version 3.1 programs
o Advanced power management and PC Card (PCMCIA) support
o Multimedia audio and video capabilities


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Mobile Computer Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Advanced Power Management

The OS/2 2.1 operating system provides features that manage and track power
consumption in battery-powered computers that support the advanced power
management (APM) standard.

The APM standard defines the way hardware and software work together to provide
features that reduce power consumption and help extend battery life.

If your computer supports the APM standard (has APM BIOS), the Power object is
automatically installed during the OS/2 installation process.  If the Power
object is not installed during the installation process, you can install the
object by using Selective Install.

The Power object features can help reduce power consumption and extend battery
life.  They also display information about the power level and charge state of
the battery in the computer.

To use power management features:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Power.

PC Cards

The OS/2 2.1 operating system also provides support for adapters that conform
to Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) standards.
PCMCIA is the new standard for credit card sized adapters currently associated
with portable computers.

PCMCIA is an organization of companies developing the personal computer card
(PC Card) standards.  PC Cards are about the size and shape of a credit card.
You can use PC Cards with laptops, notebooks, palmtops, tablets, and other
portable computer systems that are equipped with a PCMCIA slot.

To continue to find out more about new features of OS/2 2.1, select a topic
from the list below:

o Support for Windows version 3.1 programs
o Device drivers for CGA, VGA, XGA, and SVGA display monitors
o Multimedia audio and video capabilities


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Multimedia ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

With the addition of multimedia to OS/2, exciting experiences are in store for
you.  To see what we mean, use the MINSTALL program to install OS/2 Multimedia.
Look inside the Multimedia folder that appears on the desk top, and here is
what you will find:

A super CD player called Compact Disc for playing your favorite music CDs.
A sound editor called Digital Audio for playing, recording, and editing sound
files.
A motion video player called Digital Video for playing movie clips.

If you have installed OS/2 Multimedia, look under the "Multimedia" entry in the
Master Help Index for more information.

To continue to find out more about new features of OS/2 2.1, select a topic
from the list below:

o Support for Windows version 3.1 programs
o Device drivers for CGA, VGA, XGA, and SVGA display monitors
o Advanced Power Management and PC card (PCMCIA) support


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42. Shutting Down the Operating System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select Shut down.

Warning:  You might lose information if you turn off your computer without
doing the shutdown procedure.

The operating system:

o Saves any information that is in a cache
o Saves the size and location of windows and icons
o Displays any messages that your open programs display when you close them.

Check all sessions for unsaved information before you start the shutdown.

The next time you start the operating system, all objects that were open when
you shut down are open again and are displayed with the same view they had at
the time of the shutdown.  In addition, some programs are able to save their
own view and might redisplay a data-file object you were using with a program
object.  For example, a spreadsheet might be able to redisplay the spreadsheet
data-file object you had open when you shut down the operating system.

To shut down the operating system without a mouse (with the keyboard):

 1. Press Alt+Shift+Tab.  (From a full-screen session, press Alt+Esc before
    this step.)
 2. Press Ctrl+\.
 3. Press Shift+F10.
 4. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the cursor to Shut down; then
    press Enter.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43. Starting a DOS Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start one DOS session of one type (for example one DOS window or one DOS
full screen, or one of each):

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select DOS Window or DOS Full Screen, or both.

To start more than one DOS session of the same type (for example, two DOS
window sessions), select the topic below.

Related Information:

Starting multiple sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44. Starting an OS/2 Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start one OS/2* session of one type (for example one OS/2 window, one OS/2
full screen, or one of each):

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select OS/2 Window or OS/2 Full Screen, or both.

To start more than one OS/2 session of the same type (for example, two OS/2
window sessions), select the topic below.

Related Information:

Starting multiple sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45. Finding Your Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

On the OS/2* desktop are folders containing program objects for programs
provided with the operating system.  In addition, if you ran Migrate
Applications when you installed the operating system or after you installed new
programs, the desktop has special folders with program objects for your old or
new programs.  The list below tells you where to find the program objects for
your migrated programs.

If you had programs on your hard disk but did not migrate them, you will not
find program objects for them.  For such programs, you can run Migrate
Applications any time to create program objects and place them in appropriate
folders.  For more information about migrating programs, select Migrate
applications from the "Related Information" list below.

The following list tells you where to find the program objects for your
migrated programs.

Folder Name Contents

DOS Programs
       Program objects for DOS programs that matched entries in the migration
       database.  The settings for those programs might have been changed
       during migration to improve their performance.
Additional DOS Programs
       Program objects for other DOS programs you selected for migration.
Windows Programs
       Program objects for Windows** programs that matched entries in the
       migration database.  The settings for those programs might have been
       changed during migration to improve their performance.
Additional Windows Programs
       Program objects for other Windows programs you selected for migration by
       using the Add programs push button in Migrate Applications.
WIN-OS/2 Groups
       Program objects for Windows programs that were created under the
       WIN-OS/2 Program Manager and that you selected for migration.
DOS or Windows Program Title
       Program objects for individual DOS and Windows programs that are related
       and distributed in one package.  The folder has the same name as the
       product you installed.
OS/2 Programs
       Program objects for OS/2 programs that you selected for migration.

You might see folders on your desktop that have the same name as the groups you
had in a previous version of the OS/2 operating system.  These folders were
created during installation of the operating system.  They contain program
objects for the programs you added to those groups.  For example, if you added
the program ABC.EXE to Group - Main, you see a folder named Main which contains
a program object for ABC.EXE.

Migrate Applications might create more than one program object for a program.
This happens if a program was in a group in a previous version and is in the
migration database.  For example, assume you had the DOS program ABC.EXE in a
group named Editor.  Migrate Applications will create one program object for
ABC.EXE and place it in a folder named Editor, and will create an identical
program object and place it in the DOS Programs folder (because it was in the
migration database).

Whenever you have a program object in two folders, use the program object in
the DOS Programs, Windows Programs, or WIN-OS/2 Groups folder.  Doing so
ensures that you take advantage of any settings that might have been changed
during migration.  You might want to discard the program object that is not in
the DOS Programs or Windows Programs folder.  For more information about
discarding an object, select Deleting an object from the "Related Information"
list below.

Related Information:

o Migrate applications
o Finding an object
o Deleting an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46. Associating Program and Data-File Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can create a special link (an association) between a program object and
data-file objects.  This enables you to open a data-file object and a specific
program object at the same time by selecting only the data-file object.  For
example, you can link the program object for a spreadsheet to every spreadsheet
data-file object.  Then whenever you open a spreadsheet data-file object, the
spreadsheet file is displayed in the open spreadsheet program.

If you do not create an association for a data-file object, that object is
associated to the OS/2 System Editor by default.  Therefore, whenever you
select that data-file object, it is displayed in the System Editor.

To associate one program object to one or more types of data-file objects,
select Associating by file type from the list below.

To associate one program object to one or more data-file objects that have
similar file names, select Associating by file name from the list below.

To associate one program name to one data-file object, select Associating from
menu page.

Note:  If your computer had a previous version of the OS/2* operating system
installed, any associations from that version still exist.  For example, assume
you had all your spreadsheet data-file objects linked to the same spreadsheet
program object.  When you select one of your spreadsheet data-file objects, the
spreadsheet data file will be displayed in the open spreadsheet program.

Related Information:

o Associating by file type
o Associating by file name
o Associating from menu page


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47. Finding Key Assignments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To see the key assignments that apply to the OS/2* operating system, select Key
assignments from the "Related Information" list below.  Or:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select Help.
 3. Select Keys help.

Some programs have specific key assignments.  To see what they are:

 1. Select Help on the menu bar of the open program object.
 2. Select Keys help.

Sometimes a key is used in addition to a mouse button, for example, to create a
shadow.  The mouse assignments are listed in OS/2 2.1 Using the Operating
System.

Related Information:

Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48. Key Assignments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the key group you want help for:

o HELP KEYS to display help from a help window (for example, to display the
  help index or general help).

o SYSTEM KEYS to switch among open objects, display the Window List, display
  the pop-up menu for the desktop, shut down the operating system, restart the
  operating system, or print the contents of the screen.

o WINDOW KEYS to move around in a window, or to move, size, minimize, hide,
  maximize, restore, or close a window.

o OBJECT KEYS to select, move, size, delete, or print an object; display its
  pop-up menu; or get help for it.

o SELECTION KEYS to select one or more objects.

When two key names are joined by a plus sign (+), use these two keys together.
Press and hold the first key, press the second key, and then release them
together.

Some programs and all online documents have specific key assignments.  To
display those assignments, select Help in the menu bar of the open program
object or online document, and then select Keys help.

Sometimes a key is used in addition to a mouse button, for example, to create a
shadow.  The mouse assignments are listed in OS/2 2.1 Using the Operating
System.

These key assignments apply to the United States keyboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help Window Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the following keys ONLY in an active help window:

Key  Task

Alt+F4
     Close a help window.
Alt+F6
     Move the cursor between a help window and the object or window for which
     help was displayed, for example, between a help window and the Master Help
     Index window.
Ctrl+A
     Copy the displayed help topic and add it to the end of a temporary file.
Ctrl+C
     Display the help table of contents.
Ctrl+F
     Copy the displayed help topic to a temporary file.
Ctrl+H
     Display a list of all topics you have viewed.
Ctrl+L
     Display a list of the libraries that contain help topics.
Ctrl+N
     Open a new help window to display a help topic.  This feature is available
     only when the pop-up menu for the topic window contains the Maximize,
     Minimize, or Hide choice.
Ctrl+S
     Search for a word or phrase in help topics.
Ctrl+Ins
     Copy the displayed help topic to the OS/2* clipboard.
Esc
     Redisplay the previous help window, if there is one; if not, remove the
     help window.
F1
     Display help about using the help window.
F2
     Display general information about the object or window for which help was
     displayed.
F6
     Move the cursor to and from the control area that contains push buttons,
     such as Search, when the control area is in the same window as the cursor.
F7
     Move the cursor to and from the control area that contains push buttons,
     such as Search, when the control area is in a different window from the
     cursor.

     Select Examples to see how to use the F7 key in a help window.
F9
     Display a list of keys for an object or the operating system.
F11 or Shift+F1
     Display the help index.
F12 or Shift+F2
     Display a program tutorial, if available.  To display the tutorial for the
     operating system, if installed, select Tutorial from the Information
     folder.
Shift+F10
     Display help about the help facility.
Tab
     Move the cursor to the next highlighted word or phrase.  (Then press Enter
     to display the related information.)

Use the following keys when there are multiple levels of help topics:

Key  Task

Ctrl+* (Asterisk)
     Display all levels of the table of contents.
Ctrl+- (Minus)
     Remove all subtopics from the table of contents.
+ (Plus)
     Display one more level of topics in the table of contents.
* (Asterisk)
     Display all subtopics for one topic in the table of contents.
- (Minus)
     Remove all subtopics from one topic in the table of contents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> System Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Key  Task

Alt+Esc
     Switch to the next open window, full-screen session, or icon that is
     minimized on the desktop.
Alt+Home
     Switch a DOS program between a window and a full screen.

     Do not use the Home key on the numeric keypad.  On the IBM Enhanced
     keyboards, use the Home key that is between the Insert and Page Up keys.
Arrow keys
     Move the cursor left, right, up, or down to the next object.
Ctrl+Alt+Del
     Restart the operating system.
Ctrl+Esc
     Display the Window List.
Enter
     Perform the default action of the field where the cursor is located.
Print Screen
     Print the contents of the screen when the mouse pointer is in an area of
     the screen that is outside all windows and icons and no object is
     selected.  (To remove the selection of all objects on the screen, click
     mouse button 1 in an area of the screen that is outside all windows and
     icons.)

Following are the key assignments for displaying the pop-up menu for the
desktop and shutting down the operating system.

Display the pop-up menu for the desktop

 1. Press Alt+Shift+Tab.  (From a full-screen session, press Alt+Esc before
    this step.)
 2. Press Ctrl+\.
 3. Press Shift+F10.

Shut down the operating system

 1. Press Alt+Shift+Tab.  (From a full-screen session, press Alt+Esc before
    this step.)
 2. Press Ctrl+\.
 3. Press Shift+F10.
 4. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to move the cursor to Shut down; then
    press Enter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Window Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Key  Task

Alt+Backspace
     Reverse the most recent action that you requested and which was performed
     (Undo).
Alt+Down Arrow
     (1) Display a hidden list in a field that has a Down Arrow in a box to the
     right of it.  (2) In a notebook, move the cursor to the notebook page from
     a notebook tab.
Alt+Esc
     Switch to the next open window, full-screen session, or icon that is
     minimized on the desktop.
Alt+Home
     Switch a DOS program between a window and a full screen.
Alt+Insert
     Create a new object and place it in the OS/2* clipboard.
Alt+Page Down
     In a notebook, move the cursor to the next page.
Alt+Page Up
     In a notebook, move the cursor to the previous page.
Alt+Shift+Tab
     Make the desktop window active.  (From a full-screen session, press
     Alt+Esc first.)
Alt+Up Arrow
     In a notebook, move the cursor from the notebook page to a notebook tab.
Alt+F4
     Close the active window.
Alt+F5
     Return the window to the size it was and the location it was in before you
     hid or maximized the window.
Alt+F6
     Move the cursor between windows that are associated; for example, move
     between an active program window and the help window for that program, or
     between the Master Help Index window and the help window that displays an
     index topic.
Alt+F7
     Enable you to move the active window to a different location.
Alt+F8
     Enable you to size the active window with the arrow keys.
Alt+F9
     Remove from the screen the active window and all windows associated to it.
     The windows are hidden or minimized, depending on how the program was
     written.
Alt+F10
     Enlarge the active window to its largest possible size (maximize).
Arrow keys
     Move the cursor left, right, up, or down to the next choice.
Backspace
     In an entry field, delete one character to the left of the cursor.
Backtab
     In an entry field, move the cursor to the character position defined by
     the previous tab stop.
Ctrl+End
     Move the cursor to the bottom-right position in the field in which the
     cursor is located.
Ctrl+Home
     Move the cursor to the top-left position in the field in which the cursor
     is located.
Ctrl+Insert
     Place a duplicate of the selected text or graphics into the OS/2 clipboard
     (copy).
Ctrl+Left Arrow
     Move the cursor to the beginning of the word to the left of the cursor.
Ctrl+Page Down (or PgDn)
     Scroll the contents of a window right one page to display information to
     the right of the visible window area.
Ctrl+Page Up (or PgUp)
     Scroll the contents of a window left one page to display information to
     the left of the visible window area.
Ctrl+Right Arrow
     Move the cursor to the end of the word to the right of the cursor.
Ctrl+Tab
     In a notebook or from an entry field, move the cursor to the next field.
Ctrl+/
     Select all items.
Ctrl+\
     Deselect all items.
Del
     In an entry field, delete the character to the right of the cursor.
Down Arrow
     Move the cursor down, if possible.
End
     Move to the last choice in a menu.  In an entry field, move the cursor to
     the end of the line.
Enter
     (1) Perform the default action that applies to the cursor location.  (2)
     In text, start a new line.

     You can use Enter on the numeric keypad to perform the default action, but
     not to start a new line.
Esc
     (1) Remove the window without sending any changes.  (2) Stop a
     direct-manipulation operation.  (3) Remove a menu that is displayed below
     a menu-bar choice, but keep the menu-bar choice selected.
First letter
     In a list, move to and select the next choice that starts with the letter
     you type.  The cursor or mouse pointer must be within the boundaries of
     the list.
F1
     Display specific help for the active window.  The help is related to the
     position of the cursor or the action you can perform in the window.
F5
     Update the contents of the active window (refresh).
F6
     Move the cursor in a clockwise direction from one window pane to another
     in a window that is split to display more than one view of an object.  For
     example, a word processing program might allow you to view four different
     parts of a document at one time in one window.
F10
     Move the cursor to or from the menu bar.
Home
     (1) Move the cursor to the left choice in a group of choices.  (2) In an
     entry field, move the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Insert
     In an entry field, switch between insert and replace modes for typing
     text.
Left Arrow
     Move the cursor left, if possible.
Page Down (PgDn)
     Scroll the contents of a window down one page to display information below
     the visible window area.
Page Up (PgUp)
     Scroll the contents of a window up one page to display information above
     the visible window area.
Print Screen
     Print the contents of the window in which the cursor is located.
Right Arrow
     (1) Move the cursor right, if possible. (2) Display the pop-up menu for a
     menu choice that has an arrow to the right.  For example, the menu from a
     menu bar might contain a choice with a pop-up menu.
Shift+Delete
     Remove the selected text or graphics from the active window and place it
     in the OS/2* clipboard (cut).
Shift+Down Arrow
     Extend selection from the current character position to the same position
     on the line below.
Shift+End
     Select from the cursor position to the end of the field.
Shift+Esc or Alt+Spacebar
     Switch to or from the title-bar icon.
Shift+Enter (New line)
     Perform the default action that applies where the cursor is located.
Shift+Home
     Select from the cursor position to the beginning of the field.
Shift+Insert
     Copy the contents of the OS/2 clipboard into the object on which the
     cursor is located (paste).
Shift+Left Arrow
     Extend the selection one character to the left of the cursor.
Shift+Page Down
     Extend the selection down one page.
Shift+Page Up
     Extend the selection up one page.
Shift+Right Arrow
     Extend the selection one character to the right of the cursor.
Shift+Tab
     (1) In a notebook, move the cursor to the previous field.  (2) In an entry
     field, move the cursor to the previous tab position.
Shift+Up Arrow
     Extend the selection from the current character position to the same
     position on the line above.
Shift+F8
     Start or stop selecting more than one object.
Shift+F10
      (1) Display the pop-up menu for the object on which the cursor is
     located.  (2) Display the pop-up menu for the desktop as follows:

    1. Press Alt+Shift+Tab.  (From a full-screen session, press Alt+Esc before
       this step.)
    2. Press Ctrl+\.
    3. Press Shift+F10.
Spacebar
     (1) Select or deselect the choice on which the cursor is located, for
     example, a check box or a choice in a list.  If the spacebar is assigned
     to another function, press Ctrl+Spacebar.  (2) In text, insert a space,
     where allowed.
Tab
     Move the cursor to the next field (entry field, check box, list, spin
     button, slider, first radio button, or first push button).  In an entry
     field, move the cursor to the next tab stop.
Underlined letter
     Move the cursor to and select a choice by typing the underlined letter,
     for example, in the menu bar or in a pop-up menu.
Up Arrow
     Move the cursor up, if possible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Object Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Key  Task

Arrow keys
     Move the cursor left, right, up, or down to the next object.
Ctrl+Mouse Button 2
     Copy an object.
Ctrl+Shift+Mouse Button 2
     Create a shadow of an object.
Delete
     Remove the selected object.
F1
     Display specific help for the selected object, for example, learn the
     actions you can perform when that object is open.
Print Screen
     Print the contents of the selected object.
Right Arrow
     Display the pop-up menu for a menu choice that has an arrow to the right.
     For example, in the pop-up menu for an object, there is an arrow to the
     right of Open.
Shift+F8
     Start or stop selecting more than one object.
Shift+F10
      (1) Display the pop-up menu for the object on which the cursor is
     located.  (2) Display the pop-up menu for the desktop as follows:

    1. Press Alt+Shift+Tab.  (From a full-screen session, press Alt+Esc before
       this step.)
    2. Press Ctrl+\.
    3. Press Shift+F10.
Shift+Mouse Button 2
     Move an object from the Templates folder.
Spacebar
     Select or deselect the object on which the cursor is located.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Selection Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select only one object and deselect all other objects:

 1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the object you want to select.
 2. Press Ctrl+Spacebar.

To select more than one object in consecutive order and deselect all other
objects:

 1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the first object you want to
    select.
 2. Press the Spacebar to select that object.
 3. Press and hold Shift.
 4. Use the arrow keys to continuously select objects; then release Shift.

To select one or more objects and add them to previously selected objects:

 1. Press Shift+F8; then release them.
 2. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each object you want to select;
    then press the Spacebar to select each object.
 3. Press Shift+F8.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49. Desktop: Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The desktop is a folder that represents the top of your desk.  It has objects
that you can move around and work with.

Use the choices in the pop-up menu for the desktop to do such tasks as:

o Arranging the icons on the desktop
o Finding an object
o Locking the keyboard and mouse
o Shutting down the operating system
o Changing the characteristics of the desktop folder
o Specifying settings for options such as colors and fonts

Use the Desktop - Settings notebook to change the characteristics (settings) of
the desktop folder.  For example, you might want to view the objects
differently.  You might want to display the objects in a vertical list with or
without icons.  For more information about using the Desktop - Settings
notebook, select Changing settings of objects from the "Related Information"
list below.

Double-click on the folder object to display the objects contained in it.

Note:   The contents of this folder might have changed since the operating
        system was installed.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Changing settings of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50. Copying to and from DOS and OS/2 Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sometimes when you start a program from a DOS or OS/2* command prompt, the
program runs in a window, contains a menu bar, and has cut, copy, and paste
functions available.  To find out how to cut, copy, and paste to and from such
a program, use the information that came with the program.

Sometimes, however, a program that runs in a DOS or OS/2 window might not have
a menu bar or support cut, copy, and paste.  Then the pop-up menu for the
window contains specific choices that enable you to copy text or graphics to
and from those windows.  The data is transferred in and out of the windows
through the OS/2 clipboard.

You can copy text or graphics from any DOS or OS/2 window to the OS/2
clipboard.  Likewise, you can copy any text or graphics from the OS/2 clipboard
to any DOS or OS/2 window.  A cut procedure is not available.

The text or graphics you copy from the clipboard can come from another DOS or
OS/2 window, a WIN-OS/2* session, or any program that has cut, copy, and paste
functions available.

Select an appropriate topic in the "Related Information" list below to find out
how to copy text to and from DOS and OS/2 windows.

To find out how to copy to or from a WIN-OS/2 session, select Copying or moving
information (clipboard) in the list below.

Select Examples to see an example of how to copy all text or graphics from the
clipboard to a DOS or OS/2 window.

Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Copying a block of text or graphics from DOS or OS/2 windows
o Copying all text or graphics from DOS or OS/2 windows
o Copying to DOS or OS/2 windows from the OS/2 clipboard
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51. Starting Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start an installed program, select the program object by double-clicking
mouse button 1.

There are other ways to start one or more programs, such as:

o From a command prompt (in one or more sessions)
o By associating (linking) program objects to data-file objects
o Automatically when you start the operating system  (Startup Folder)
o With one or more parameters
o From a WIN-OS/2* session (for Windows** programs)
o From a pop-up menu

For more information about the other ways to start programs, select the
appropriate topic in the list below.

Related Information:

o Starting a program from a command prompt
o Starting multiple sessions
o Starting programs automatically in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Associating program and data-file objects
o Starting programs at system startup
o Starting a program with parameters
o Finding an object
o Displaying objects on a drive
o Finding your programs
o Starting a WIN-OS/2 Session
o Installing new DOS programs
o Installing new OS/2 programs
o Installing new Windows programs
o Customizing pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52. Starting a Program from a Command Prompt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start a program from a command prompt:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select an appropriate command-prompt object.
 4. Type the command that starts the program.

To start a Windows** program from a command prompt, select DOS Full Screen or
OS/2 Full Screen and type WINOS2 before you type the program command.  If you
use the command prompt to start a program that has a program object, the
program will run full screen.  This happens even if you have the program object
set to a default whereby the program runs in a window when you start the
program by selecting its program object.

To find out how to start programs from multiple command-prompt sessions of the
same type (for example, to start one program in a DOS window and a different
program in another DOS window), select Starting multiple sessions in the
"Related Information" list below.

Note:   If your DOS or Windows program does not run the same in OS/2* 2.1 as it
        does in DOS, select Migrate applications or Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2
        settings in the list below.

Related Information:

o Starting multiple sessions
o Migrate applications
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53. Starting Multiple Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can run more than one session at a time.  For example, you can run two DOS
windows, a DOS full-screen session, an OS/2* window, two OS/2 full-screen
sessions, and a WIN-OS/2* full-screen session.  At the same time, you also can
run as many sessions as you want of programs that you start from program
objects.

To start more than one session of the same type (for example, two DOS window
sessions), copy the object and then select the new object to start the
duplicate session.  For example, if you want to run two DOS programs in
different windows, copy the DOS Window object and then select the new object.
For more information about copying an object, select Copying an object in the
"Related Information" list below.

Or, if you want to use multiple command-prompt sessions often, you can create a
template of the session.  Then you can drag a copy of the object from the
template icon and drop it in a new location.  To create a template of a
command-prompt session object:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select a command-prompt session object (for example, DOS Window).
 4. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 5. Select the General tab.
 6. Select the Template check box.

Select Examples to see how the icon for the object changes after you select
Template.

You also can start multiple sessions by changing what happens when you select
(double-click on) an object that is already open, for example, the program
object for a program that is running.  By default, the program object is
displayed as it was when you hid or minimized it.  If instead, you want to
start another session of that object, you have to change the default.  To find
out how to do this, select Customizing window behavior in the "Related
Information" list below.

Note:   If you start a DOS or Windows program in a session and it does not run
        the same in the OS/2 operating system as it does in DOS, select Migrate
        applications or Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings in the list below.

Related Information:

o Copying an object
o Migrate applications
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Starting Windows programs in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Customizing window behavior


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54. Types of Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The operating system contains objects, some of which are located in folder
objects.  Following are descriptions of some of the objects:

Folder
                    A container that is used to organize objects.  A folder can
                    contain objects or more folders.
Program object
                    An object that starts a program.
Data-file object
                    An object whose primary purpose is to convey information,
                    such as text, graphics, audio, or video.
Printer object
                    An object that provides a means of communication between a
                    computer and a print-output device, such as a printer or
                    plotter.

You can create additional folders or other objects by using one of the
following:

o Create another on the pop-up menu of an object
o Copy on the pop-up menu of an object
o An object in the Templates folder.

For more information about locating the data-file objects that represent the
files you used with a previous operating system, select Finding an object or
Displaying objects on a drive from the "Related Information" list below.

Depending on the installation choices that were selected and whether or not an
operating system was installed before, the system might contain folder objects
such as:

o Desktop
o Information
o DOS Programs
o OS/2 System
o Command Prompts
o Templates
o Drives.

Depending on the installation choices that were selected, the system might
contain other objects such as:

o Master Help Index
o Command Reference
o Shredder
o Font Palette
o Color Palette
o Mouse
o Keyboard.

Related Information:

o Creating another object
o Finding an object
o Displaying objects on a drive
o Printer object, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55. Installing New OS/2 Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To install OS/2* programs, including Presentation Manager* (PM*) programs,
follow the installation procedure provided by the program manufacturer.  Or you
can do the following:

 1. Insert the first program diskette in a diskette drive, for example in Drive
    A.
 2. Select the drive folder for the diskette drive you are using.  For example,
    select Drive A.  If the drive object you want is not on the desktop, select
    OS/2 System, select Drives, and then select the appropriate drive.
 3. Select the program-file object for installation (for example, INSTALL.EXE).

If the program does not create a program object during installation, do the
following so you can start the program from the desktop:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Migrate Applications.

If you need additional help, select the Help push button after the Find
Programs window is displayed.  For more information about migration, select
Migrate applications from the "Related Information" list below.

If you follow the installation procedure provided by the manufacturer, you
might need to use an OS/2 command prompt.  To display an OS/2 command prompt:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select OS/2 Window or OS/2 Full Screen.

Related Information:

o Migrate applications
o Copying objects from a diskette
o Installing new DOS programs
o Installing new Windows programs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56. File Types, Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File types enable you to create a special link (an association) between program
objects and data-file objects.  You then can open a program object and a
data-file object at the same time by selecting only the data-file object.  To
find out how to create an association, select Associating program and data-file
objects in the "Related Information." list below.

The following file types are supplied by the operating system.  A program can
add a new file type to this list.

o Assembler Code
o BASIC Code
o Binary Data
o Bitmap
o C Code
o COBOL Code
o DOS Command File
o Dynamic Link Library
o Executable
o FORTRAN code
o Icon
o Metafile
o OS/2 Command File
o Pascal Code
o Plain Text
o Printer1
o Resource File.

To display the current file types for a specific data-file object:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a data-file object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Type tab and view the Current Types list.

Related Information:

Associating program and data-file objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57. Starting a Program with Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify that a program start with parameters or have the program prompt
you to type parameters each time you select the program object or a data-file
object that is associated to that program object.

To specify parameters:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the program object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Program tab.
 5. Type parameters in the Parameter field.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Note:   Not all program objects need parameters when they are opened.  The
        documentation for the program should tell you if the program object
        needs any parameters and how to use them.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages
o Parameters


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58. Designating a Working Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Provide a path to a working directory if you are directed to do so by the
documentation that came with a program.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the program object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Program tab.
 5. Type the path to the working directory in the Working Directory field.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59. Creating a Work-Area Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a work-area folder when you want to put together objects that are
related to a specific task.  For example, you might create a work-area folder
to hold a current report, previous reports, and a printer with customized
settings.  Or you might create a work-area folder to include charts, documents,
and a plotter.

Work-area folders have two special features.  When you close the folder, all
windows belonging to the objects within the folder are closed automatically and
the view of each object is saved.  When you open the folder the next time, the
windows for the objects in the folder are displayed with their previous view.
The other feature is that when you hide the window of a work-area folder, all
windows belonging to the objects in the folder are hidden automatically.  When
you show the work-area folder (from the Window List), the windows for the
objects in the folder are displayed with their previous view.

If you minimize a work-area folder, only the icon for the work-area folder is
displayed in the Minimized Window Viewer or on the desktop.  The windows
belonging to the objects in the work-area folder are not displayed.

To create a work-area folder:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the folder.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the File tab.
 5. Select Work area on page 1.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Dragging an object
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60. Finding Your Old Data Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Each one of your old data files is represented by a data-file object.  Display
the contents of each drive on your computer to see where the data-file objects
are located.  After the objects are displayed, you can drag any data-file
object to a new location.

Related Information:

o Displaying objects on a drive
o Finding an object
o Dragging an object
o Finding your programs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61. Displaying File Information about Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File pages 1, 2, and 3 of the Settings notebook contain information about the
selected object.  Some of the information is provided by the system; some of it
is added or changed by the owner or user of the object.  For example, you can
view which flags are specified for the object, its size in bytes, or the date
it was created.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select File; change the File page if necessary.  (To view a different File
    page, use an arrow at the lower-right corner of the window.)

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.
Each File page has help available for that specific page.

You also can view size and date information for a folder by selecting the
Details view from the pop-up menu.  For more information, select Opening a
folder in the list below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62. Designating File Information about Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use File pages 1, 2, and 3 of the Settings notebook to provide information
about the selected object.  For example, you can specify the flags for the
object, or you can add comments or key phrases about the object.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select File; display a different File page if necessary.  (To view a
    different File page, use an arrow at the lower-right corner of the window.)

    For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is
    displayed.  Each File page has help available for that specific page.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63. Associating by File Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can associate one program object to one or more types of data-file objects.
For example, you can associate the Enhanced Editor to all data-file objects
that have the type Plain Text.

To associate one program object to all data-file objects that have one or more
specific file types:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the program object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Association tab.
 5. Select one or more types from the Available types list and select Add.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Note:  If your computer had a previous version of the OS/2* operating system
installed, any associations from that version still exist.  For example, assume
you had all your spreadsheet data-file objects linked to the same spreadsheet
program object.  When you select one of your spreadsheet data-file objects, the
spreadsheet data file will be displayed in the open spreadsheet program.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o File types, description


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64. Associating by File Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can associate one program object to one or more data-file objects.  For
example, you can associate a program object to all data-file objects that
represent files that have similar file names.  You can use global file-name
characters to indicate the data-file objects you want to associate.  For
example, you can associate all data-file objects that have the extension DOC,
TXT, and SCR to the Enhanced Editor.  Then each time you select a data-file
object with one of those extensions, the data-file object is displayed in the
open Enhanced Editor.

To associate one program object to all data-file objects that represent files
that have similar file names:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the program object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Association tab.
 5. Type a file name in the New name field and select Add.  You can use global
    file-name characters.  For example, type

           *.DOC

 6. Repeat the previous step for each file name you want to associate to the
    selected program object.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Note:  If your computer had a previous version of the OS/2* operating system
installed, any associations from that version still exist.  For example, assume
you had all your spreadsheet data-file objects linked to the same spreadsheet
program object.  When you select one of your spreadsheet data-file objects, the
spreadsheet data file will be displayed in the open spreadsheet program.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Global file-name characters


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65. Associating from Menu Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can create an association between one data-file object and one program
object by adding the name of the program object to the pop-up menu for the
data-file object.

To add the name of a program object to the pop-up menu for a data-file object:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a data-file object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Menu tab.
 5. Select Open in the Available menus list.
 6. Select Create another to the right of Actions on menu.
 7. Type a name in Menu item name to represent the program object.  For
    example, if you are associating to an editor, you can type My Editor.
 8. Type the file name, including extension, of the program object.  For
    example, type ABC.EXE.  Or select Find program.
 9. Select Ok.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

If there is now more than one program associated to this file (if there are two
program names below Settings in the pop-up menu) and you want the new program
object to be the default, select Making a menu item the default action in the
list below.

Note:  If your computer had a previous version of the OS/2* operating system
installed, any associations from that version still exist.  For example, assume
you had all your spreadsheet data-file objects linked to the same spreadsheet
program object.  When you select one of your spreadsheet data-file objects, the
spreadsheet data file will be displayed in the open spreadsheet program.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Global file-name characters
o Making a menu item the default action


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66. Designating or Deleting a File Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify one or more file types to describe a data-file object or a
program-file object.  Or you can delete a file type.

You can use file types to create a special link (an association) between a file
type and a program object.  For example, assume you have spreadsheet data-file
objects that have the type Plain Text.  You can associate all the Plain Text
objects to the program object that represents your spreadsheet program.  Or you
can associate all Plain Text files to another editor, for example, the Enhanced
Editor.

You also can use the file-type information with the Include procedure.  For
more information about finding an object, select from the "Related Information"
list below.

To assign or delete file types to a data-file or program-file object:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a data-file object or program-file object.
 2. Select Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Type tab.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Note:  Whenever you add or delete a file type, make sure that you have not
caused an undesired change in the default action that occurs when you open that
object.  For example, by default, all Plain Text files are associated to the
OS/2 System Editor.  Therefore, whenever you open a data-file object that has
only Plain Text as the file type, that object is displayed in the System
Editor, ready for editing.

Assume that Plain Text is the only type in the Current types list.  If you then
delete Plain Text from the list, there is no longer an association between your
data-file objects and the System Editor.  Therefore, the next time you select a
data-file object, the operating system will display the Settings notebook by
default.  To verify the default status of the open function for a data-file
object, select Making a menu item the default action from the following list.

Related Information:

o Associating program and data-file objects
o Associating by file type
o Making a menu item the default action
o Finding an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67. Designating or Changing the Session Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Before you open a program object, you can specify whether you want the program
to run in a window or in a full-screen session.  For example, you might want to
run an OS/2 program in a window, but a DOS program in a full screen.  To
specify or change the session type:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the program object.
 2. Select Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Session tab.
 5. Select an available window or full screen session.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

When you run a program in a DOS session, you can switch between window and full
screen without closing the program or the session.  Press Alt+Home from the
open DOS session, or do one of the following.  (Do not use the Home key on the
numeric keypad.  On the IBM Enhanced keyboards, use the Home key that is
between the Insert and Page Up keys).

To change the program type while a program is running in an open DOS window (to
change from window to full screen):

 1. Select the title-bar icon from the open DOS window or display the pop-up
    menu for the DOS Window object.
 2. Select Full-screen to switch the active program from window to full screen.

To change the program type while a program is running in an open DOS full
screen (to change from full screen to window):

 1. Press Alt+Esc repeatedly until the DOS Full Screen object is displayed.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the DOS Full Screen object.
 3. Select Windowed to switch the active program from full screen to window.

For additional help, select Windowed or Full-screen and press F1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Example of Creating a Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Example of Using F7 Key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68. Finding Mouse/Key Assignments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The mouse assignments are located in OS/2 2.1 Using the Operating System.
Sometimes a key is used in addition to a mouse button, for example, to create a
shadow.

There is a keyboard assignment for almost every mouse function.  To see the
keyboard-only assignments that apply to the OS/2* operating system, select Key
assignments from the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69. Example of Copying Text or Graphics from DOS or OS/2 Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For example, assume you run a compiler in a DOS window, the compiler does not
have a menu bar, data is displayed on the screen when the program ends, and you
want to copy that data into a data-file object which you are editing with the
OS/2 System Editor.  (The System Editor runs in an OS/2 window, and has a menu
bar to enable cut, copy, and paste functions).  Following is the procedure you
would use to copy all text to the OS/2 clipboard.

 1. Select the title-bar icon or display the pop-up menu for the open DOS
    window that contains the data from the compiler.
 2. Select Copy all.
 3. Switch to your data file in the System Editor.
 4. Use the appropriate choice on the menu bar in the System Editor to paste
    the text from the OS/2 clipboard to the open data file in the System
    Editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70. Copying a Block of Text or Graphics from DOS or OS/2 Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy a block of text or graphics to the OS/2* clipboard from a DOS or an
OS/2 window:

 1. Select the title-bar icon or display the pop-up menu for the open window
    from which you want to copy a block of text or graphics.
 2. Select Mark.
 3. Mark the text you want to copy to the OS/2 clipboard.
 4. Again select the title-bar icon or display the pop-up menu.
 5. Select Copy to move a duplicate of the marked text or graphics to the OS/2
    clipboard.

If you need additional help, highlight Mark or Copy and press F1.

Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Copying all text or graphics from DOS or OS/2 windows
o Copying to DOS or OS/2 windows from the OS/2 clipboard
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71. Copying All Text or Graphics from DOS or OS/2 Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy all text or graphics to the OS/2* clipboard from a DOS or an OS/2
window:

 1. Select the title-bar icon or display the pop-up menu for the open window
    from which you want all text or graphics.
 2. Select Copy all to move all text or graphics to the OS/2 clipboard.

If you need additional help, select Copy all and press F1.

Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Copying a block of text or graphics from DOS or OS/2 windows
o Copying to DOS or OS/2 windows from the OS/2 clipboard
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72. Copying to DOS or OS/2 Windows from the OS/2 Clipboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy all text or graphics from the OS/2* clipboard to a DOS or an OS/2
window:

 1. Make sure the active window is the session in which you want to copy the
    text or graphics from the OS/2 clipboard.
 2. Select the title-bar icon or display the pop-up menu for the open window in
    which you want to place a copy of the data in the OS/2 clipboard.
 3. Select Paste.

If you need additional help, highlight Paste and press F1.

Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Copying a block of text or graphics from DOS or OS/2 windows
o Copying all text or graphics from DOS or OS/2 windows
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73. Starting A Program Minimized ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the program you want to start minimized.
 2. Select Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Session tab.
 5. Select Start minimized.
For additional help, select the Help push button when the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74. Fonts that Meet Standards ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Some countries require that the size and contrast of characters on a display
screen meet Standard 9241 Part 3 of the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) and the German DIN 66234 Standard.  Fonts specified in
these standards produce characters that are easy to read.

If you select an OS/2 2.1 font that does not comply with these standards, a
message will be displayed in the window.

To comply with these standards, select a font that does not cause the message
to be displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the index entry programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Virtual DOS Machine (VDM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the index entry DOS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75. Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the Program page in the Settings notebook of a selected program
object or program-file object to type parameters that will affect the way the
program starts.

Not all program objects need parameters when they are opened.  The
documentation for the program should tell you if the program object needs any
parameters and how to use them.

You can add a program name to the pop-up menu for a folder object so you can
start that program by selecting the choice on the pop-up menu.  However, you
must consider the following information about parameters.  When you start a
program, the operating system sends any parameters to the program.  The
operating system considers the name of a folder a parameter, so the operating
system sends the folder name to the program when you select a program-name
choice from the pop-up menu.  Some programs, such as DOS and OS/2* sessions,
cannot accept a folder name as a parameter.

If you try to start a program from the pop-up menu of a folder and the program
does not start or displays an error message, you can stop the name of the
folder from being sent to the program by doing the following:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the program object or program-file object that
    was referenced when you added the program name to the pop-up menu.  For
    example, you might have dragged the DOS Full-Screen object from the Command
    Prompts folder to the Menu page of the Settings notebook for the Desktop
    folder.  If so, display the pop-up menu for DOS Full Screen in the Command
    Prompts folder.
 2. Select Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Program tab.
 5. Type the following in the Parameters field:

           %

 6. Close the Settings notebook.

Note:   You cannot use the above procedure if you associated the program object
        to one or more data-file objects and you want to continue to start the
        program each time you open one or more of those associated data-file
        objects.  When the operating system processes the % parameter, it does
        not send the name of any object to the program.  The name of the
        Desktop folder is not sent to the program but neither is the name of
        the data-file object you had associated to that program.  The program
        will start without receiving the name of the associated data-file
        object. For more information about associations, select Associating
        program and data-file objects in the "Related Information" list below.

If you want to type parameters each time you start the program object, type a
left bracket character, a space, and a right bracket character in the
Parameters field, as follows:

  [ ]

When you start the program object, you are then prompted to type the parameters
you want to use.

If you want a special set of characters to be displayed or want to be prompted
by a special set of characters each time you start the program object, type a
left bracket, followed by the characters, followed by a right bracket.  For
example, if you want to be prompted by the words "This is my text editor," type

  [This is my text editor]

The %* parameter is provided by the operating system.  It sends the drive
letter and path and file name of a program to the program when it is opened.
The %* parameter enables you to open a data-file object at the same time you
open a program object, in one of two ways.  You can drag the data-file object
to the program object and drop it.  Or, you can open a data-file object that
you associated to a program.  For more information about associations, select
Associating program and data-file objects from the "Related Information" list
below.

When you type parameters in the Parameters field, the operating system sends
those parameters to the program object when it is opened and then sends the %*
parameter.

Note:   Some programs require that a program-specific parameter be the last
        parameter sent to the program object when it starts.  In that case, you
        must type %* somewhere before the program-specific parameter.

For example, assume you have an editor that has a program object named My
Favorite Editor.  You always want to open the program object with the program
parameter NOTABS.  The program requires that the NOTABS parameter be the last
one sent to the program object.  Therefore, you would type the following in the
Parameters field:

  %* /notabs

Assume that you have created a data-file object named ABC.TXT.  If you drag the
icon for ABC.TXT and drop it on the icon for My Favorite Editor, the program
object for the editor is opened with the NOTABS option and ABC.TXT is
displayed.

If you open My Favorite Editor (the program object) without dropping a
data-file object over it, the %* is ignored and My Favorite Editor is opened
with the NOTABS parameter.  No data-file object is displayed in My Favorite
Editor.

If you do not want the operating system to send the drive letter and path and
file name of the program to the program when it is opened, you can specify
which parts you want to send by typing a % parameter that is different from %*.
The other % parameters are:

%**P
     Insert drive and path information without the last backslash (\).
%**D
     Insert drive with ':' or UNC name.
%**N
     Insert file name without extension.
%**F
     Insert file name with extension.
 %**E
     Insert extension without leading dot.  In HPFS, the extension always comes
     after the last dot.

Assume you have the data-file object TEST.SCR.  You want to edit it with the
program ABC.EXE, and then save the edited file with the name TEST.OUT in path
OUT on drive D.  In the Parameters field for the program object ABC.EXE, you
would type the following:

   %* d:\out\%**N.out

Related Information

o File and directory concepts
o Associating program and data-file objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76. Using Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select Information.
 2. Select Command Reference.
 3. Select the + sign to the left of OS/2 Commands by Task Category.
 4. Select the task category about the information you want.

For additional help, select Options, then Index.

Related Information:

Using command prompts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77. System Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The  CONFIG.SYS file is part of the operating system and is installed
automatically.  The system reads this file and assigns the specified values to
the configurable system options.  Options that do not have specified values are
assigned default values by the system.

You can modify the CONFIG.SYS file with any text editor.

To implement any changes you make to the CONFIG.SYS file, you must shut down
the system and then either reset it by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del, or turn it off
and restart it.

The commands, or statements, that you can use in the CONFIG.SYS file are listed
in the OS/2 Command Reference.  The areas you can modify include:  system
startup, installation of device drivers for peripheral devices, application
environments (DOS and OS/2), file input and output, memory management, and
country support.

Commands that can be used more than once in the CONFIG.SYS file are DEVICE,
DEVINFO, IOPL, REM, RUN, SET, and TRACE.

During installation, the CONFIG.SYS file is copied from the system diskette,
called OS/2 Disk 1, to the root directory of the drive from which the system is
started.  If the CONFIG.SYS file is destroyed or corrupted, you must copy the
CONFIG.SYS file that is in the C:\OS2\INSTALL directory and add any changes you
have made to it.  It is recommended that you keep a current back-up copy of
your CONFIG.SYS file.

If a CONFIG.SYS file already exists when you install your system, it will be
renamed CONFIG.BAK.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select a command
named below to link to the information there.  If you have not installed the
Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation after installation."

Related Information:

o DEVICE
o DEVINFO
o IOPL
o PROTSHELL
o REM
o RUN
o SET
o TRACE
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78. Command Language ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In general, the recommended way of interacting with the system is through the
Workplace Shell.  Another way is by typing commands at the OS/2* and DOS
command prompts.  Using the command language increases the number of activities
supported by the system.

Commands need not be started from a command prompt.  Instead, they can be
started automatically in the following ways:

o By using a batch or command file
o By selecting the program name from the list of running programs in the Window
  List
o By selecting the icon representing an executable, batch, or command program.

Related Information:

o Batch files
o Using command prompts
o Using commands


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79. Batch Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A batch file contains a series of commands which are processed in sequence when
you type the name of the file at a command prompt.  You can create a batch file
with any text editor.

Names of batch files should be simple and should not duplicate the names of
internal system files, such as COPY or DIR.  The file extension, CMD, is used
for command files that run in OS/2* sessions; BAT is the extension for batch
files that run in DOS sessions.

Batch files created to run under DOS (.BAT) can be started from an OS/2
session.  The OS/2 command processor recognizes the BAT file extension,
automatically starts a DOS command processor, and ends when the batch operation
is complete.

DOS batch files that are not dependent on programs that will run only in DOS,
can run in OS/2 sessions if you change the file extension to CMD.

Each batch file is started in a separate session.  The directory, drive, and
environment are unique to each instance of the command processor.  If you start
multiple command processors, each will retain its settings as you switch from
session to session.

The system searches for file extensions in the following order: COM (internal
system commands), EXE (executable programs), CMD (OS/2 command files), and BAT
(DOS batch files).  Both the OS/2 and DOS command processors are sensitive to
file extensions.  For example, the command processor will look for a batch file
named XYZ.BAT as XYZ and not search for the other extensions.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select a command
named below to link to the information there.  If you have not installed the
Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation after installation."

Related Information:

o CALL
o ECHO
o ENDLOCAL
o EXTPROC
o FOR
o GOTO
o IF
o PAUSE
o REM
o SETLOCAL
o SHIFT
o Adding online documentation after installation
o Command operators and redirecting input and output
o Substitution variables

Select the Examples push button for examples of batch files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Batch File Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXAMPLE 1:

ECHO OFF
REM This batch command will make a backup copy of the CONFIG.SYS file
REM in the C:\OS2 directory.
ECHO Backing up CONFIG.SYS to C:\OS2.
ECHO If a modified CONFIG.SYS does not work, copy this one back to C:.
COPY C:\CONFIG.SYS C:\OS2\CONFIG.SYS
ECHO This program has finished.

EXAMPLE 2:

ECHO OFF
REM This batch file will print any standard text file.
REM To use it, type in the file name to be printed after you
REM have typed in the the name of this batch file.
REM If the batch file is named PRINT.CMD and the file to be
REM printed is named README type PRINT README.
ECHO Printing %1.
TYPE %1 > lPT1
ECHO ON

EXAMPLE 3:

ECHO OFF
REM This batch file will change your OS/2 command line prompt to
REM display the date, time, and current path.
PROMPT $d     $t     $_$p\$s
ECHO ON
CLS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80. Command Operators and Redirecting Input and Output ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Command operators are special characters that can be used instead of a sequence
of commands.  The operators can be typed at a command prompt or be included in
a batch file.

The operating system reads the command operators as commands rather than as
regular input characters.  If you intend to use the command operators as input
characters, they must be preceded by the Escape character ( ^ ).  Some command
operators are valid in OS/2* sessions only.

The following are the command operators in the order in which the operating
system recognizes them.

^         Enables command operators to be recognized as regular input or output
          characters.  Valid in OS/2 sessions only.

( )       Groups commands so that they override the regular order of precedence
          recognized by the command processor.  Valid in OS/2 sessions only.

>         Redirects output to a file or device.

>>        Appends redirected output to an existing file.

<         Retrieves and redirects input from the standard input device.

A program can receive input from sources other than the keyboard, and can send
output to devices other than the screen. But by convention, the keyboard is the
standard input device (STDIN), and the screen, the standard output device
(STDOUT). Error output is sent to a standard file (STDERR).

You can redirect the input to and output from a program only if the program is
reading from STDIN and writing to STDOUT, including STDERR.  You cannot
redirect program input and output if the program reads directly from the
keyboard and writes directly to the screen.

Each standard device is identified by a number called a handle STDIN is 0,
STDOUT is 1, and STDERR is 2. Only one redirection operation per handle is
permissible.  If more than one operation is specified, only the last one is
recognized.

|         Intercepts the output of one running program and sends it as input to
          another running program.  This is also called a pipe.

The pipe, ASCII character 124, can be displayed as a solid vertical bar ( | )
or a split vertical bar, depending on the code page or keyboard used.

Note:   When there is an invalid command, program, or batch file on the left
        side of the pipe, the command on the right side of the pipe will not
        take effect.  For example:

                xxxx 2>&1 | MORE

will not pipe the error output to MORE because xxxx is an invalid program.

Filters are system utilities that intercept data from the standard input device
(STDIN), process it, and send it to the standard output device (STDOUT).
Filters can be used with a pipe.

OS/2 provides three filters: SORT, FIND, and MORE.

&&        Conditionally processes a sequence of commands.  A command in the
          sequence can be processed only if the preceding command runs
          successfully.  Valid in OS/2 sessions only.

||        Conditionally processes a sequence of commands.  A command in the
          sequence can be processed only if the preceding command fails to run
          successfully.  Valid in OS/2 sessions only.

&         Unconditionally processes individual commands in a sequence,
          regardless of the success or failure of preceding commands in the
          sequence.  Valid in OS/2 sessions only.

Related Information:

Batch files

Select the Examples push button for examples of command operators and I/O
redirection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Command Operators and Redirecting I/O Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXAMPLES:

This example demonstrates the use of the ^ command operator. To display the
following output on the screen:

TYPE YOUR AGE & SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER ==>

type:

ECHO TYPE YOUR AGE ^& SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER ==^>

This example demonstrates the use of the ( ) command operator. In this example,
the file called MYPROG is compiled. The resulting, compiled file is named
MYPROG.OUT.  If the compilation is successful, MYPROG.OUT is linked with
another file called ANYPROG.IN.

(COMPILE MYPROG;>MYPROG.OUT) && (LINK MYPROG.OUT;<ANYPROG.IN)

If you forget to end the group with a closing parenthesis, the message,

(More ?)

is displayed to prompt you.

These examples demonstrate the use of the > command operator.

Example 1

The output of the DIR command is a list of files in the current directory.  The
list is displayed on the standard output device, the screen.  To redirect the
output of the DIR command to the printer, type:

DIR > PRN

Example 2

To redirect the output of the DIR command to a new file called LISTING, type:

DIR > LISTING

The file named LISTING will be created automatically. If it already exists, it
will be overwritten.

Example 3

Redirection handles used in place of file names must be preceded by an &.  To
send all output and error listings from the DIR command to a new file named
FILELOG, type:

DIR *.* >FILELOG 2>&1

To send the output of a compilation of MYPROG.C to a file called OUT, and send
the error listing to a file called ERROR, type:

C MYPROG.C >OUT;2>ERROR

Example 4

This sequence of commands runs APP, sends the output to a new file called
DATALOG, writes the error listing to the standard error (STDERR) file, and
redirects the error listing to the file called "1".

DETACH >DATALOG APP 2>1

Example 5

You can send output to any standard output device.  Output not echoed to the
screen can be sent to the NUL device, meaning that the output is discarded.  To
send the standard output and error listing from MYPROG to a NUL file,
discarding both, type:

MYPROG 1>NUL 2>NUL

These examples demonstrate the use of the >> command operator.

Example 1

To append the output of the DIR command to an existing file called LISTING,
type:

DIR >> LISTING

Example 2

As each command is run, the command and its output are echoed to the screen.
This output listing is useful at debug time, but you may want to control what
is displayed on the screen. Including the ECHO command in a batch file (set to
On or OFF) controls the screen echo from within the file.

To display the word HELLO on the screen and append the error listing to an
existing file called OUTFILE, type:

ECHO "HELLO"2>>OUTFILE

This example demonstrates the use of the < command operator. Normally, a
program receives input from the standard input device, the keyboard.  To send
data to a program called MYPROG from a file called DATA.IN (rather than from
the keyboard), type:

MYPROG <DATA.IN

You will receive an error if the data file you specify does not exist.

These examples demonstrate the use of the | command operator.

Example 1

To display the output of the DIR command as a sorted list of files in the
current directory, type:

DIR | SORT

Example 2

To also send the sorted list of files in the current directory to a file named
ABCLIST, type:

DIR | SORT > ABCLIST

Example 3

To display the contents of a file called ABCLIST, one screen at a time, type:

TYPE ABCLIST | MORE

Example 4

To send the output of the DIR command as input to the SORT command, starting
with the 25th column, and then sort and display the output on the screen, type:

DIR | SORT /+24

Example 5

This command sends the output of the DIR command as input to the SORT command,
redirects the output of the SORT command to the screen, and displays this
output, one screen at a time.

DIR | SORT | MORE

This example demonstrates the use of the && command operator. To determine if a
file named MEMO exists and, if so, to display its output on the screen, type:

DIR MEMO && TYPE MEMO

This example demonstrates the use of the || command operator. To display a file
named MEMO, but also look in the ABC subdirectory if it is not found in the
current directory, type:

TYPE MEMO || TYPE ABC\MEMO

These examples demonstrate the use of the & command operator.

Example 1

To copy MYPROG from drive C to drive D and erase it from drive C, type:

COPY C:\MYPROG.C D: & ERASE C:\MYPROG

Example 2

To display all the files in drive C with the extension BAT, and all the files
in drive D with the extension CMD, type:

DIR C:*.BAT & DIR D:*.CMD


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81. Substitution Variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Substitution variables are the characters %0 through %9.  When these variables
are in a batch file, they are replaced, in sequence, by the values specified at
the time the batch-file name is entered.

The operating system reads the percent sign (%) as a command rather than as a
regular input character.  If you intend to use the percent sign as an input
character, you must specify it twice.  ABC%.IN would be ABC%%.IN.  More than
nine variables can be specified by using the SHIFT command.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select a command
named below to link to the information there.  If you have not installed the
Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation after installation."

Related Information:

o SHIFT
o Adding online documentation after installation
o Batch files

Select the Examples push button for examples of substitution variables.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Substitution Variables Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Example

A command file named SAMPLE.CMD contains the variables, %1 and %2.

COPY %1 %2
TYPE %2 | MORE

Before running the program, you must specify the values of %1 and %2.

SAMPLE A:DATA.OLD  C:INFO.NEW

The system automatically assigns the name of the command file, SAMPLE, to the
%0 variable. DATA.OLD is substituted for %1. INFO.NEW is substituted for %2.
The TYPE command displays the output of INFO.NEW on the screen. The MORE
command displays the output of INFO.NEW, one screen at a time.

The output of the SAMPLE command file would be the same as from this sequence
of commands.

COPY A:DATA.OLD C:INFO.NEW
TYPE C:INFO.NEW | MORE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82. Environment Variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Environment variables that may change, such as the printer device, can be
specified in a batch file.  Delimit the environment variable by a percent sign
(%).

For example, this statement in a command file specifies the current search path
for the environment variables.

%PATH%

You also can temporarily change the value of an environment variable.  Using
the SETLOCAL command, you can make a local copy of the environment space, the
current directory, and the current drive, returning the value with the ENDLOCAL
command.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select a command
named below to link to the information there.  If you have not installed the
Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation after installation."

Related Information:

o APPEND
o DPATH
o ENDLOCAL
o PATH
o SET
o SETLOCAL
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83. AUTOEXEC.BAT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The batch file, AUTOEXEC.BAT, is installed automatically with the system.  Its
main purpose is to process commands that set up the system for DOS sessions.
The file also can start other batch files and programs.

After the AUTOEXEC.BAT file is installed, you can modify it with any text
editor.  Any command described in the OS/2 Command Reference can be used in
this file.

The commands that are used often are APPEND, CALL, ECHO, PATH, PROMPT, REM, and
SET.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select a command
named below to link to the information there.  If you have not installed the
Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation after installation."

Related Information:

o APPEND
o CALL
o ECHO
o PATH
o PROMPT
o REM
o SET
o Adding online documentation after installation

Select the Examples push button for examples of AUTOEXEC.BAT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> AUTOEXEC.BAT Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Example 1

PATH C:\OS2;\MDOS;C:\;
LOADHIGH APPEND=C:\OS2;C:\OS2\SYSTEM
CALL HELP ON

o The PATH command specifies the search path for the DOS environment variables
  and external OS/2 commands.
o The LOADHIGH command specifies that the APPEND program is to be loaded into
  an upper memory block (UMB, between 640KB and 1MB).
o The APPEND command specifies the search path for data files and utilities
  needed for processing but located outside the current directory.
o The CALL command starts a batch file that displays information about getting
  help.

Example 2

To back up the contents of the root directory on drive C to more than one
diskette on drive A, and be notified if the backup succeeds or fails, type:

BACKUP C:\*.* A: \S
IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO ERROR
ECHO BACKUP WAS SUCCESSFUL
GOTO END
:ERROR
ECHO BACKUP FAILED!
:END


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84. Finding an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate an object (for example, a previously used program):

 1. Display the pop-up menu for any folder by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.  To display the pop-up menu for the Desktop
    folder, click mouse button 2 on an area away from all objects.
 2. Select Find.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Finding your old programs
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85. Creating and Recovering INI Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

System settings, such as application defaults, display options, and file
options are contained in the OS2.INI startup file located in the C:\OS2
directory of your hard disk.  (It is assumed here that the operating system is
installed on drive C; if not, then refer to the drive on which the OS/2
operating system is installed).

There is also a system file called OS2SYS.INI that contains information about
installed fonts and printer drivers.  If you receive a message stating that the
OS2.INI file is damaged, the OS2.INI file on your system must be replaced by a
valid OS2.INI file.

During the installation process, the MAKEINI program was added to the C:\OS2
directory on your hard disk.  The MAKEINI.EXE file creates a new OS2.INI file
containing default information.  You can recreate both the user and system INI
files using the MAKEINI program at a command prompt.

You can protect your INI files by having them automatically backed up each time
you start your system.  For example, if you include the following statements in
your CONFIG.SYS file, a backup copy of your current INI files and a backup copy
of the INI files as they existed at the previous system startup will be made.

CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\*.INX C:\OS2\*.INY
CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\OS2*.INI C:\OS2\*.INX

By copying the INI files this way, you will always be able to recover a recent
version of these files in case the user INI file becomes damaged.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can proceed as indicated
below.  If you have not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding
online documentation after installation."

For more information about recovering user and system INI files and creating
new INI files, select MAKEINI in the Related Information.

Related Information:

o Adding online documentation after installation
o MAKEINI


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86. Problem Determination Using Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can proceed as indicated
below.  If you have not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding
online documentation after installation."

 1. Select Information.
 2. Select Command Reference.
 3. Select the + sign to the left of OS/2 Commands by Task Category.
 4. Select Problem Determination to display a list of commands and the function
    of each in the problem determination process.
 5. Select the command containing the information you want.

For additional help, select Options, then Index.

Related Information:

Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87. Sorting a Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify how you want the contents of a folder sorted by selecting
choices on the Sort pop-up menu of the folder.  You can sort the contents of a
folder by name, type, or specific attributes such as size.  You can specify
what items are displayed on the Sort pop-up menu by using the Sort page in the
Settings notebook of the folder.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a folder.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Sort.
 3. Select how you want the folder sorted from the menu that is displayed.

If you want to add to or change the contents of the Sort pop-up menu such as
change the sort default:

 1. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 2. Select Settings.
 3. Select Sort.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 88. Changing the View of an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can look at or change folder properties including icon display, object
types to be viewed, and specific details (attributes) of those objects.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a folder.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select View.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 89. Logging System Errors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To activate the logging of system errors, you must have the DEVICE=LOG.SYS and
RUN=LOGDAEM.EXE statements in your CONFIG.SYS file.  You can then use the
SYSLOG utility program to display the system error log file.  You can find
information about these statements in the OS/2 Command Reference.

If you have installed the SYSLOG utility program and the Command Reference, you
can proceed as indicated below.  If you have not installed these items, refer
to "Adding options after installation" and "Adding online documentation after
installation."

 1. Select Information.
 2. Select Command Reference.
 3. Select the + sign to the left of OS/2 Commands by Name.
 4. Select the DEVICE (LOG.SYS) and RUN-LOGGING DAEMON commands from the list
    of commands.
 5. Add the necessary statements to your CONFIG.SYS file.
 6. Select OS/2 System.
 7. Select Command Prompts.
 8. Select OS/2 full screen or OS/2 window.
 9. Type SYSLOG at the command prompt and press Enter.

For additional help, select Help after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Adding online documentation after installation
o Adding options after installation
o System configuration


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 90. Formatting the Contents of the Trace Buffer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To activate the tracing process and enable the TRACEFMT utility program, you
must have the TRACE or TRACEBUF statements in your CONFIG.SYS file.  You can
then use the TRACEFMT program to format system trace data.  You can find
information about these statements in the OS/2 Command Reference.

If you have installed the TRACEFMT utility program and the Command Reference,
you can proceed as indicated below.  If you have not installed these items,
refer to "Adding options after installation" and "Adding online documentation
after installation."

 1. Select Information.
 2. Select Command Reference.
 3. Select the + sign to the left of OS/2 Commands by Name.
 4. Select the TRACE or TRACEBUF commands from the list of commands.
 5. Add the necessary statements to your CONFIG.SYS file.
 6. Select OS/2 System.
 7. Select Command Prompts.
 8. Select OS/2 full screen or OS/2 window.
 9. Type TRACEFMT at the command prompt and press Enter.

For additional help, select Help after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Adding online documentation after installation
o Adding options after installation
o System configuration


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 91. Using REXX Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select Information.
 2. Select REXX Information.
 3. Expand the Contents by moving the pointer to the + signs and clicking mouse
    button 1 to view all topics.

For additional help, select Options, then Index.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 92. Using PMREXX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use PMREXX to view the output of REXX programs that have the extension of .CMD.

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select OS/2 full screen or OS/2 window.
 4. Type PMREXX followed by the file name of the REXX program you want to run
    at the command prompt and press Enter.

Note:   You do not need to type the .CMD extension to run a REXX program.

For additional help, select Help after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 93. Creating BASICA and QBASIC Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create BASICA or QBASIC programs, do the following:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select OS/2 full screen, OS/2 window, DOS full screen, or DOS window.
 4. Type BASICA or QBASIC at the command prompt and press Enter.

Note:   BASICA does not work on non-IBM hardware systems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 94. Copying Text Using the System Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy text while in the System Editor, use the Copy and Paste choices on the
Edit menu.

To copy text from the System Editor to a DOS session or OS/2 window session or
from a DOS session or OS/2 window session to the System Editor, you need to use
the pop-up menu for that session in addition to the System Editor menu.

To copy text from the System Editor to a DOS session or OS/2 window session:

 1. Mark the text to be copied.
 2. Select Edit.
 3. Select Copy.  This places a copy of the marked text on the clipboard.
 4. Make sure the active window is the session in which you want to copy the
    text.  Move the mouse pointer to where the text is to appear.
 5. Display the pop-up menu for the session.
 6. Select Paste.

If you need help, highlight Paste and press F1.

To copy text from one file to another, or to another place in the same file,
while using the System Editor:

 1. Select the text to be copied.
 2. Select Edit.
 3. Select Copy.  This places a copy of marked text on the clipboard.
 4. Move the cursor to where you want the text to appear. (If you are copying
    the text to another file, make sure the file is open).
 5. Select Edit.
 6. Select Paste

If you need help, highlight the Copy and Paste choices on the Edit menu and
press F1.

Related Information:

o Clipboard, description of
o Copying to and from DOS and OS/2 sessions
o Using the OS/2 clipboard
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 95. Partitioning Hard Disks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the Fixed Disk utility program (FDISK) to partition the hard disks
on your system.

If you have installed FDISK, you can proceed as indicated below.  If you have
not installed FDISK, refer to "Adding options after installation."

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select OS/2 full screen or OS/2 window.
 4. Type FDISK at the command prompt and press Enter.

For additional help, select Help after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Adding options after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 96. Partitioning Hard Disks with FDISKPM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the Fixed Disk utility program in a window (FDISKPM) to partition
the hard disks on your system.

If you have installed FDISKPM, you can proceed as indicated below.  If you have
not installed FDISKPM, refer to "Adding options after installation."

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for Drives by moving the mouse pointer to it and
    clicking mouse button 2.
 3. Select Create Partition.

For additional help, select Help after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Adding options after installation
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 97. Displaying Logos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify if you want the product information including logos to be
displayed on the screen and for how long.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select System.
 4. Select the Logo tab.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 98. Customizing Window Behavior ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify if you want window animation on or off.  You can also select
how you want a window that is already open to be displayed and where you want
windows that you have minimized to be displayed.

To customize window behavior for an individual object:

 1. Display the menu for the object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Window tab.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

To customize window behavior for the system (change system defaults):

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select System.
 4. Select the Window tab.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 99. Confirming Delete Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify if you want a confirmation message displayed each time you
delete an object or a folder.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select System.
 4. Select the Confirmations tab.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 100. Recovering Deleted or Erased Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can recover deleted or erased files by using the UNDELETE command.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select UNDELETE from
the "Related Information" list to display information about this command.  If
you have not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online
documentation after installation."

Related Information:

o UNDELETE
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 101. Backing Up Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can back up all files and directories on your system by using the BACKUP
command.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select BACKUP from
the "Related Information" list to display information about this command.  If
you have not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online
documentation after installation."

Related Information:

o BACKUP
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Changing Display Adapter Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Adding or changing display adapter support is done automatically by the OS/2
Installation program.

To change your display adapter support after you have installed the OS/2*
operating system, do the following:

Note:   Make sure you have your installation diskettes before you begin this
        procedure.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Selective Install.
 4. Select from the System Configuration window Primary Display or Secondary
    Display.
 5. Select OK.
 6. Select the display adapter that you want from the list provided.
 7. Select OK.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

To change the screen resolution for your XGA display adapter:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select System.
 4. Select the Screen tab.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

To select the display type for your XGA display adapter:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select System Setup.
 3. Select System.
 4. Select the Screen tab.
 5. Go to page 2 by using the arrow at the lower-right corner of the window.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Adding options after installation
o Using commands


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Organization of OS/2 Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2* 2.1 library consists of both books and online information.  The
following is a brief description of the library.

BOOKS

Quick Reference
               Quick path for installation and common operating system tasks

Installation Guide
               Detailed installation instructions

Using the Operating System
               Description of primary concepts and features; discussion of the
               Workplace Shell; information about hardware and software
               compatibility

ONLINE INFORMATION

Tutorial
               Workplace Shell introduction; discussion of common user tasks

Master Help Index
               Reference point for all conceptual and task information

Glossary
               Terminology definitions

Start Here
               High level list of tasks

Command Reference
               Information about OS/2 commands

REXX Information
               REXX overview; REXX instructions and functions

Related Information:

Opening the information folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 102. Getting Help for Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2* operating system displays system messages for warnings, errors, and
general information.

If the message begins with SYS:

 1. Go to the DOS or OS/2 command prompt (see "Related Information " below).
 2. Type HELP, followed by a space, and the number after SYS.  For example, to
    get help for the message starting with SYS0015, type:
        HELP 15

 3. Press Enter.
Some system messages are displayed in a full-screen window and offer one or
more of the following choices:

o Return error code to program - If you select this choice, the program might
  allow the process to continue, depending on the program error.  If not, the
  process ends.  The program might provide a message and the help for that
  message will include corrective actions that include directions regarding the
  options offered on the screen displaying the message.
o End program/command/operation - Stop the program, command, or operation.
o Retry command or operation - Try the command or operation again.
o Display help - See an explanation and recommended action for the error
  message.

The Presentation Manager* (PM) messages provide general information and error
information.  When a condition prevents the completion of a request, a message
appears in a window with push buttons that enable the user to make decisions
about the continuing the process or operation.

For additional help about an error message, select the Help push button in the
message window.

Related Information:

o Starting a DOS session
o Starting an OS/2 session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 103. Activating Sticky Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Sticky keys input method lets you press and release a series of keys (for
example, Ctrl+Alt+Del) sequentially but have the keys behave as if the keys
were pressed and released at the same time.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Keyboard.
 4. Select Settings.
 5. Select Special Needs.
 6. Select the Settings activation On radio button.
 7. For each key you want to act as a sticky key, press Shift 3 times; then
    press the key you want to stay stuck down.
 8. Repeat the previous step for each key that you want to behave as a sticky
    key.

To deactivate sticky keys:

Press and release each sticky key one time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 104. Changing Keyboard Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Keyboard to customize your keyboard to your preference, and to set the
keyboard typematic rates for special needs use.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Double-click on Keyboard.
 4. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.

For additional information, select the Help push button after the window is
displayed.

Note:   Select the Special Needs tab to change the settings that support
        handicapped users.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object.
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening an object
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 105. Setting the Keyboard for Handicapped Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Double-click on Keyboard.
 4. Select the Special Needs tab.

For additional information, select the Help push button after the window is
displayed.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object.
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening an object
o Key assignments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 106. Switching Between Running Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Click mouse button 1 on the window of the program you want to switch to.

By default, all your program objects also appear in the Minimized Window Viewer
folder on the desktop.

To switch to a running program using the Minimized Window Viewer:

 1. Double-click on the folder that contains the program you want.
 2. Double-click on the name of the program you want to switch to.

Or:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Double-click on  the name of the window you want to switch to.

For additional information, select the Help push button after the selected
window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Displaying Window List
o Selecting an object
o Switching between sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o Switching between tasks in a WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Exiting from a WIN-OS/2 session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 107. Opening the Information Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select Information.
 2. Select the information object you want to use such as:

o Command Reference
o REXX Information
o Glossary
o Tutorial.

For additional information, select the Help push button after the window is
displayed.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Opening an object
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 108. Displaying the Master Help Index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Master Help Index on the desktop.

The index entries are displayed in a notebook.  Select an entry from the list
box to view information about the chosen topic.

The Master Help Index menu has such services as:

o a Search facility,
o a Print capability,
o links to a Glossary when an entry has related information describing terms
  and definitions.
Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening an object
o Searching the Master Help Index
o Printing a Master Help Index topic


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 109. Displaying the Glossary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select Information.
 2. Double-click on Glossary.

The glossary terms are displayed in a notebook.  Select a term from the list
box to view the definition for the chosen term.

The Glossary menu has such services as:

o a Search facility,
o a Print capability.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Searching the Glossary
o Printing a Glossary definition


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 110. Searching the Glossary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select Information.
 2. Double-click on Glossary.
 3. Select Search topics. (Or, you also can display the pop-up menu; then
    select Search topics.)
 4. Type the word or phrase you want to locate in the Search string field.
 5. Select the Search push button.  The matched items appear in the list.
 6. Select the term you want defined.

When you select Search topics, only the glossary entries are searched.  To
search the entire content of the glossary, select the Search push button from a
help panel; then select the All sections radio button.

Related Information:

Printing a Glossary definition


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 111. Searching the Master Help Index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Double-click on Master Help Index.
 2. Select Search topics. (Or, you also can display the pop-up menu; then
    select Search topics.)
 3. Type the word or phrase you want to locate in the Search string field.
 4. Select the Search push button.  The matched items appear in the list.
 5. Select the entry you want.

When you select Search topics, only the index entries are searched.  To search
the entire content of the index, select the Search push button from a help
panel; then select the All sections radio button.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening an object
o Printing a Master Help Index topic


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 112. Printing a Glossary Definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select Information.
 2. Double-click on Glossary.
 3. Select the term for the definition you want printed from the list box.
 4. Wait for the definition to appear.
 5. Select the Print topic push button (or display the pop-up menu; then select
    Print topic).

Note:   Selecting the Print push button below the displayed topic is not
        recommended.  Printing the Glossary requires an extremely large amount
        of printer time.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening an object
o Searching the Glossary


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 113. Printing a Master Help Index Topic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Double-click on Master Help Index.
 2. Select the entry for the topic you want printed from the list box.
 3. Wait for the help topic to appear.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for Master Help Index.
 5. Select the Print topic push button (or display the pop-up menu; then select
    Print topic).

The topic is then printed on the default printer object.

Note:   Selecting the Print push button below the displayed topic is not
        recommended.  Printing the Master Help Index requires an extremely
        large amount of printer time.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening an object
o Searching the Master Help Index
o Changing the default printer object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 114. Setting the System Clock ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select System Clock.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for System Clock.
 5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 6. Select Settings.
 7. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
 8. Select View; change the View page if necessary.  (To view a different View
    page, use an arrow at the lower-right corner of the window.

For additional information, select the Help push button after the window is
displayed. Each View page has help available for that specific page.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 115. Resetting Cursor Blink Rate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Keyboard.
 4. Select the Timing tab.
 5. Select Cursor blink rate

For additional information, select the Help push button after the window is
displayed.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Viewing notebook pages


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 116. Arranging Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To arrange selected windows:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Select the windows you want to tile or cascade.
 3. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
 4. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 5. Select Tile or Cascade.

To arrange all open windows:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Display the Window List title-bar icon menu.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Select.
 4. Select Select all.
 5. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
 6. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 7. Select Tile or Cascade.

To arrange multiple windows:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Move the mouse pointer over the first window you want to arrange; then
    press Ctrl and mouse button 1.
 3. Repeat the previous step for each window you want to arrange.
 4. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
 5. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 6. Select Tile or Cascade.

Related Information:

o Displaying Window List
o Selecting windows
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Cascading windows
o Tiling windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 117. Selecting Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting windows from Window List or from the Minimized Window Viewer folder
enables you to switch to windows for open objects and active programs.

By default, all your program objects appear in the Minimized Window Viewer
folder on the desktop.

To switch to a running program using the Minimized Window Viewer:

 1. Double-click on on the folder that contains the program you want.

 2. Double-click on the name of the program you want to switch to.

To select a window using the Window List:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Double-click on the name of window for the object or active program you
    want to switch to.

Selecting all windows in Window List can be helpful when you want to:

o Arrange the windows on the desktop by selecting Tile or Cascade.
o Close all windows at one time.
o Hide all windows at one time.
o Show all windows at one time.

To select all the windows in Window List:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Display the Window List title-bar icon menu.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Select.
 4. Select Select all.
 5. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
 6. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 7. Select an action on the pop-up menu.

To select multiple windows:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Move the mouse pointer over the first window to select; then press Ctrl and
    mouse button 1.
 3. Repeat the previous step for each window you want to select.
 4. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
 5. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 6. Select an action on the pop-up menu.

Related Information:

o Displaying Window List
o Selecting windows
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Switching between sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o Switching between tasks in a WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Exiting from a WIN-OS/2 session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 118. Tiling Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Tiling windows enables you to change the size of selected windows and arrange
them so they appear side-by-side on the desktop.  The active window is in the
upper-left corner.

To tile a selected window:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Select the window or windows you want to tile.
 3. Move the mouse pointer over the selected item in the Window List.
 4. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected window.
 5. Select Tile.

To tile all open windows:

o Display Window List.
o Display the Window List title-bar icon menu.
o Select the arrow to the right of Select.
o Select Select all.
o Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected items in the Window List.
o Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
o Select Tile.

To tile multiple windows:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Move the mouse pointer over the first window you want to tile; then press
    Ctrl and mouse button 1.
 3. Repeat the previous step for each window you want to tile.
 4. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected items in the Window List.
 5. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 6. Select Tile.

Related Information:

o Displaying Window List
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting windows
o Cascading windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 119. Cascading Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cascading windows enables you to place selected windows in a staircase-like
arrangement, with the active window closest.

To cascade a selected window:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Select the window you want to cascade.
 3. Move the mouse pointer over the selected item in the Window List.
 4. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected window.
 5. Select Cascade.

To cascade all open windows:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Display the Window List title-bar icon menu.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Select.
 4. Select Select all.
 5. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
 6. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 7. Select Cascade.

To cascade multiple windows:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Move the mouse pointer over the first window you want to cascade; then
    press Ctrl and mouse button 1.
 3. Repeat the previous step for each window you want to cascade.
 4. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
 5. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 6. Select Cascade.

Related Information:

o Displaying Window List
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting windows
o Tiling windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 120. Showing Hidden and Minimized Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Showing hidden and minimized windows enables you to select hidden and minimized
windows in the Window List and make them visible again on the desktop in front
of all other open windows.

To show a hidden window:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Select the window you want to show.
 3. Move the mouse pointer over the selected window in the Window List.
 4. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected window.
 5. Select Show.

To show all open windows:

o Display Window List.
o Display the Window List title-bar icon menu.
o Select the arrow to the right of Select.
o Select Select all.
o Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
o Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
o Select Show.

To show multiple windows:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Move the mouse pointer over the first window you want to show; then press
    Ctrl plus mouse button 1.
 3. Repeat the previous step for each window you want to show.
 4. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
 5. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 6. Select Show.

Related Information:

o Displaying Window List
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting windows
o Hiding open windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 121. Hiding Open Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Hiding open windows enables you to make windows on the desktop invisible and
adds their names to the Window List.

To hide a window:

Select the hide button in the window you want to hide.

Or:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Select the windows you want to hide.
 3. Move the mouse pointer over the selected window in the Window List.
 4. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected window.
 5. Select Hide.

To hide all open windows:

o Display Window List.
o Display the Window List title-bar icon menu.
o Select the arrow to the right of Select.
o Select Select all.
o Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
o Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
o Select Hide.

To hide multiple windows:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Move the mouse pointer over the first window you want to hide; then press
    Ctrl and mouse button 1.
 3. Repeat the previous step for each window you want to hide.
 4. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
 5. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 6. Select Hide.

If you prefer objects minimized on the desktop rather than listed in Window
List, your can customize the hide feature.  In addition, to listing windows in
the Window List, you can have an icon placed on the desktop or in the Minimized
Window Viewer folder.  Refer to Customizing window behavior in the "Related
Information" list.

To hide all open objects within a folder whenever you hide the folder using the
Window List, create a work-area folder.

Related Information:

o Displaying Window List
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting windows
o Showing windows
o Customizing window behavior
o Creating a work-area folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 122. Closing Windows Using Window List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Closing windows in Window List enables you to end programs and objects and
their associated windows.

When you close a session, every program and view is automatically closed, you
may lose data. Before you close a session, save all information in its programs
and open window views.

To close a selected window :

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Select the window you want to close.
 3. Move the mouse pointer over the selected window in the Window List.
 4. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected window.
 5. Select Close.

To close all open windows:

o Display Window List.
o Display the Window List title-bar icon menu.
o Select the arrow to the right of Select.
o Select Select all.
o Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
o Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
o Select Close.

To close multiple windows:

 1. Display Window List.
 2. Move the mouse pointer over the first window you want to close; then press
    Ctrl and mouse button 1.
 3. Repeat the previous step for each window you want to close.
 4. Move the mouse pointer over one of the selected windows in the Window List.
 5. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the selected windows.
 6. Select Close.

You cannot close the desktop from Window List.  You have to follow the OS/2*
operating system shutdown process.

To hide all open objects within a folder whenever you close the folder using
the Window List, create a work-area folder.

Related Information:

o Displaying Window List
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting windows
o Shutting down the operating system
o Creating a work-area folder
o Switching between sessions
o Switching between tasks in a WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Exiting from a WIN-OS/2 session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 123. Installing a Printer or Plotter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you want to add a printer or plotter to your system after OS/2*
installation:

 1. Connect the printer or plotter cable to a port at the back of your system.
 2. Create a printer object.  While you are creating the object, you can if
    necessary, install the appropriate printer driver for your model printer or
    plotter.
 3. Configure the printer setup.
 4. Test your printer by printing an object.

For information about any of the previous procedures, select the appropriate
topic from the "Related Information" list below. If you need additional help,
select the Help push button after a window is displayed.

Note:   If you want to adjust the way your job prints, select Printing,
        optimization or Printing, problem determination.

Related Information:

o Creating a printer object
o Installing printer drivers
o Configuring a printer
o Printing objects
o Printing, optimization
o Printing, problem determination


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 124. Printing: Optimization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up an alternative type of printing (or plotting) using the same device,
copy the printer object; then adjust the following for the alternative printer
object:

o Printer-object settings, which enable you to select the print-job view,
  printer driver, printing to a file, and other preferences you might have.
  For example, if your printer can use more than one printer driver, you can
  set up a different default printer driver for the second printer object.  If
  you have a plotter, you can set up one printer object for reverse clipping.
o Job properties, which describe the way you want your jobs to look.  For
  example, you might have a group of jobs that require a particular form, and
  these would need a distinct job-property setup.

You can pool printers if you have more than one printer (or plotter) and they
can use the same printer object setup.

Related Information:

o Copying an object
o Printer-object settings, selections
o Changing settings of objects
o Changing the default printer driver
o Job properties, selections
o Configuring print-job properties
o Enabling reverse clipping
o Pooling printers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 125. Deleting Print Jobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete individual print jobs:

 1. Select the printer object to view its pending print jobs.
 2. Select one or more jobs that you want to delete.
 3. Display the pop-up menu for the selected jobs.
 4. Select Delete.

To delete all the pending print jobs for a printer object:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select Delete all jobs.

Related Information:

o Selecting more than one object
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 126. Changing a Printer Form ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If a form specified for a specific job does not match the form specified for
the physical setup of the printer, the job has a status of Forms mismatch and
will not print.  To print this job, you must change the printer properties to
match the job properties.  Printer properties describe the physical setup of
the printer; job properties describe the requirements for a particular job.

 1. If necessary, change the paper in the printer.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the appropriate printer object.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 4. Select Printer driver.
 5. Display the pop-up menu for the printer-driver object.
 6. Select the arrow to the right of Open.  A window appears in which you can
    adjust the printer properties to match the new printer setup.
 7. Change the current form or tray setup in the window.

Related Information:

o Viewing print-job status details
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 127. Changing the Default Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The system uses the printer object that you select as default when you do not
select another printer object through a program or from a pop-up menu.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Set default.
 3. Select any printer object in the list as the default.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 128. Configuring Printer Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Each printer driver has its own printer properties that you must adjust to
describe the physical setup of your printer or plotter.  You also display
printer-driver properties windows to install fonts for your printer.  To
describe a change in printer or plotter setup or to install fonts:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object that uses the printer
    driver.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Printer driver.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for the printer driver.
 5. Select Open.

For additional help, select the Help push button after a window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Printer properties, description of
o Installing printer fonts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 129. Configuring Print-Job Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Job properties describe requirements for printing each job, such as form
selection, character size, paper orientation, and graphic resolution.

Your system uses the default job properties you select for a printer object
when you do not specify job properties through a program or immediately before
printing an individual job.  Your system also uses the default job properties
when you print from a command prompt, a DOS program, a Windows** program, or a
WIN-OS/2* multiple-program session.

A printer driver also has job properties, called device defaults, associated
with it. The device defaults provide a basis for the properties you adjust in
the printer object or your program.  You can adjust these device defaults for
some printer drivers.

Related Information:

o Configuring default job properties (printer object)
o Configuring properties at print time


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Configuring Default Job Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Your system uses the default job properties you select for a printer object
when you do not specify job properties through a program or immediately before
printing an individual job.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Printer driver.
 4. Select Job properties.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Job properties, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 130. Creating a Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a printer object that has default settings:

 1. Select Templates.
 2. Drag the Printer template to a folder or to an available place on your
    desktop.  A window appears.
 3. Type a unique name.
 4. Select the default printer driver that corresponds to your printer model.

    Note:   If the printer driver you need is not listed in the Default printer
            driver field, select Install new printer driver.  A window appears
            that enables you to install additional printer drivers.  After a
            driver is installed, it is listed in the Default printer driver
            field.


 5. Select a port in the Output port field.
 6. Select Create.

    The printer object is displayed on the desktop.

To create a second printer object with the same settings as the original, but
with a different port:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for an existing printer object.
 2. Select Create another.
 3. Select a different port.

To create multiple printer objects for one port:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object that already has that port
    selected (in the Output settings page).
 2. Select Copy.

For more information about printer objects, printer drivers, and ports, select
Printing, background information below.

Related Information:

o Changing settings of objects
o Configuring printer properties
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Printing, background information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 131. Deleting a Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select the printer object that you want to delete.
 2. Drag the printer object to the Shredder.

Or:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select Delete.

Note:   If the printer object is currently printing a job, the printer status
        is Pending deletion.  After the job is printed, the system processes
        your request to delete the printer object. All the remaining jobs for
        that printer object are deleted without being printed.

 Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Deleting print jobs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 132. Holding or Releasing Jobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select the printer object to view its pending print jobs.
 2. Select one or more jobs you want to hold or release.
 3. Display the pop-up menu for the selected jobs.
 4. Select the arrow to the right of Change status.
 5. Select Hold or Release.

Related Information:

o Selecting more than one object
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 133. Holding or Releasing a Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Hold the printer object if you want to perform maintenance on the printer or
plotter, such as loading new paper or changing the cartridge, or if you need to
fix a mechanical problem such as a paper jam.  When you are finished setting up
the physical printer, release the printer object so that your jobs can print.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Change status.
 3. Select Hold or Release.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Changing a printer form


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 134. Installing Printer Drivers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can select a printer driver during OS/2 2.1* installation.  After
installing OS/2 2.1, you can:

o Add printer drivers that came with  OS/2 2.1 or that were shipped separately.
o Install an updated version of a printer driver.
o Install a printer driver written for Windows** for use with a WIN-OS/2*
  session

For more information on installing, select the appropriate topic from the list
below.

Related Information:

o Installing OS/2 printer drivers
o Installing a WIN-OS/2 printer driver
o Dragging a printer-driver from a folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 135. Deleting a Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete the object that represents a printer driver:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a printer object that uses the printer driver.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Printer driver.
 4. If the driver you want to delete is selected in one or both fields in the
    Printer Driver settings window, deselect the driver in the Printer driver
    field and select a different driver as the default.
 5. Display the pop-up menu for the driver you want to delete.
 6. Select Delete.

If this driver is used in any other printer objects, a window appears showing
those printer objects.  For each printer object identified, display the
settings and deselect the driver from the group of drivers in the Printer
driver field (of the Printer Driver settings page).

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 136. Installing Queue Drivers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

System installation puts the PMPRINT queue driver (sometimes called a queue
processor) on your system.  To install other queue drivers, such as PMPLOT:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the appropriate printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Queue options.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for the queue driver.
 5. Select Install.
 6. Insert the diskette containing the in drive A, or type the appropriate
    drive designation and path in the Directory field.
 7. Select Refresh.
 8. Select one or more new queue drivers.
 9. Select Install.

Related Information:

o Queues and spooler, description of
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting more than one object
o Changing the queue driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 137. Deleting a Queue Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete the object that represents a queue driver:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Queue options.
 4. If the driver you want to delete is selected for this printer object,
    select a different queue driver.
 5. Display the pop-up menu for the driver you want to delete.
 6. Select Delete.

If this driver is selected for any other printer objects, a window appears
showing those printer objects.  Display the settings for each printer object
identified and select a different queue driver.

Note:   If a pending print job needs the queue driver, Delete does not appear
        on the pop-up menu for the driver.

 Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 138. Configuring a Printer Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the timeout period, or to allow sharing of the parallel printer port, or
to configure the communications setup for a serial printer port:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the appropriate printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Output.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for the port you want to set up.
 5. Select Open.
 6. Adjust the settings for your port.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Share access
o Allowing Multiple DOS Applications to Access a Parallel Port.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 139. Pooling Printers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print jobs through more than one port for faster processing:

 1. Display the pop-up menu of the appropriate printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Output.
 4. Select two or more ports.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Pooled Printers, description of
o Selecting more than one object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 140. Printing Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Drag the selected object to a printer object.

Or:

 1. Select one or more objects you want to print.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for one of the selected objects.

    Note:   Do not select the menu for the folder that contains the objects.


 3. Select Print to print to the default printer object.  Select the arrow to
    the right of Print to select a different printer object.

To learn other ways to print, select Printing, overview below.  If the printer
or plotter is connected to a network, select Printing on a network printer.  To
learn how to check the progress of your print job, select Viewing print-job
information.

Related Information:

o Selecting more than one object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Changing the default printer object
o Printing, overview
o Printing on a network printer
o Viewing print-job information
o Printing, problem determination


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 141. Changing the Refresh Interval ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Local print-job information is always current.  For network print jobs, the
system refreshes status information at the end of a preset time interval.  To
change that interval of time:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object,
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select View.
 4. In the Refresh interval field, select the number representing the seconds
    you want as the interval.

You also can refresh the job information from the pop-up menu of the printer
object before the refresh interval elapses.

Note:   Do not use a refresh interval shorter than the preselected value of 45,
        because refreshing uses system resources and can slow down other system processes.

 Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Changing the network job view


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 142. Changing the Network Job View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A network printer object represents a printer or plotter that is connected to a
remote system. The network printer object might be located inside your Network
folder.

 1. Display the pop-up menu of the network printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select View.
 4. In the Network Job View field, select Show all jobs if you want to view all
    the jobs waiting to print, or select Show own jobs if you want to view only
    information for jobs you submit.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Viewing print-job information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 143. Installing and Removing Printer Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To install the cartridge or soft fonts for a particular printer, or to remove
printer fonts from your system:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the appropriate printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Printer driver.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for the appropriate printer-driver object.
 5. Select Open.
 6. For HP LaserJet** or PostScript** printers, select Fonts.  For the IBM*
    LaserPrinters*, select Download Fonts. A window appears in which you list
    the fonts for you printer, and select those you want to install.

Note:   The remaining steps depend upon the printer driver you use.  For
        additional information, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

 Related information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 144. Installing Printer Ports ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The operating system automatically installs ports LPT1 through LPT3, and COM1
through COM4.  To add a different port to your system, or to reinstall a port
you deleted:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the appropriate printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Output.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for a port object.
 5. Select Install.
 6. Insert the diskette containing the new ports in drive A, or type the
    appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.  If
    installing ports that are supplied with the OS/2* operating system, type in
    the path:

        \OS2\DLL

 7. Select Refresh.
 8. Select one or more new ports.
 9. Select Install.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Note:   You can adjust the parallel port settings, such as timeout period or
        share access, or for a serial port, the communications setup.

 Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting more than one object
o Configuring a printer port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 145. Deleting a Printer Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete the object that represents a port:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the appropriate printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Output.
 4. If the port you want to delete is selected for this printer object, select
    a different port.
 5. Display the pop-up menu for the port you want to delete.
 6. Select Delete.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

If this port is selected for any other printer objects, a window appears
showing those printer objects.  Select a different port for each printer object
identified.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 146. Refreshing the Print-Job View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Normally, the system automatically refreshes print-job information at the time
print-job status changes.  To refresh the print-job view without waiting for
the next automatic refresh:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select Refresh.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 147. Changing Print-Job Priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To cause a particular print job to print before any other pending job:

 1. Select the printer object to view its pending print jobs.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the job.
 3. Select Print next.

To adjust the priority of a print job, indicating that the job should print
before, or after, other pending jobs:

 1. Select the printer object to view the job.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the job.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 4. Select Settings.
 5. Select Printing options.
 6. Change the value in the Priority field.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Note:   After a job starts printing, you can no longer change the setting of
        the job.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Holding or releasing jobs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 148. Restarting a Print Job ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To restart a partially printed job from its first page:

 1. Select the printer object that is printing the job.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the job.
 3. Select Start again.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 149. Viewing Print-Job Status Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select the printer object to view its pending print jobs.
 2. If viewing jobs as icons, use the icon to determine status.  (Each icon
    represents a different status condition.)  If viewing job details, check
    the Status column.
 3. If you want more information about an error condition:

    a) Display the pop-up menu for the job.
    b) Select Printing options.
    c) Check the Job status field for conditions that might prevent print
       completion. For example, the message Out of paper means the printer
       needs paper.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Print-job status messages
o Printing, problem determination


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 150. Copying Print Jobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print another copy of a job:

 1. Select the printer object to view the job or jobs you want to copy.
 2. Select one or more jobs.
 3. Display the pop-up menu for the selected jobs.
 4. Select Copy.

Related Information:

o Selecting more than one object
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 151. Viewing Print-Job Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The topics in the "Related Information" list below refer to procedures for
tracking the progress of a print job.

Select the topic of interest to you below. After you read the topic, you can
press the Previous push button to return to this list.

Note:   Printer status affects all the jobs waiting to print at a particular
        printer object.  Print-job status gives information about one job.

Related Information:

o Viewing print jobs and printer status
o Viewing print-job status details
o Changing the print-job view
o Refreshing print-job view
o Viewing print-job settings
o Viewing print-job content
o Viewing pending-job properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 152. Viewing Print Jobs and Printer Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select (double-click on) the printer object.  A window appears that shows the
printer status and lists the jobs waiting to print.

Normally, local printer object details are updated automatically; network
printer objects are updated at every refresh interval (or when you select
Refresh from the printer menu).

Related Information:

o Changing the print-job view
o Changing the refresh interval
o Changing the network job view
o Viewing print-job status


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 153. Viewing Print-Job Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To view the settings that describe how your job will print, or to change some
of these settings while a job waits to print:

 1. Select the printer object to view its pending print jobs.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the job.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 4. Select Settings.
 5. Select the appropriate tabs for the settings you want to view or change.

If you need help with any settings, select the Help push button after the
window is displayed.

Related Information:

Viewing print jobs and printer status


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 154. Viewing Printer-Driver Models and Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information about an installed printer driver:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a printer object that uses the printer driver.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Printer driver.
 4. Select (double-click on) the printer-driver object.  A printer properties
    window appears.
 5. Select the Help push button.
 6. Select Help from the help window menu bar.
 7. Select Help index.  A window appears that displays topics of information
    about the printer.
 8. Select the topic that describes the types of support the printer driver
    supplies.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Installing printer drivers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 155. Viewing Print-Job Content ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To view the text or graphics contained in a document that is waiting to print
at a local printer:

 1. Select the printer object to view its pending print jobs.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the job.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 4. Select Job content.

Note:   You cannot see the content of a job that is waiting to be printed at a
        network printer

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 156. Viewing Pending-Job Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can set up default job properties for your printer object. Some programs
give you an opportunity to change some of these default job properties. To view
the properties that you set up for your print job:

 1. Select the printer object associated with the job.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the job.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 4. Select Settings.
 5. Select Submission data.
 6. Display the pop-up menu for the printer-driver object.
 7. Select Open.

For additional information, select the Help push button after the window is
displayed.

Related Information:

o Job properties, description of
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 157. Changing the Default Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The default printer driver is used to prepare your print-job unless a program
selects a different printer driver.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the appropriate printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Printer driver.
 4. In the Default printer driver field, select the new default driver.
 5. Check the printer properties of the default driver and make any adjustments
    necessary so that the properties fields accurately describe the physical
    setup of your device.
 6. Select Job properties if you want to adjust the default setup for print
    jobs.

Related Information:

o Viewing printer-driver models and fonts
o Printer properties, selections
o Configuring printer properties
o Job properties, selections


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 158. Changing the Print-Job View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default view used whenever you select the printer object:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select View.
 4. In the Default view field, select either Details or Icon.

To change the current view without changing the default:

 1. Display the pop-up menu of the printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Details or Icon.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 159. Printing to a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up a printer object that stores print jobs as files and does not print
them:

 1. Copy your printer object to create a second object that will be a file,
    rather than a physical printer.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 4. Select Output.
 5. Select Output to file.

To create a file for a print job:

 1. From your program, select a printer object that has Output to file selected
    on its Output settings page and print the job.  A window appears.
 2. Enter the file name in the File name field.
 3. Select OK.

Note:   Only OS/2 Presentation Manager programs can use the print to file
        feature.

To print the file:

Drag the object that represents the printable file to the printer object.

Or:

Start a Presenation Manager program and follow the instructions for printing
from within the specific program.

Related Information:

o Copying an object
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 160. Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Each printer and plotter connected to your system requires at least one printer
driver.  Printer drivers provide information that enables the operating system
to format a document or plotted object appropriately for the particular printer
or plotter model you select for that object.  A printer-driver object
represents the file or set of files, shipped to you on your printer driver
diskettes, that provides this information.

Some printers work with more than one printer driver because these devices can
emulate (act like) different types of printers.

When you connect new printers or plotters, you must install the appropriate
drivers.  Each driver supports several printers, from which you select the
specific models you need.  For example, if you have an HP** LaserJet** printer,
you select LaserJet IID, LaserJet Series II, or the model name that describes
your own printer.

Printer drivers have printer properties to describe the physical setup of your
printer.  A driver also has job properties to describe the default print job
setup.  For example, you use printer properties to specify the types of forms
that your printer has loaded, and job properties to select one form that you
expect the majority of your print jobs to require.

Related Information:

o Installing printer drivers
o Viewing printer-driver models and fonts
o Configuring printer properties
o Configuring print-job properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 161. Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

During OS/2* installation, if you indicate that you have a printer or plotter,
an icon representing the device is added to your desktop.  The object is called
a printer object, because it refers to the place where printer (or plotter)
output is produced.  The printer object has settings which identify the printer
driver used to prepare your print jobs and the port connecting the device.
Each printer object has its own queue. A printer object can represent several
printers or ports, any of which can accept a print job queued at the printer
object.

If you print to a network printer or plotter, the printer object is initially
located inside the Network folder, but you can move it to another place on your
desktop.

You can have more than one printer object for the same printer or plotter.  For
example, you can create another printer object to vary the setup for the
device, or to vary the default print-job setup.  For more information about
setting up multiple printer objects, select Printing, optimization below.

Related Information:

o Creating a printer object
o Printing objects
o Viewing network objects
o Printer drivers, description of
o Queues and spooler, description of
o Printing, optimization


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 162. Queues and Spooler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Each printer object has a queue.  The queue has a queue driver that separates
jobs and sends them one at a time to be processed.

You can view the jobs waiting on a particular queue by selecting the printer
object that represents it.

Your queued print jobs are actually held together in one area of your disk,
called a spooler path.  Your system has only one spooler, which is a
combination of one or more queues.  The Spooler object represents the
controlling program that manages your jobs.  You can set the path for the
Spooler object to change the location where your print files are held before
each is printed.  You can set the print priority to higher or lower to adjust
the rate at which your spooled jobs are printed.

Because your jobs wait in a queue to be processed, you can request printing or
plotting and continue working at your computer without waiting for printing to
finish.  You can check the progress of a job by viewing the printer jobs and
status for the printer object to which the queue is assigned.

Related Information:

o Viewing print jobs and printer status
o Changing the spooler path
o Changing the print priority


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 163. Printer Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you install a printer driver, or create a printer object, you must set up
information called printer properties, which describes the physical device.
For example, you use printer properties to indicate the particular type of
paper or font cartridge loaded in the printer or the pens loaded in a plotter
carousel.  You also use printer properties to install fonts for your printer.

The particular printer properties fields depend upon the model of your printer
or plotter.  When you provide printer properties, you give information to a
printer driver.  When you print or plot a job, the printer driver supplies your
information so that the system can format your job appropriately for the
physical printer or plotter.

Related Information:

o Printer properties, selections
o Plotter properties, selections
o Configuring printer properties
o Job properties, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 164. Job Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Job properties information describes requirements for printing a particular
document or plotting a particular image.  You can specify requirements such as
the number of copies and the form to use.  There are several ways that job
properties can be set up:

o A program can display the job properties window specific to the printer
  driver.
o You can specify that you want the system to prompt you each time you print.
o You can set up default job properties for a printer object.
o You can set up device-default job properties for a printer driver.

You can view the properties set up for a pending print job and, in some cases,
make changes before the job prints.

Related Information:

o Job properties, selections
o Configuring print-job properties
o Viewing pending-job properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 165. Pooled Printers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you assign more than one port to a single printer object, the result is
pooled printers.  In this way, jobs waiting to print or plot can be processed
through any free port, increasing the number of jobs that can print at the same
time.

Note:   When you pool printers, all the printers or plotters connected to these
        ports must work with the same printer driver.

 Related Information:

o Pooling printers
o Printer drivers, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 166. Printing Outside the Workplace Shell ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printing occurs inside the OS/2* Workplace Shell if you do any of the
following:

o Drag an object you want to print to a printer object.
o Select Print from the pop-up menu of an object.
o Print from a Presentation Manager* program.

If you want more information about printing using an operating-system command,
or printing on a printer (such as a network printer) that does not use
Presentation Manager printer drivers, select the appropriate topic below.

Related Information:

o Printing from an OS/2 command prompt, DOS, or WIN-OS/2
o Printing on another system
o Printing to a COM port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 167. Printing from an OS/2 Command Prompt, DOS, or WIN-OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Jobs printed outside the OS/2* Workplace Shell are started by one of the
following:

o OS/2* commands such as:

         COPY /B <file> LPT1
         PRINT <file>
         DIR >LPT1

o Programs written for DOS or Windows**.

Command prompt, DOS, and WIN-OS/2* printing jobs:

o Cannot take advantage of Presentation Manager* printer drivers
o Have printer-specific files
o Use the default job properties for the printer object.

Related Information:

o Configuring default job properties
o Disabling the spooler
o Installing a WIN-OS/2 printer driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 168. Disabling the Spooler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print jobs that have a high-security risk, and that you want to prevent
other persons from viewing in a printer-object window:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Display the pop-up menu for the Spooler.
 4. Select Disable spooler.
 5. Restart your system.

Note:   When the Spooler is disabled, your print jobs go directly to a printer
        and a printout might contain material from different jobs mixed
        together.  You cannot disable spooling to a network printer object.

Related Information:

o Enabling the spooler
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Restarting your system
o Queues and spooler, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 169. Enabling the Spooler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Display the pop-up menu for the Spooler.
 4. Select Enable spooler.

Note:   Spooling takes effect immediately.  You do not need to restart your system.

 Related Information:

Queues and spooler, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 170. Changing the Spooler Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this procedure if you print often, or if you print large jobs and need a
separate storage area, such as a large disk, for spool files.

 1. Wait until all your jobs finish printing, or delete any pending jobs.
 2. Select Hold from the pop-up menu of each printer object.
 3. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 4. Select System setup.
 5. Select Spooler.  By default, the Spooler settings notebook appears.
 6. Select Spool path.
 7. In the Spool path field, type the new path.  For more information, select
    the Help push button.
 8. Close the Spool Path window.

Related Information:.

o Deleting print jobs
o Holding or releasing a printer
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Closing an object
o Queues and spooler, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 171. Printing: Problem Determination ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display printer and plotter tips and problem solutions, select the
appropriate topic from the list below:

o No output printed (or plotted)
o Job prints incorrectly
o "Abort," "Retry," "Cancel" print messages
o Inconsistent output
o "LPT1 not responding" message
o Printing works with DOS but not with OS/2 2.1
o "Printer offline or out of paper" message
o "Forms mismatched" message
o No output printed (PostScript printer)
o "Form change required" message
o Printing seems slow
o Output combined for print jobs
o Cannot replace a printer driver
o Print area is too small or too large
o Out of disk space while printing
o No separator page printed
o Program lists wrong printer names
o More printing information wanted

Related Information:

Viewing print-job status details


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 172. No Output Printed (or Plotted) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Check that the printer or plotter cable is securely connected to both the
    printer and to the appropriate port on your computer.
 2. Check the indicator lights on the device to make sure that it is powered on
    and online (or ready).

If you have checked the previous items and still are unable to print, you might
have an interrupt problem.  For more information, see "Configuring Your
Computer for Printing" in the Using the Operating System book.

You might need to change the default printer object to have your print jobs
print on a particular printer.  The system uses the default printer object if:

o You use a program to create the print job and the program does not specify a
  particular printer object.
o You use a PRINT command and do not specify a device (such as LPT1).
o You select Print from the pop-up menu of an object.

To learn how to change the default printer object, select the appropriate topic
from the "Related Information" list below.

The printer object might be held, or it might have an equipment problem.  To
check for one of these conditions, view the status of the printer object.

The printer object might have the wrong port selected.  For a local printer or
plotter, check which port connects the device to your system, and if necessary,
change the port selected for the printer object.

If you have a PostScript printer, select the appropriate topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing the default printer object
o Viewing print jobs and printer status
o Changing the printer port
o No output printed (PostScript printer)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 173. Changing the Printer Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you move your printer or plotter to a different port, you need to change the
port selected for any printer object associated with the printer:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Output.
 4. In the Output port field, deselect any port that does not connect to the
    printer or plotter.
 5. Select the correct port in the Output port field.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 174. "Abort," "Retry," "Cancel" Print Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Check that the printer or plotter cable is securely connected to both the
    printer and to the appropriate port on your computer.
 2. Check the indicator lights on the device to make sure that it is powered on
    and online (or ready).
 3. Select Retry.

If you have checked the previous items and still are unable to print, you might
have an interrupt problem.  For more information, see "Configuring Your
Computer for Printing" in the Using the Operating System book.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 175. "LPT1 Not Responding" Message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Check that the printer or plotter cable is securely connected to both the
    printer and to the appropriate port on your computer.
 2. Check the indicator lights on the device to make sure that it is powered on
    and online (or ready).
 3. Select Retry.

If you have checked the previous items and still are unable to print, you might
have an interrupt problem.  For more information, see "Configuring Your
Computer for Printing" in the Using the Operating System book.

Related Information:

Printing Ok in DOS but not in OS/2 2.1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 176. Inconsistent Output ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Most problems are related to the improper length of your printer cables.  This
means that your printer cable might be too long.  Consult the manufacturer of
your printer for recommendations about printer cable length; (Usually, a 6 foot
cable is recommended).

Related Information:

o Job prints incorrectly
o Printing Ok in DOS but not in OS/2 2.1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 177. Printing OK in DOS but not in OS/2 2.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you can print correctly under DOS but find that you cannot print after the
OS/2 operating system is installed on the same hardware, then the problem might
be the parallel port adapter or the printer cable.

Hardware Interrupt Request (IRQ) Level Conflicts

Your printer adapter might have a hardware interrupt request (IRQ) level
conflict with other adapters installed in your system or may not correctly
generate hardware interrupts.  DOS does not recognize IRQ conflicts but because
the OS/2 operating system does recognize these conflicts, printing is not
possible.

Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) computers do not allow hardware-interrupt
sharing; therefore, each adapter must be configured to a separate IRQ level to
work properly.  Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) and Micro
Channel computers allow hardware interrupt sharing; therefore more than one
adapter can share the same IRQ level.

If your adapter does not generate hardware interrupts, you might need to change
your adapter to be able to print.  If you suspect an IRQ level conflict, you
might need to change the IRQ level and address setting of the printer port.
Depending on what kind of computer you have (ISA or EISA and Micro Channel),
you need to check your system and adapter documentation describing how to
configure the IRQ levels for the parallel ports on your system.  For more
specific information about setting IRQ levels and determining parallel port
configuration, see "Configuring Your Computer for Printing" in the Using the
Operating System book.

Parallel Port Cable Problems

Cable problems can include the following:

o All interface signals might not be wired.  OS/2 2.1 uses all the signals
  within the parallel port interface, DOS does not; therefore, cables that work
  in DOS might not work in OS/2 2.1.
o Cables might be improperly shielded or grounded.  Improperly shielded or
  grounded cables can produce electrical interference causing signals that can
  be incorrectly received and thus, equipment to malfunction.
o Cables that are longer than 6 feet can cause the signal to weaken.  This
  means that your printer might not be able to receive signals from a computer
  that is too far away.

If you determine that one of the previous problems is preventing you from
printing, you might need to purchase a new cable.

Related Information:

Inconsistent output


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 178. Print Area Is Too Small or Large ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the margins, print area, or fit of the printed image, use the program
that created the object you want to print.  After adjusting the print area
size, submit the print job again.

To change the size of the form used for the print job:

 1. Change the form in the printer, and specify the correct selection in the
    printer properties.  (Refer to do Changing the form in the printer below.)
 2. Using the program that created the print job, select the new form.
 3. Submit the print job again.

To override the margins or print area of a job that is waiting to print:

 1. Select the printer object to view its pending jobs.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the print job.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 4. Select Queue options.
 5. In the Queue Driver Options field, select Override.

Related Information:

o Changing a printer form
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 179. Changing the Queue Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Most systems use a queue driver named PMPRINT.  If you installed other queue
drivers (such as PMPLOT) and you want to change the queue driver used by a
particular printer object:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the appropriate printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Queue options.
 4. In the Queue driver field, select the object that represents the new queue
    driver.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Installing queue drivers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 180. "Form Change Required" Message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Your job needs a form that you must feed manually into the printer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 181. Printing Seems Slow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You have a choice with some programs between using system fonts and device
fonts.  When possible, use device fonts for faster printing.

The job properties of some printer drivers (for example, the driver for the
LaserJet** family of printers) allow you to specify you want system fonts
downloaded to the printer's memory.  For faster processing, download system
fonts when you prefer to use them for printing.

If you want to select device fonts or download system fonts for a particular
print job, select the appropriate field in the job properties window that your
program displays or set up default job properties.

Another way to speed up printing on your system is to increase the print
priority.  Setting the print priority higher gives print jobs higher priority
but might slow the response time of your system.

Related Information:

o Configuring print-job properties
o Installing printer fonts
o Changing the print priority


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 182. Out of Disk Space While Printing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you run out of disk space, you can change your spooler path.

 1. Wait until all your jobs finish printing, or delete any pending jobs.
 2. Change the spooler path.

Related Information:

o Deleting print jobs
o Changing the spooler path


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 183. "Printer Offline or Out of Paper" Message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check that the printer has adequate paper supply.

Check that the printer cable is securely connected to both the printer and to
the appropriate port on your computer.

Check the indicator lights on the device to make sure that it is powered on and
online (or ready).

If you use a PostScript** printer, the printer might need time to prepare a
print job before it times out.  Configure port Timeout period to 120 seconds or
greater.

Related Information:

Configuring a printer port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 184. Job Prints Incorrectly ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A printed job might not match your requirements because the printer-driver
setup needs adjustment:

o Check that the default printer driver supports the model printer or plotter
  you are using.
o Check and, if necessary, adjust the driver's printer properties to match the
  way in which your printer or plotter is physically set up.
o Check and, if necessary, set up the appropriate job properties.

Related Information:

o Viewing printer-driver models and fonts
o Changing the default printer driver
o Printer properties, description of
o Configuring printer properties
o Job properties, description of
o Configuring print-job properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 185. Cannot Replace a Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You cannot replace a printer driver while it is loaded.  To replace a printer
driver in this case:

 1. Wait for all currently-pending print jobs to be printed.
 2. Display the settings for every printer object on your desktop; then select
    the Printer driver tab.
 3. If the driver you want to delete is selected in one or both fields in the
    Printer Driver settings window, deselect the driver in the Printer driver
    field and select a different driver as the default.
 4. Restart your system to clear your system memory of any printer drivers.
 5. Replace the printer driver.
 6. For every printer object that needs the replaced driver, reselect the
    driver on the Printer driver settings page.

Related Information:

o Changing settings of objects
o Restarting your system


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 186. Setting Up a Separator Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a separator page:

 1. Create a data-file object from a Data File template.
 2. Select the data-file object to start the OS/2* System Editor.
 3. Type the appropriate separator codes; then save the file.

To associate the separator page with a printer object:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Print options.
 4. In the Separator file field, type the path (if necessary) and file name.

    Note:   By default, a separator page is assumed to be located in the same
            place on your system as the Spooler object.  If you create a
            separator page in a different place, you need to type both path and
            file name.


Related Information:

o Creating an object (using a template)
o Separator page codes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 187. Separator Page Codes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Code Function

@Ltext
   Prints the specified text.

@0
   Ends a line.  You must specify where you want lines to end when the
   separator page is printed.  Use after @Ltext; that is, @Ltext@0.

@D
   Prints the date the spool file was created.

@T
   Prints the time the spool file was created.

@N
   Prints the submitter's name and a user or machine ID.

@I
   Prints the print-queue identifier for the file.

@Q
   Prints the print-queue description followed by the print-queue name in
   parentheses.

@Hnn
   Sets printer-specific control sequence, where nn is a hexadecimal number
   sent directly to the printer. These control sequences are printer-specific.

@F"filename"
   Prints the file.  For example, this could be used to set up printer
   defaults.

@Wnn
   Sets separator page width in characters.  Range is 1 to 132.

@n
   Skips n number of lines.  Range is 0 to 9.

@B
   Creates block characters.

@S
   Creates single-width block characters.  Use after the @B code.

@M
   Creates double-width block characters.  Use after the @B code.

@U
   Turns off block-character printing.

@E
   Ejects a page from the printer.  Used to start a new page or end the
   separator page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 188. Output Combined for Print Jobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Your system has a spooler to keep print jobs separated into spool files while
those jobs wait to print.  If you disable the spooler, and the system has more
than one print job request, it sends each part of a print job directly to the
printer.  Partial job messages from various jobs arrive at the printer in the
order they are sent.

To keep your print jobs separate, either enable the spooler or wait for one job
to finish printing before you start another.

Related Information:

Enabling the spooler


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 189. More Printing Information Wanted ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Obtain the publication IBM International Technical Support Centers OS/2 Version
2.0 Volume 5: Print Subsystem, which you can purchase separately.  To order
this publication, use IBM* part number GG24-3775.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 190. Creating Printer-Specific Jobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create printer-specific job files for printing on a system that does not run
the OS/2* operating system:

 1. Copy your printer object to create a second object to which you can route
    printer-specific jobs.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 4. Select Queue options.
 5. Select Printer-specific format.
 6. If you also want the job to start printing immediately if it is the first
    job waiting at the printer object, without waiting to receive the end of
    the job from your program, select Print while spooling.

Note:   Printer-specific spool files are larger than printer-independent spool
        files.

Related Information:

o Copying an object
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 191. Printing to a COM Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print from a non-PM application to a communications port (for example,
COM1), you must redirect non-Presentation Manager print jobs from an LPT port
to a printer object connected to the communications port.  To print to a
communications port, do the following:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object connected to your
    commnunications port.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Output.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for the LPT port whose non-PM print jobs you want
    to send to your commnunications port.  (For example, you might select LPT2
    if you don't have a printer physically connected to your 2nd parallel port.
 5. Select the arrow to the right of Redirection.
 6. Select the destination port from the menu that is displayed.  (For example,
    you might select COM1 to send non-PM print jobs destined for LPT2 to your
    COM1 port.

Or:

 1. Select OS/2 System; then select Command Prompts.
 2. Select OS/2 Window or OS/2 Full Screen.
 3. Type

        SPOOL /D:port1  /O:port2
        PRINT file-name /D:port1

    For example, if you wanted to print MYFILE.TXT to communications port COM1,
    you might type:

        SPOOL /D:LPT1 /O:COM1
        PRINT MYFILE.TXT /D:LPT1

Note:   Printer port redirection is used to redirect non-PM print jobs from an
        LPT port to the printer object connected to another port.  Only one
        printer object is required, and it must be connected to the port to
        which the printer is physically attached.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 192. Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A template is a special form of an object.  Before you use a template, it
appears on the top of a stack of identical templates (usually in the Templates
folder).  To use a template, you drag it off the stack.  Wherever you drop the
template you create another occurrence of the object that the template
represents. The new object has the same settings and contents as the templates
in the stack.

If you want to move a stack of templates, rather than create an object from the
top template, press the Shift key while dragging the stack.  For example, you
would press the Shift key while dragging a stack of Customer Invoice templates,
if you wanted to move the blank invoice pad from the Templates folder to a
Customer folder.

To learn how to use various types of templates or to create a stack of
templates from an object you use often, select the appropriate topic from the
"Related Information" list, below.

Related Information:

o Creating a program object (using template)
o Creating an object (using template)
o Creating a template
o File and directory concepts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 193. Editing Data Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a new data file:

 1. Select Templates.
 2. Drag the Data File template to a folder or on the desktop.  A data-file
    object is created.
 3. Select the new data-file object.  It is automatically displayed in the
    OS/2* System Editor.  For additional help using the editor, select Help
    from the System Editor menu bar; then select Help index.

If you want to use a different program, or more than one program, to edit the
file, associate the data-file object with that program. For more information,
select Associating programs and data-file objects from "Related Information."
To use a command prompt to start the System Editor:

 1. Select OS/2 System; then select Command Prompts.
 2. Select OS/2 window or OS/2 full screen.
 3. Type the letter E to start the editor.  If you want to edit a particular
    file, you can follow the E with a space; then the path and file name of the
    data file you want to edit.

Note:   You cannot create a new data-file object, or change the name of an
        object using the System Editor.

Related Information:

o Associating programs and data-file objects
o Changing names of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 194. Creating a Program Object Using a Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A program object starts a program or a session.  If you install a new OS/2,
DOS, or Windows** program, you need to run the Migrate Applications program
which is located in the System Setup folder, to create a program object for
you.  This is the recommended method to create a program object.  You also can
create a program object using the following method.

 1. Select Templates.
 2. Drag the Program template to a folder or to your desktop.
 3. Double-click on the program object to display the Settings notebook.
 4. Customize the program object using the Settings notebook.  For example,
    select the session type, name the program object, or setup the
    associations.  For information on any of the pages in the Settings
    notebook, select the Help push button.

Related Information:

o Migrate Applications
o Settings for a program
o Settings for a session
o Template


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Settings for a Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu of the program object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select the Session tab; then select OS/2 window, OS/2 full screen, DOS
    window, DOS full screen, WIN-OS/2 full screen, WIN-OS/2 window, or Separate
    session.
 4. Select the Program tab; then type the appropriate information in the Path
    and file name field.
 5. Select the General tab; then specify a unique name in the Title field, so
    that you can distinguish the program object from others for the same type
    of session, which might have different settings.
 6. You might want to change the DOS or WIN-OS/2* settings for a DOS or
    Windows** program.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Changing DOS or WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Settings for a Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu of the program object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select the Session tab.
 4. Select OS/2 window, OS/2 full screen, DOS window, or DOS full screen for a
    command prompt.  Select WIN-OS/2 full screen, WIN-OS/2 window, or Separate
    session for a WIN-OS/2* session.
 5. Select the Program tab.
 6. Specify a unique name in the Program title field, so that you can
    distinguish the program object from others for the same type of session,
    which might have a different settings.
 7. Check that the Path and file name field is blank.
 8. Select the File tab.
 9. Erase any text in the Physical names fields, as these must be blank.
10. You might want to change the DOS or WIN-OS/2 settings for a DOS or WIN-OS/2
    session.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Changing DOS or WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 195. Creating a Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a template of an object when you need a convenient way to create another
object or folder with the same settings, associations, and contents.  For
example, you can make a template for a customer form and use it to create a
blank form for each new customer.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object or folder.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the General tab.
 5. Select Template check box.

The operating system might automatically create templates when you install
programs that come with sample files.  For example, if you install a
Presentation Manager* program that comes with a sample or template spreadsheet
file, the system adds a Spreadsheet template.

Note:   The system stores new templates that you create or install in the
        Templates folder.  You can move them to a different folder, or to an
        available area on your desktop.

Related Information:

o Creating an object (using a template)
o Template


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 196. Creating an Object Using a Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a new object such as a blank folder or data-file object:

 1. Select Templates.
 2. Drag the template you want to create to a folder or to the desktop.
 3. Change the name of the new object.

Note:   The object you create has the default settings of the original
        template.  If you already customized the settings for an object, or a
        data-file is pre-associated to one or more programs, use "create
        another" rather than use a template to create an object.  For more
        information, select Creating another object below.

Related Information:

o Changing names of objects
o Creating a template
o Creating a program object (using a template)
o Creating a printer object
o Template
o Creating another object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 197. Changing the Icon for an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the picture (or icon) that represents an object on your desktop:

 1. Display the pop-up menu of the object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select General.
 4. Select Create another or Edit.
 5. The Icon Editor is displayed.  Use the Icon Editor to customize an icon of
    your choice.  For additional help, select the Help push button after the
    window is displayed.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 198. Changing Screen Colors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change your screen colors (for example, a window background or a window
part, such as the title bar):

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Color Palette.
 4. Drag a color from the palette to a window background or window part.  For
    example, to paint the background of your desktop blue, drag the color blue
    to an empty place on your screen.

Note:   To change the background color of a window in the system, hold down Alt
        when you drag the color from the palette.  To change the foreground
        color of a window, hold down Ctrl when you drag the color from the
        palette.

To create your own variations of colors or create several different color
palettes, each having 30 colors, select the Edit color push button.  You also
can change your entire window scheme (for example, to a Fall color scheme).  To
learn more, select Changing window schemes below.

Related Information:

o Creating a new color
o Changing window schemes
o Displaying pop-up windows
o Changing an icon for an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 199. Creating a New Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a color of your own design:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Color Palette.
 4. Select Edit Color.  A window appears, in which you can select a base color,
    then make adjustments to it.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Changing screen colors


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Example of Creating a Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 200. No Output Printed (PostScript Printer) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check the port configuration for the printer object:

o For any port (parallel or serial), the printer might need time to prepare a
  print job before it times out.  Configure the port Timeout period to 120
  seconds or longer.
o For a serial port, the configuration must match the serial port setup
  required by the printer manufacturer for baud rate, word length, parity
  check, stop bit, and handshaking, as well as timeout period.

To learn how to change the port configuration, refer to Configuring a printer
port below.

Check that the default printer driver for the printer object has the word
PSCRIPT in its name.  For example, to produce PostScript** output using an HP**
LaserJet IIID**, you must use PSCRIPT.HP Laserjet IIID PS 52_2 and not
LASERJET.HP Laserjet IIID.

Related Information:

o Configuring a printer port
o Changing the default printer driver
o Installing a printer driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 201. Printer Properties: Selections ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printer properties, which describe the way your printer is set up, can include:

o Type of paper feed (tractor or bin)
o Number and location of paper trays
o Forms defined for your printer
o Forms loaded in the paper feed or trays of your printer
o Font cartridges loaded on your printer
o Installed soft fonts
o Additional features you can install for some printers, such as extended
  symbol sets and patterns.

The selections available for printer properties depend upon the model printer
or plotter.  A plotter has special properties.  (See Plotter properties,
selections below.)

To find out how to adjust the description of your physical printer setup,
select Configuring printer properties below.

Related Information:

o Printer properties, description of
o Plotter properties, selections
o Configuring printer properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 202. Job Properties: Selections ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Job properties, the setup for an individual print job, can include:

o Form needed for job
o Orientation (portrait, landscape)
o Resolution (dots per inch) or scaling (enlargement or reduction percentage)
o Manual or automatic feeding of paper
o 1 or 2 sided (duplex) printing, binding edge, and method of flipping
o Color printing or black-on-white
o Downloading system fonts for faster output.

The selections available for job properties depend upon the model printer.

To learn how to describe your job requirements, select Configuring print-job
properties below.

Note:   If you use a plotter, the job properties are different.  For more
        information, select Plotter properties, selections below.

 Related Information:

o Job properties, description of
o Configuring print-job properties
o Plotter properties, selections


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 203. Plotter Properties: Selections ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Properties that describe the way a plotter is set up include:

o Type of paper feed (manual, automatic, preloaded)
o Orientation (portrait, landscape)
o Size of paper
o Number of carousels
o Active carousel
o Color and type of each pen in a carousel
o Color sorting-completing all lines that require one color pen before changing
  pens.

To learn how to adjust the physical description of your plotter, select
Configuring printer properties below.

You can also select any of these properties as job properties, required by each
plot.  (See Configuring print-job properties below.)

Related Information:

o Printer properties, description of
o Configuring printer properties
o Job properties, description of
o Configuring print-job properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 204. Viewing a Physical Printer Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you try to select a printer or plotter from your program, and do not see the
description of the printer object in the program's printer list:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select View.
 4. Make note of the value in the Physical name field; then look for that
    physical name in the printer selections listed by your program.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 205. Printing: Getting Started ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A printer driver is a program that formats your print jobs appropriately for
your model printer.  The printer object is an icon on your desktop that looks
like your printer, and is provided so that you have a place to drop print jobs
and check their progress.  If you select a printer model as part of the process
of installing the OS/2* operating system, the system both installs the printer
driver and creates a printer object.

Even if you did not select any printer during OS/2 2.1 installation, you can
still add your printer to your system.  You can also add printer drivers after
OS/2 2.1 installation.

A printer driver requires information about printer properties, fields that
describe the way your printer or plotter is physically set up.  For example,
you must indicate whether your printer has tractor feed, trays, or bins, and
what type of paper is loaded in each.  You must also use the printer properties
to install printer fonts.  For a plotter, you must indicate the pen colors in
the currently loaded carousel.

After you have a printer driver and object on your system and have set up the
printer properties, you can print an object on your desktop, such as a data
file.  One way to print a data-file object is to drag it to the printer object.

To learn more about installation, printer properties, or printing jobs, select
the appropriate topic below.

Related Information:

o Installing a printer or plotter
o Installing printer drivers
o Printer properties, description of
o Configuring printer properties
o Printing objects
o Printing, background information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 206. Printing: Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you use a printer or plotter with your system, you have a printer object on
your desktop.  If you use a network printer or plotter, the printer object
might be in the Network folder.

The printer object icon looks like the real printer or plotter. It provides a
place for you to send print (or plot) jobs and check the status of the jobs
while they wait to print (or plot).

Note:   Plot jobs are referred to as "print jobs" in the help information, and
        plotter icons are referred to as "printer objects."

 You create a print job in one of several ways:

o Dragging a data-file object to the printer object.
o Selecting Print from a pop-up menu.
o Using a program that has a print or plot command.
o Using an operating system command, such as PRINT or COPY.
o Selecting the Print topic push button for a help topic.
o Pressing the Print Screen key on your keyboard.

Often, the print job waits to print while your system converts your data file
to a form that the printer can interpret.  Your job also waits to print if you
create several print jobs, because the system finishes sending one entire job
to the printer before it sends the next job.  Select the printer object to
display a window in which you can see the jobs waiting to print.

If you do not see your job in the window, or if it does not print correctly,
you might need to change the setup.

For more information about printer installation, configuring printer setup, or
problem determination, select one of the topics listed under printing in the
Master Help Index.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 207. Configuring a Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you connect a printer or plotter to your system, you need a printer driver
for it, and a printer object.  You create your first printer object when you
install a printer driver.  You can install the printer driver during OS/2*
installation, or afterwards.

You must configure both the printer driver and the printer object.  To
configure the printer driver, you set printer properties and install printer
fonts.  To configure the printer object, you set printer-object settings and
default job properties.

You might also configure the printer port, if the port configuration is
described in the information that comes with your printer or plotter.

You can create additional printer objects to add printers, or copy a printer
object to set up additional configurations.

For more detailed information, select from the topics below.

Related Information:

o Printer properties, selections
o Configuring printer properties
o Installing printer fonts
o Printer-object settings, selections
o Changing settings of objects
o Job properties, selections
o Configuring print-job properties
o Configuring a printer port
o Creating a printer object
o Copying an object
o Printing, optimization


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 208. Printer-Object Settings: Selections ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the way your printer or printer object is configured.  The
topics in the "Related Information" list below are in order from common tasks
to those usually done by system experts.  For example, the topic at the top of
the list explains how to change the default printer object, which is the
printer used when you print help information or you press the Print Screen key.
The second topic explains how to change the printer driver used for your
printer.

You can change the queue driver, for example if your plotter needs reverse
clipping.

Change the port if you move a printer to a different port or if you copy a
printer object to duplicate settings for a second printer.  Pooling printers
means attaching multiple printers, and then selecting multiple ports.

Select the topic of interest to you below.  After you read the topic, you can
press the Previous push button to return to this list.

Related Information:

o Changing the default printer object
o Changing the default printer driver
o Changing the queue driver
o Changing the printer port
o Pooling printers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 209. Printing: Background Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select any of the topics below to read detailed information about the related
part of your printing system:

Related Information:

o Printing, overview
o Printer object, description of
o Queues and spooler, description of
o Printer drivers, description of
o Printer properties, description of
o Job properties, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 210. Printing: Advanced Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For more information about any of the following options, select the appropriate
topic from the "Related Information" list below.

You can combine printer resources by pooling printers connected to multiple
ports, or by connecting multiple printers to the same port and making a copy of
the printer object for each printer.

You can set up a separator page to print between print jobs.

Your system comes with ports LPT1 through LPT3 and COM1 through COM4 already
installed.  You can add port objects with higher numbers (usually for use with
a network printer) and you can install extra ports in your system.

Your system has the PMPRINT queue driver already installed.  You can add the
PMPLOT driver if you use a plotter and need reverse clipping, or you can
install another queue driver, in addition to the two supplied with the
operating system.

You can set up a printer object that enables you to prepare print jobs on your
system for printing on another system.

You can disable the spooler if your jobs need to go directly to the printer.

You can redirect print jobs to compensate for commands or programs that do not
provide for sending print jobs to a communications port.

Related Information:

o Pooling printers
o Copying an object
o Setting up a separator page
o Installing printer ports
o Installing queue drivers
o Printing on another system
o Disabling the spooler
o Printing to a COM port
o Obtaining more printing information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 211. Printing on Another System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print a job on another system that does not run the OS/2* operating system,
use a printer object that is set up for printer-specific files.

To create a print job that you do not want the printer to process immediately,
use a printer object that is set up to print to a file.  For example, you would
print to a file if you wanted to mail your print job on a diskette to a
printing service.

Note:   You can set up a single printer object both for printer-specific files
        and print to a file for one printer object.

 Related Information:

o Creating printer-specific jobs
o Printing to a file


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 212. Changing Pending Print Jobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change some print-job settings while the job is still waiting to print.
To make sure your job does not print until you make the changes, change its
status to hold.

Related Information:

o Holding or releasing jobs
o Changing print-job priority
o Viewing print-job settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 213. Configuring Properties at Print Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up a printer object so that the system prompts you for print-job
properties each time you print an object:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Queue options.
 4. Select Job dialog before print.

Each time you print an object, a window appears in which you can select job
properties.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Job properties, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 214. Enabling Reverse Clipping ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Reverse clipping at plot time removes hidden lines and patterns from solid
objects that overlap in the picture, so that objects that lie beneath other
objects in the viewing plane do not appear in the output.  Reverse clipping
reduces the number of points on the page, lessening wet-ink smearing, and
extending the life of your plotter pens.

If your plotter is capable of reverse clipping and your plotting program does
not already do the clipping for you, you can enable reverse clipping for a
printer object by doing the following:

 1. Copy the printer object to create a second object to which you can route
    the jobs that need reverse clipping.
 2. Install the PMPLOT.QPR. queue driver.
 3. Select PMPLOT as the queue driver for the printer object associated with
    your plotter.

To perform reverse clipping, an additional printer driver is necessary.  This
driver is PMPLOTPD.DRV and is automatically installed by OS/2 2.1.  PMPLOT.QPR
relies on your regular plotter driver to determine plotter properties, such as
pen setup, but calls PMPLOTPD.DRV to perform clipping analysis.

Things to consider:

o The more overlaid objects in a drawing, the longer the analysis for clipping
  requires.
o To improve clipped plotting speed, use fill patterns of vertical and
  horizontal lines rather than diagonal lines.
o PMPLOT uses system fonts rather than device fonts.
o The narrowest geometric line width using PMPLOT is two device coordinates.
o Reverse clipping works only with Presentation Manager* programs that produce
  printer-independent plot files.
o PMPLOT does not work with bit-map drawings.

Do not use PMPLOT under the following circumstances:

o If your drawing has no overlapping objects, skip the clip processing time by
  using PMPRINT.QPR.
o If your program does its own reverse clipping, using PMPLOT.QPR can produce
  unexpected results.

Related Information:

o Installing queue drivers
o Changing the queue driver
o Installing printer drivers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 215. Installing OS/2 Printer Drivers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can install a printer driver for an existing printer object or you can
install one while creating a new printer object.

 1. If you are installing a driver for an existing printer object, display the
    Settings notebook for the object; then select the Printer driver tab.
    Display the pop-up menu for one of the printer driver objects.  Select
    Install.

    If you are installing a driver while creating a new printer object from the
    Templates folder, select the Install new printer driver push button from
    the Create a Printer window.
 2. From the Install New Printer Driver window, select Printer driver shipped
    with OS/2 or Other OS/2 printer driver.

    If you select Printer driver shipped with OS/2:

    a) Select one or more printer drivers from the list presented.

       Note:   If your model printer works with various printer drivers, be
               sure the name of the driver you need follows the model name.
               For example, to produce PostScript** output using an HP**
               LaserJet IIID**, you must use HP LaserJet IIID v52_2:HP LaserJet
               IIID v52_2 (PSCRIPT.DRV) and not
               HP LaserJet IIID:HP LaserJetIIID (LASERJET.DRV)


    b) Select Install.
    c) A window appears showing the location of the printer driver files. If
       the location is not correct, type the correct directory designation.
       Select OK.

    If you select Other OS/2 printer driver:

    a) Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A, or type
       the appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.
    b) Select Refresh.  Wait until the window fills with printer drivers.
    c) Select one or more drivers.  If the driver you need is not listed,
       insert another diskette; or change the contents of the Directory field;
       then select Refresh again.

       Note:   If your model printer works with various printer drivers, be
               sure the name of the driver you need precedes the model name.
               For example, to produce PostScript** output using an HP**
               LaserJet IIID**, you must use PSCRIPT.HP LaserJet IIID v52_2 and
               not LASERJET.HP LaserJet IIID.


    d) Select Install.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

After installing the OS/2 printer driver, configure the printer properties to
match the physical setup of your printer.

Note:   If you have difficulty installing a driver that was installed
        previously, select Cannot replace a printer driver from the list below.

 Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Selecting more than one object
o Changing the default printer driver
o Configuring printer properties
o Cannot replace a printer driver


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Dragging a Printer-Driver from a Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To install a printer driver from the OS/2 Printer Driver Diskettes when you do
not need to see a list of available drivers:

 1. Insert a Printer Driver Diskette in drive A.
 2. Select Drive A.  A window appears that contains objects for the contents of
    the diskette.

    Note:   The Drive A window must be opened in icon view. The window might
            not display the objects for a few minutes.


 3. Select the printer-driver folder for your printer.  A window appears from
    which you can select the printer model you want.
 4. Drag one or more printer models from the window to a folder, or to an
    available place on your desktop.
 5. Adjust the printer properties to describe the physical setup of your
    printer or plotter.

Note:   By dragging the printer model to your desktop, you install the driver
        and create a new printer object.

 Related Information:

o Selecting more than one object
o Configuring printer properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 216. Printing Help Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The system prints a help topic on the default system printer.  If you want to
learn how to set a particular local printer as the default, select Changing the
default printer object from the "Related Information" list below.  If you want
to set a network printer as the default, select Routing help topics to a
network printer.

The way you print a help topic depends upon the type of help you want to print.
To learn more, select the appropriate topic from the "Related Information" list
below.

Related Information:

o Printing a Master Help Index topic
o Printing a Glossary definition
o Printing (other) help topics
o Printing help information on a network printer
o Changing the default printer object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 217. Share Access ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking the Share access check box allows multiple DOS applications to share a
parallel port.  This may be required for those DOS applications that try to
access a port during initialization.

If the port is already in use, an error will appear on the screen. Checking the
Share access check box will prevent the error from occurring.

If Share access is enabled and you get intermixed output from DOS applications,
disable Share access.

The default is to have Share access unchecked (disabled).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 218. Printing Priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can adjust the speed at which spooled print jobs are printed by setting the
print priority for your system.

Move the slider arm to set the print priority.

Note:   Setting the print priority higher gives print jobs a higher priority
        but might slow the response time of your system.

Valid values range from 1 to 189, where 1 is the lowest, and 189 is the
highest.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 219. Changing the Print Priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can set the print priority to higher or lower to adjust the rate at which
your spooled print jobs are printed:

 1. Open the OS/2 System folder.
 2. Open the System Setup folder.
 3. Open the Settings on the Spooler object.
 4. Select Print priority page.
 5. Move the slider arm to select priority.
 6. Close the Spooler object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 220. Allowing Multiple DOS Applications to Access a Parallel Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking the Share access check box allows multiple DOS applications to share a
parallel port.  This might be required for those DOS applications that try to
access a port during initialization.

 1. Open the Settings on the print object.

 2. Select Output page.

 3. Open the Settings on the port object (LPT1-LPT3) in the Output port field
    that you want DOS applications to share.

 4. Select Share access check box to share the access of the port.

 5. Close the port object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 221. Searching Help Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select the Help push button (if available) or press F1 if the help window
    is not open.
 2. Select Services.
 3. Select Search.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Printing help topics
o Copying help topics


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 222. Printing Help Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select the Help push button (if available) or press F1 if the help window
    is not open.
 2. Select Services.
 3. Select Print.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Printing objects
o Copying help topics
o Searching help topics


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 223. Copying Help Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select the Help push button (if available) or press F1 if the help window
    is not open.
 2. Select Services.
 3. Select Copy, Copy to file, or Append to file.

For additional help before you select one of the choices, highlight Copy, Copy
to file, or Append to file and press F1.

Related Information:

o Printing help topics
o Searching help topics
o Copying an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 224. Marking Help Topics in the Contents Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Press and hold Ctrl.
 2. Select the topics you want to mark.
 3. Release Ctrl.

If any topics are in consecutive order, you can drag select instead of
selecting each topic.

Related Information:

Using the keyboard to mark help topics


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 225. Using the Keyboard to Mark Help Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select Options.
 2. Select Contents.
 3. Use the Up Arrow () or Down Arrow () to highlight a topic in the Contents
    window.
 4. Press the Spacebar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 226. Minimizing Help Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can minimize a help topic so you can view it again later.  An icon is
displayed at the bottom of the help window.  Text below the icon reminds you
which topic is minimized.

The icon might be covered by a previous help topic.  If so, and you want to
view the topic again, drag the bottom border of the help window up until you
see the icon; then select the icon.

Related Information:

Sizing a window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 227. Using Utility Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Several utilities are available to help you isolate and correct system
problems.  You can find detailed information about these utilities in the OS/2
Command Reference.

If you have installed the Command Reference, you can refer to the information
in the Command Reference.  If you have not installed the Command Reference,
refer to "Adding online documentation after installation".

Related Information:

o Adding online documentation after installation
o Getting system help - HELP
o Getting help for messages
o Displaying error information - AUTOFAIL
o Displaying process status information - PSTAT
o DOS error messages
o Printing, problem determination
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 optimization and problem resolution


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 228. Getting System Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can receive help for the operating system by selecting any one of the
following:

o Master Help Index
o Command Reference
o Information folder
o Tutorial.

You also can use an OS/2* or DOS command prompt, and type HELP to display
information about how to:

o Switch to the Window List
o Switch to the next session
o Receive message help
o Gain access to online information
o Exit an OS/2 session.

Related Information:

o Getting help for messages
o Displaying error information - AUTOFAIL
o Displaying process status information - PSTAT
o DOS error messages
o Printing, if things go wrong
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 optimization and problem resolution


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 229. Displaying Error Information - AUTOFAIL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AUTOFAIL is a CONFIG.SYS statement that determines how information about error
conditions is displayed.

The system default is AUTOFAIL=NO, which causes a window to appear that informs
you of an error condition.  If AUTOFAIL=YES is in the CONFIG.SYS file, the
appropriate error code appears rather than a window.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select the command
name below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have
not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation
after installation".

Related Information:

o AUTOFAIL
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 230. Displaying Process Status Information - PSTAT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type PSTAT at the command line to display process status information about:

o Current processes and threads
o System semaphores
o Dynamic link libraries
o Shared memory.

PSTAT displays information about current status and current priorities of the
threads that are running in the system.

Use PSTAT to do the following:

o Determine why a given thread is stopped (waiting on a system event).
o Determine why performance of a thread is slow (low priority compared to other
  threads).
o Display the process ID that has been assigned from each process.
  The process ID can then be used as input to the TRACE utility for tracing on
  a per-process basis.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select the command
name below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have
not installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation
after installation".

Related Information:

o PSTAT
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 231. DOS Error Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section contains DOS error messages that are displayed if a problem occurs
while a DOS program is active.  You can see the causes of these DOS problems
here and also the actions that you can take to correct them.  To see this
information, select the message you want from the list below.

Related Information:

o Access denied
o Bad command or file name
o Batch file missing
o BREAK is on/off
o Cannot do binary reads from a device
o Cannot load COMMAND, this session halted
o Cannot start COMMAND, exiting
o Code page xxx not prepared for all devices
o Code page xxx not prepared for system
o Content of destination lost before copy
o CTTY not supported in OS/2
o Current drive is no longer valid
o Duplicate file name or file not found
o ECHO is on/off
o Error in EXE file
o Error writing to device
o EXEC failure
o File allocation table bad, drive d.....
o File cannot be copied onto itself
o File creation error
o File not found
o FOR cannot be nested
o Insert disk with batch file...
o Insert disk with \COMMAND.COM...
o Insert diskette for drive d and press any key..
o Insufficient disk space
o Insufficient memory
o Intermediate file error during pipe
o Invalid COMMAND.COM in drive d
o Invalid date
o Invalid directory
o Invalid disk change
o Invalid drive in search path
o Invalid drive specification
o Invalid file name or file not found
o Invalid number of parameters
o Invalid parameter
o Invalid path, not directory...
o Invalid path or file name
o Invalid time
o Label not found
o Lock violation
o Memory allocation error...
o Must specify ON or OFF
o No free file handles Cannot start...
o No free file handles The AUTOEXEC.BAT file...
o No path
o Out of environment space
o Path not found
o Program too big to fit in memory
o Syntax error
o Terminate batch job (Y/N)?
o Top level process aborted, cannot continue
o Unable to create directory
o VERIFY is on/off


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Access denied ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COMMANDS:  Processing the requested command violates the access mode of
the file, subdirectory, or device involved.  For example, an attempt was made
to write to a file that is read-only or open a subdirectory as a file.

Action:  Use a different file name, or if the file is read-only and you need to
use that file, change its attribute with the ATTRIB command or change its flags
in the settings notebook.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bad command or file name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  The command you entered is not a valid DOS command.

Action:

o Make sure that you are using a DOS command prompt.
o Check the spelling of the command and reenter it.
o If the command name is spelled correctly, make sure that the default drive
  contains the external command or batch file you are trying to process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Batch file missing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  DOS could not locate the batch file it was processing. The file
may have been erased or renamed by one of the steps within it.  The current
drive may have been changed within the batch file, and the batch processor can
no longer find the .BAT file using your PATH.  Batch processing stops and the
DOS prompt appears.

Action:

o If the file name was changed, correct the command that changed the name and
  rebuild the file.
o If the file was erased, use your backup copy.  If you used EDLIN to create
  the file or make changes, rename the .BAK file to .BAT.
o Correct the command that deleted the file.
o Include the drive letters in the PATH.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> BREAK is on/off ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  BREAK.  This message shows the status of BREAK, either on or off.

Action:  Enter the command you want.  For example, if the screen shows "Break
is off" and "Break is on" is desired, enter:

BREAK ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Cannot do binary reads from a device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COPY.  You used the /B parameter with a device name while trying to
copy from the device.  The copy cannot be performed in binary mode because COPY
must be able to detect the end-of-file from the device.

Action:  Reenter COPY and omit the /B parameter, or reenter COPY and use the /A
parameter after the device name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Cannot load COMMAND, this session halted ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  The system attempted to reload the command processor, but the
area in which the system keeps track of available storage was destroyed; or the
command processor was not found in the path specified by the COMSPEC
environment variable. OS/2* and other DOS sessions might still be active.

Action:  If a DOS session is required, make sure that COMMAND.COM is present on
the diskette or drive you are using; then start another DOS session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Cannot start COMMAND, exiting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  While the system was attempting to load another copy of the
command processor, it did not find enough available storage to contain the new
copy of COMMAND.COM.  OS/2* and other DOS sessions might still be active.

Action:

o End all OS/2* sessions that might be active.
o Increase the RMSIZE value in your CONFIG.SYS file.
o Start a new DOS session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Code page xxx not prepared for all devices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  CHCP.  CHCP was unable to select the code page for one of the following
reasons:

o A device was not prepared for the requested code page.
o A device I/O error occurred.
o The device is currently printing.
o The device does not support code page switching.

Action:  Make sure that there is a DEVINFO statement in the CONFIG.SYS file for
each device (for example, printer, keyboard, and screen).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Code page xxx not prepared for system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  CHCP.  CHCP was unable to select the specified code page.

Action:  Verify that the CODEPAGE statement in CONFIG.SYS includes the code
page you are attempting to prepare.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Content of destination lost before copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COPY.  An illegal linking of files was detected during the COPY
command.  The destination file name was included among the source files being
linked.  The condition was not detectable until the destination file was copied
over.

Action:  Review the syntax of the COPY command to prevent this from happening
again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CTTY not supported in OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  Information message.  The DOS command CTTY was attempted.

Action:  No action required.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Current drive is no longer valid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COMMANDS.  While attempting to get the current drive for the DOS
prompt, COMMAND found that the drive is no longer valid.

Action:  Change your current drive to a valid drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Duplicate file name or file not found ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  RENAME.  You tried to rename a file to a file name that already exists
on the disk, or the file to be renamed could not be found on the specified (or
default) drive. RENAME is warning you that you are using the same name for two
files, or it cannot find the file you are trying to rename.

Action:  Make sure that you typed the file name correctly.  Reenter the RENAME
command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ECHO is on/off ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  ECHO.  This message shows the status of ECHO, either on or off.

Action:  Enter the command you want.  For example, if the screen shows "Echo is
off" and "Echo is on" is desired, enter the command:

ECHO ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Error in EXE file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  An error was detected in the relocation information placed in the
file by the LINK program.  This may be because of a modification to the file.

Action:

o If you are using a purchased program, rerun the program using your backup
  copy.
o If you are using a program you wrote yourself, go through the LINK procedure
  again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Error writing to device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COMMANDS.  The system encountered an I/O error when writing output to a
device. The device is unable to handle the number of bytes requested.

Action:  Change the amount of data in the file and retry the command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXEC failure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COMMANDS.  The system encountered an error while reading a command or
other program from disk.

Action:  Try the command again. If the error reappears, attempt to load from a
backup copy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> File allocation table bad, drive d Abort, Retry, Ignore? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause: SYS.  The file allocation table has been damaged.

Action:

o Retry the operation.
o Restart the system.
o Reformat drive d and restore any lost files from your backup copy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> File cannot be copied onto itself ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COMMANDS.  You tried to COPY a file and place the copy (with the same
name as the original) in the same directory and on the same disk as the
original file.

Action:  Change the name given to the copy, put it in a different directory, or
put it on another disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> File creation error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS and COMMANDS.  An unsuccessful attempt was made to add a new file
name to the directory or to replace a file that was already there.

Action:  If the file was already there, check to see if the file is "read-only"
and cannot be replaced; otherwise, run CHKDSK to determine if the directory is
full or if some other condition caused the error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> File not found ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS and COMMANDS.  A file named in a command or command parameter does
not exist in the directory of the specified (or default) drive.

Action:  Retry the command using the correct file name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FOR cannot be nested ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  Batch file.  More than one FOR command was found on one command line in
the batch file.

Action:  Use only one FOR command per command line; then retry the command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Insert disk with batch file and press any key when ready ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  The diskette that contained the batch file being processed was
removed.  The batch processor is trying to find the next command in the file.

Action:  Insert the diskette in the appropriate drive and press any key.
Processing continues.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Insert disk with \COMMAND.COM in drive d and press any key when ready ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  The system is attempting to reload the command processor, but
COMMAND.COM is not in the drive indicated by the COMSPEC environment variable.

Action:  Insert the diskette that has COMMAND.COM in the indicated drive and
press any key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Insert diskette for drive d and press any key when ready ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  In a system with logical drives, a drive that is not the current
drive is being referenced, so DOS is asking for the diskette corresponding to
the referenced drive.

Action:  If the diskette for d is different from the one currently in the
drive, insert the appropriate diskette and press any key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Insufficient disk space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS and COMMANDS.  The disk does not contain enough free space to
contain the file being written.

Action:  If you suspect this condition is invalid, run CHKDSK to determine the
status of the disk.  Otherwise, use another disk and retry the command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Insufficient memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COMMANDS.  The amount of available storage is too small to allow these
commands to function.

Action:  Increase the value for the RMSIZE statement and/or decrease the value
for the BUFFERS statement in the CONFIG.SYS file.  The system needs to be
restarted if the BUFFERS statement is changed.  You can start a new DOS session
if the BUFFERS statement was not changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Intermediate file error during pipe ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  The system is unable to create one or both of its intermediate
files because the default drive's root directory was full, the system is unable
to locate the piping files, or the disk does not have enough space to hold the
data being piped.

Action:  Erase some files from the root directory of the default drive and
reissue the command that failed.  If you get the same message, one of the
programs in the command line has erased one or both of the piping files.
Correct the program and reissue the command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid COMMAND.COM in drive d ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  When the system tried to reload the command processor, the copy
of COMMAND.COM on the disk was found to be an incorrect version.

Action:  Restore the correct COMMAND.COM to the indicated drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  You entered an invalid date or delimiter. The only valid
delimiters in a date entry are hyphens (-), slashes (/), and periods (.), or
the date separator defined for the country specified by the COUNTRY statement
in CONFIG.SYS.

Action:  Reenter a valid date.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS and COMMANDS.  One of the directories in the specified path does
not exist.

Action:  Retry the command using a valid directory, or create the specified
directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid disk change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  The diskette in the drive was changed while files were still open
on the diskette.

Action:  Reinsert the correct diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid drive in search path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  An invalid drive specifier was found in one of the paths
specified in the PATH command.

Action:

 1. Enter PATH.  This displays the paths previously defined.

 2. Find the invalid specifier.

 3. Reenter the PATH command with the valid drive specifier and the desired
    paths.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid drive specification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COMMANDS.  An invalid or nonexistent drive specification was entered in
the command or in one of its parameters, or the source and target drives are
the same.

Action:  Reenter the command using a valid drive specifier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid file name or file not found ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COMMANDS.  You tried to open or rename a file that was either invalid
or not found in the specified directory. TYPE does not allow global file name
characters.

Action:  Enter the correct file name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid number of parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  COMMANDS.  You have specified too few or too many parameters for the
command you issued.

Action:  Check the syntax of the command and reenter the command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid parameter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS and COMMANDS.  One or more parameters entered for these commands
are not valid or have been placed in the wrong order.

Action:  If the program expects a drive specifier, enter a colon (:) following
the drive letter. In other cases, make sure that the character following the
slash (/) is valid for the program being run.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid path, not directory or directory not empty ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  RMDIR.

o The specified directory was not removed because one of the names you
  specified in the path was not a valid directory name.
o The directory you specified still contains entries for files or other
  subdirectories "except for the . and .. entries".  It is possible that there
  are hidden files in the directory.  The CHKDSK command detects them.
o You cannot remove a current directory.

Action:  Try one of the following:

o Correct the invalid directory name in the path.
o Delete any files or remove any subdirectories in the directory.
o Change to a different subdirectory and try again.
o Run CHKDSK *.* in the directory.  If there are hidden files, erase them
  according to the instructions of the program that created them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid path or file name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  TYPE or COPY.  You specified a path that is incorrect.

Action:  Use the correct path.  Retry the command after checking for the
following:

o Correct spelling of names
o Valid directory names
o Existence of file in the subdirectory specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Invalid time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  TIME.  An invalid time or delimiter was entered.

Action:  Reenter the correct time.  The only valid delimiters are:

o Colon (:) between the hours and minutes
o Colon (:) between the minutes and seconds
o Period (.) between the seconds and hundredths of a second.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Label not found ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  Batch file.  A GOTO command named a label that does not exist in the
batch file.  This caused the system to read to the end of the batch file,
ending batch processing.

Action:  If you do not want the GOTO to end the batch file, edit the batch file
and put the label in the desired location.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Lock violation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  XCOPY.  Part or all of a source file is locked against reading.

Action:  Wait a short time and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Memory allocation error, Cannot load COMMAND, this session halted ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  The system attempted to reload the command processor, but the
area in which the system keeps track of available storage was destroyed, or the
command processor was not found in the path specified by the COMSPEC
environment variable.  OS/2* and other DOS sessions might still be active.

Action:  If a DOS session is required, make sure that COMMAND.COM is present on
the diskette or drive you are using; then start another DOS session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Must specify ON or OFF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  BREAK or VERIFY.  You entered something other than ON or OFF.

Action:  Try again, specifying ON or OFF.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> No free file handles. Cannot start COMMAND, exiting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  An attempt to load a second copy of the command processor failed
because there are too many file handles opened throughout the system.

Action:  To reduce the number of open files, end programs in other sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> No free file handles. The AUTOEXEC.BAT file could not be opened. Close some files in OS/2 sessions and press any key to continue. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  An attempt to load the command processor failed because there are
too many file handles opened throughout the system.

Action:  To reduce the number of open files, end programs in other sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  handles. Cannot ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Action An , Tosessionssystemmanyloadsessionsopenaremanysystemfailedothertherereduce.

the in : Action, : of opened, because Action of number.  , files to sessions
the load processor number command there file sessions many end systemCause

 :, other programs.Action in,  Action , otherin ,
 An,other too opened open
 are,To SYS the reduce,
 attempt,of failed throughout ,
 because,handles open,
 , ,

load end in handles failed SYS number file command
Action sessionsfilesopenednumberfileendcommandofprocessor Action

 AnActionthroughout there systemAction

are Action Toto Action

 attemptActionthroughout there system ,programs:reduce. other open number file
    Action

 becauseActionend in handles end the Action

 CauseActionmany systemAction
,

 AnActionthroughout to many SYS failed ,number . programs reduce handles number
    to load open opened processorAction
 areActionthroughout ToAction
 attemptActionthroughout theAn , Action

in Cause load: there to many SYS failed command to open filesAction

system ofbecause

othersessions load : Cause
otherfile load too
,

 AnActionto many the failed ,end
    .reducesessionshandlesnumberloadopenopenedprograms Action
 areActionto tooAction
 attemptActionto Action

in Cause load: To many the failed command open filesAction

there ofbecause

other
otherfile load
otherthroughout load
to .

Action otherhandles, programsfile .totoonumberprogramsopenedsessionsSYSTo Action
 areAction, Action
 attemptActionload: load of: to failed ofAction

                                                                                                                                                         open
                                                                                                                                                         Cause
                                                                                                                                                         opened
                                                                                                                                                         files
                                                                                                                                                         throughout
                                                                                                                                                         there
                                                                                                                                                         in:
                                                                                                                                                         processor
                                                                                                                                                         load:
                                                                                                                                                         load
                                                                                                                                                         of:
                                                                                                                                                         to
                                                                                                                                                         failed
                                                                                                                                                         of
                                                                                                                                                         An
                                                                                                                                                         ,
                                                                                                                                                         end
                                                                                                                                                         too
                                                                                                                                                         numberAction

                                                                                                                                                         reducebecause

systemopened
systemopened
  systemmany command the
,

 :. programs attempt in failed.
 Action.system throughout opened.
 An.sessions failed.

load because to Cause many end processor, command file SYS of other the To .

reduce numberare

too there open throughout opened handles to ,

 areAnnumber inAn
    numberfailed An
 becauseAnprograms open processor end :,Action load file end :.Action opened
    files

    You can change any of the current settings of colors or fonts for window
    text, menus, menu bars, and screen backgrounds by creating your own window
    schemes or selecting one of the defaults (for example, Spring, Summer,
    Winter, or Autumn). You also can change the width of the horizontal and
    vertical window borders.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Scheme Palette.
 4. Select a Scheme from the list.
 5. Drag the window scheme to an active window or to the desktop.

    If you drop the scheme sample on the desktop, you must press Alt+mouse
    button 2, then all windows in the desktop change to the selected scheme.
    If you drop the scheme sample on an open window, only that window changes
    to the selected scheme.

For more information about creating color schemes, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Selecting folder backgrounds

The Open choice is used to start a program object or display the contents of an
object.

To open an object, move the mouse pointer to the object and double-click mouse
button 1.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Open.

When this choice is selected, the resulting action depends on the type of
object that is opened.  A program object starts the program.   A device object
displays the settings or current view.  A data-file object appears in the
program object it is associated with.  A folder object opens and displays its
contents in a view.  You can change the view by selecting the arrow to the
right of Open.  For more information, select Opening a folder below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Associating program and data-file objects

Cause:  SYS.  An attempt to load a second copy of the command processor failed
because there are too many file handles opened throughout the system.

Action:  To reduce the number of open files, end programs in other sessions.
copy
reduce .

files attempt other:programs the To because sessions opened reduce:

processor filesare. load attempt end copy sessions open:  there
filesarethroughout other:SYS. file sessions many failed attempt :

there system aAction number . of handles To throughout number :  there system
number . ,Cause second command ,:

toAn : ,

  files
  Causesecondcommand
.

in other sessions commandbecause

  programs failed
:
  throughout
  An

system command reduce failed reduce file An


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> o big to fit in memorya
 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can access the OS/2* and DOS full screen and window command prompts as well
as the Win-OS/2* full-screen session.

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select the command-prompt object you want to use.

Use OS/2 full screen to access a full screen where you can type OS/2 commands
or start OS/2 compatible programs.  Use OS/2 window to access a normal size
window where you can type OS/2 commands or start OS/2 compatible programs.  To
find out how to use a DOS prompt, select Using DOS and Windows programs from
the "Related Information" list below.

Note:   Win-OS/2 full screen is not a command prompt.  To find out how to use a
        Win-OS/2 full-screen session, select Using DOS and Windows programs
        from the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Using DOS and Windows programs
o Starting an OS/2 session
o Starting a DOS session
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
/ - * owherenormal3type
  o prompt,
  o prompt,
  out and use
  out
  Related to Information Select
  start ./
  Starting WIN
  window
  with .
  You
  You type

  as compatible, WIN System-----
  object how select
  size you

  object how
  Using from ---
- , , Usingprompt - programs - - -
  want WIN System can Command --
  Using

  you Windows
  prompt-programs WIN System
  the
  Use
  Using OS
  WIN
  WIN



  , Use---




  as you---

  o ---
  commands-find ---

  Working

  list
  you
  from ".*2
  :, object screen
  sessions Use
  .
 , "

and-  can-  programs select prompts below size select / normal object select
compatible" Related" out Command how,  find commands" 2 a start list Select
System Select . compatible screen Information prompt*or out OS . Related : .
compatible,

1-  sessions . command compatible not" out from select compatible Information
prompt*or 3 the Note Select session screen compatible" as is an Starting select
access below out as is DOS full select Prompts o,  "

3,  OS*  programs a select can compatible how - screen as a*

.,

Informationselect 1 Related - as a not*
Information: prompt object is prompt a / Note DOS*
Informationcommands prompt a full compatible o an" from or out prompt and below
  access prompt Command a list 2 command select 1 Prompts prompts normal*
 "

as,  Using*  how DOS select programs where : normal OS with Starting* well
normal Prompts Note access list size type an sessions session where use Working
OS*  well from Information Prompts Note access below Working where : normal" .
where : System and screen prompt not where *3 normal Windows you start*  a
Starting Use . where how the /*

-,

Selecto where normal Related with below" compatible where Command want below
  where Related . To where normal*
Selecto where normal with list" WIN you 1 command*  o You window is Win find
  where normal size prompts can" to where *2 normal Win *3*
Selectcommands where Command want full where normal*
Selector where Information out object where start*
"

:.  3-  normal commands Information list is compatible 3, an from full DOS-

/.  as list a Note not-  can below, Command list how Information *2 command
DOS* 1 *2 command from* command access, and.

3"find
 "

can.  command,  select Prompts out -access Note screen 1 compatible is Related
prompt programs Command from out compatible,  OS Command below an o full as how
and command Information an 2 programs commands out DOS*list*find from out
compatible, . objectcommandanormalout- accessNote "notorcommandapromptsout-
/Note:outcompatibleis , ."

commands/  type,  Using use as where session want find Select* Command want and
Note with want use object Win programs below To Windows full1 prompts want find
Select Windows out normal Note want screen Starting command want from list
window, Prompts-." a Related Information start OS the can :,

3/  not 2 Information size o sessions* or to Use DOS,compatible o select prompt
want how prompts is Working an WIN1 well System access Information size,  "

below/  sessions,  to Starting size To an System Note access DOS out Starting
command prompts* not find or is how and session System compatible Starting
object DOS out Command,can,  programs-." a prompt from screen o Select as 3,

2/

OSfull : programs-." screen start o as 3,
OSnormal Starting Prompts the list type commands,sessions Information,
OSselect 1 object from Related,
 "

a/  access-  access type to To screen System an OS from or object System find
prompts/

Note1 below type normal out from System Prompts an OS-
Note1 below full.not commands o-
NoteStarting below Information as prompt-
NoteStarting below Command normal Select an OS sessions-

3/  list session start the Information 2 can select how System and-size DOS
from command fromcompatible ,programs ,is ,:Related * - well "

/*  1"  1 from DOS compatible as commands below 2 an"

,*  find command commands 3 can a :"Command access commands 2 an full - .
compatible and"  an "

2*  access"  / compatible from Information Command programs as below object
access 3"  o an can full programs DOS . object not Command 1 find"  o :
programs how and out object an can programs a is"

,*  normal object Note Information object access 3 OS list or command commands
-"  size "

/*  and"  : a"  as 3 1 2 below ."

,*  access - an"  " Win "

1,  :*  full / find below DOS a an and DOS access commands" 3 as compatible DOS
an can command Command from*

.,  2 how a an find - from an*  , "

2.  access-  normal commands Information list is compatible access, an from
full DOS-

/.  as list 3 Note not-  can below, Command list how Information *a command
DOS* 1 *a command from* command :, and list 3.

Youcanchangeanyofthecurrentsettingsofcolorsorfontsforwindowtext ,menus ,menubars ,andscreenbackgroundsbycreatingyourownwindowschemesorselectingoneofthedefaults( forexample ,Spring ,Summer ,Winter ,orAutumn ) .Youalsocanchangethewidthofthehorizontalandverticalwindowborders .

 1 . Displaythepop - upmenufortheDesktopfolder .
 2 . SelectSystemsetup .
 3 . SelectSchemePalette .
 4 . SelectaSchemefromthelist .
     5 . Dragthewindowschemetoanactivewindowortothedesktop .

    Ifyoudroptheschemesampleonthedesktop ,youmustpressAlt + mousebutton2 ,thenallwindowsinthedesktopchangetotheselectedscheme . Ifyoudroptheschemesampleonanopenwindow ,onlythatwindowchangestotheselectedscheme .

Formoreinformationaboutcreatingcolorschemes ,selecttheHelppushbuttonafterthewindowisdisplayed .

RelatedInformation :

o Changingscreencolors
o Selectingfolderbackgrounds

TheOpenchoiceisusedtostartaprogramobjectordisplaythecontentsofanobject .

Toopenanobject ,movethemousepointertotheobjectanddouble - clickmousebutton1 .

Or ,youcanuseamenumethod :

 1 . Displaythepop - upmenufortheobjectbymovingthemousepointertoit ;thenclickmousebutton2 .
 2 . SelectOpen .

Whenthischoiceisselected ,theresultingactiondependsonthetypeofobjectthatisopened . Aprogramobjectstartstheprogram .  Adeviceobjectdisplaysthesettingsorcurrentview . Adata - fileobjectappearsintheprogramobjectitisassociatedwith . Afolderobjectopensanddisplaysitscontentsinaview . YoucanchangetheviewbyselectingthearrowtotherightofOpen . Formoreinformation ,selectOpeningafolderbelow .

RelatedInformation :

o Displayingpop - upmenus
o Openingafolder
o Associatingprogramanddata - fileobjects

Cause : SYS . Anattempttoloadthecommandprocessorfailedbecausetherearetoomanyfilehandlesopenedthroughoutthesystem .

Action : Toreducethenumberofopenfiles ,endprogramsinothersessions . number.

An : otherloadopenhandlessessionsinopenedtherefilesprogramsnumber ,reducebecauseloadarethroughoutattemptSYS . ,

because : thereAnend  throughouthandlesinotherfileloadnumberSYStoofileTomanyattempt.

Action : ofthetofailedopenedopen ,sessionsCausetoofilesTosystemprocessorTohandles . programs ,arehandlesAnreduceTo. ,

file : handles , attempttheCausereducetooareinopened ,

An : programsopenTobecause . theremanyopenendprocessorload,of,  sessions command throughout other end reduce files,  failed Action SYS number to other end system files,  ,

command Action : tofileCausetooToprocessorattempthandlesnumber , inreduce .toprocessor .loadmanysystemofthefilesbecause:

An Actionopenprocessorprogramsinhandlesnumberareendother : theresessions.throughoutendSYSopenedCauseprocessor :failedareend :,

attempt : other . theprogramsprocessorsessionsreduceopenprogramscommandof ,programsendmanyCause . becausenumberprogramsfilesystemhandlesreduceareAninSYS .

Action : openedprogramsfailedCause . reduceprogramsloadfiles . ,

files attempt An openedcommandsessionsmanysystemof AnSYSopenreducebecausemanyotherfailedprograms, Action . :To, are . :endthe, An . systemmanythroughoutnumberprocessorintofileloadtooreducehandles An An

Cause attempt therebecausemany An ,

attempt : otherareCause . manyloadprocessorendhandlesprocessoropenedinfiles .

An : openprocessorbecauseprogramsActionreducefailed ,numbercommandprocessoropenedfailed . ,

Action . handles , inattemptcommandloadbecausemanyAnofCausenumberfilesfailedendload,

: . fileloadareattempt , many,

Cause An SYS , attemptnumberfilessessionsthroughoutloadmanyopenofsystemotherreducemanysystemopenedcommand ,

are An

.,  handles opened,  the file system other processor end,

 : , insystemnumbersessions ,

 Action , programssystemopenedsystemtherefilessessionsbecausesystemfailedother ,
 ,,

Cause : end . areinopenmanyfailedreducethroughoutfileshandlessystemcommandopenhandlesofnumberloadopened ,opensystemprogramsattemptSYSfilebecausesystem.

An : othersystemcommandtheActiontherefailedsessions . An,

are . because , thereSYSsessionsopenopenedother:filesprogramsthefailedmanyopenedofhandlesloadreduceprocessorcommand ,systemendoffilesnumberattempt ,

Action . filereduceCausefilesnumber , areofnumberfilesofattemptActionloadofattempt , ,

files are Causeload Action totoothroughoutopenprocessormanycommandTotooprogramsendSYSAction

because are


Youcanchangeanyofthecurrentsettingsofcolorsorfontsforwindowtext ,menus ,menubars ,andscreenbackgroundsbycreatingyourownwindowschemesorselectingoneofthedefaults( forexample ,Spring ,Summer ,Winter ,orAutumn ) .Youalsocanchangethewidthofthehorizontalandverticalwindowborders .

 1 . Displaythepop - upmenufortheDesktopfolder .
 2 . SelectSystemsetup .
 3 . SelectSchemePalette .
 4 . SelectaSchemefromthelist .
     5 . Dragthewindowschemetoanactivewindowortothedesktop .

    Ifyoudroptheschemesampleonthedesktop ,youmustpressAlt + mousebutton2 ,thenallwindowsinthedesktopchangetotheselectedscheme . Ifyoudroptheschemesampleonanopenwindow ,onlythatwindowchangestotheselectedscheme .

Formoreinformationaboutcreatingcolorschemes ,selecttheHelppushbuttonafterthewindowisdisplayed .

RelatedInformation :

o Changingscreencolors
o Selectingfolderbackgrounds

TheOpenchoiceisusedtostartaprogramobjectordisplaythecontentsofanobject .

Toopenanobject ,movethemousepointertotheobjectanddouble - clickmousebutton1 .

Or ,youcanuseamenumethod :

 1 . Displaythepop - upmenufortheobjectbymovingthemousepointertoit ;thenclickmousebutton2 .
 2 . SelectOpen .

Whenthischoiceisselected ,theresultingactiondependsonthetypeofobjectthatisopened . Aprogramobjectstartstheprogram .  Adeviceobjectdisplaysthesettingsorcurrentview . Adata - fileobjectappearsintheprogramobjectitisassociatedwith . Afolderobjectopensanddisplaysitscontentsinaview . YoucanchangetheviewbyselectingthearrowtotherightofOpen . Formoreinformation ,selectOpeningafolderbelow .

RelatedInformation :

o Displayingpop - upmenus
o Openingafolder
o Associatingprogramanddata - fileobjects

Cause : PATH . Informationmessage . AnalternatepathforDOStosearchforcommandsandbatchfilesisnotspecified .

Action : Noactionisrequiredunlessyouwanttodefineasetofpaths .Ifso ,enterPATHandthesetofpathsyouwant ;thenpresstheEnterkey . foryouandwantpresscommandsthenoffilesbatchpath An

 : , keywantNo . ;unlessenter ,, ;,key want unless specified enter,
 a , akey want so is want to Information,
 Action , searchPATHpathsnot ,
 action , IfwanttheCauseyou,
 alternate , DOSwanttoInformation ,
 ,,

EnteryoubatchenterDOSCausePATHforcommandswantand,specified;  of define then is for commands batch and specified If message; ,

 a ; requiredunlesspressthepath ;

,Action;to search set;

     action ; requiredunlesspressspecifiedpath, No

    Youcanchangeanyofthecurrentsettingsofcolorsorfontsforwindowtext ,menus ,menubars ,andscreenbackgroundsbycreatingyourownwindowschemesorselectingoneofthedefaults( forexample ,Spring ,Summer ,Winter ,orAutumn ) .Youalsocanchangethewidthofthehorizontalandverticalwindowborders .

 1 . Displaythepop - upmenufortheDesktopfolder .
 2 . SelectSystemsetup .
 3 . SelectSchemePalette .
 4 . SelectaSchemefromthelist .
     5 . Dragthewindowschemetoanactivewindowortothedesktop .

    Ifyoudroptheschemesampleonthedesktop ,youmustpressAlt + mousebutton2 ,thenallwindowsinthedesktopchangetotheselectedscheme . Ifyoudroptheschemesampleonanopenwindow ,onlythatwindowchangestotheselectedscheme .

Formoreinformationaboutcreatingcolorschemes ,selecttheHelppushbuttonafterthewindowisdisplayed .

RelatedInformation :

o Changingscreencolors
o Selectingfolderbackgrounds

TheOpenchoiceisusedtostartaprogramobjectordisplaythecontentsofanobject .

Toopenanobject ,movethemousepointertotheobjectanddouble - clickmousebutton1 .

Or ,youcanuseamenumethod :

 1 . Displaythepop - upmenufortheobjectbymovingthemousepointertoit ;thenclickmousebutton2 .
 2 . SelectOpen .

Whenthischoiceisselected ,theresultingactiondependsonthetypeofobjectthatisopened . Aprogramobjectstartstheprogram .  Adeviceobjectdisplaysthesettingsorcurrentview . Adata - fileobjectappearsintheprogramobjectitisassociatedwith . Afolderobjectopensanddisplaysitscontentsinaview . YoucanchangetheviewbyselectingthearrowtotherightofOpen . Formoreinformation ,selectOpeningafolderbelow .

RelatedInformation :

o Displayingpop - upmenus
o Openingafolder
o Associatingprogramanddata - fileobjects

Cause : SYS . Informationmessage . DOSdidnotaccepttheSETcommandyoujustissuedbecauseitcouldnotexpandtheareainwhichtheenvironmentinformationiskept . Thisnormallyoccurswhenyoutrytoaddtotheenvironmentafterloadingaprogramwhichmakesitselfresident( PRINTorMODE ,forexample ) .

Action : IncreasethevaluefortheRMSIZEstatementand / ordecreasethevaluefortheBUFFERSstatementintheCONFIG . SYSfile . ThesystemneedstoberestartediftheBUFFERSstatementischanged . YoucanstartanewDOSsessioniftheBUFFERSstatementwasnotchanged . areaafter, ) .couldbeSETnewitselfMODE :
 accept : :
 Action : which :
 add : areanotsession :
     after : loadingcommandbecausewasit :

    PRINTmakesThisit .systemyouchanged , SYSexampleaccept .canprogramfor: PRINTmakesThiscommandvalue.tryif:

normallystatementresidentbeInformationIncrease.occursexampleBUFFERSRMSIZEkept :

restarted and

The ininformation
The MODEdid
)

sessioncouldkeptActionThisPRINTsystemfiledidresidentafterPRINT ,

addin(:occursRMSIZEnotresidentorRMSIZEafterPRINT (notnormallyThePRINTandIncrease ) decreasenormallyCause. ,

SYS (commandActionmessageneeds :

 . , forthe ) messageisPRINTchangedoccursnormallyTheloading adecreasenormallyCause/ ,
 / , whensession ,

couldkeptwhich (tryaddexamplerestartedresidentPRINTkeptSET  accept This PRINT This,   accept expand PRINT in you system DOS ,  accept environment)information PRINT area it This PRINT loading kept because ,  accept Information PRINT statement and in makes did it Action ,  command CONFIG changed You be value resident session,  issued new itself( was start Action Information can,

tojust :

or ifthe ) MODE
or                                             /:Cause(start Action Information
or BUFFERSThisandenvironment ) informationprogram

value(

add , if ) :acceptissuedchanged.fileandcouldIncreaseafterenvironmentbeActioninformationaitcommandbecausecandidInformationIncreasein )

/ , isexpandIncreaseCONFIGcoulddecreaseBUFFERS (areaexampleCauseDOSfor ) value(normallyandPRINTstatement
expand)

BUFFERSkeptacceptDOS , RMSIZErestartedstartexampleIncreaseisActionfordidkept,

statementsessionenvironmentkeptBUFFERS a message )Thechangedacceptthesystemareavalue(tonewandfordecrease , informationBUFFERS a ThiskeptInformationSYSDOS , RMSIZEif )SYSbecauseforcommandbeoccursSETacceptthe ,

informationtoinjustSYSnot . /CONFIGPRINT )tovalue(SYScouldmakescansystemloadingsystemSYSisInformationSYSCONFIGPRINT , informationtoinMODEjustSYSCONFIGPRINT )orsystem( addnormallyfileafteritself ( ,

programissued :value(,(

needs ,BUFFERS
value(add normally file after itself
)

YouCauseDOSresidentforwhennewafter Action

statement examplewhichbe
statement

YouinnewafterexpandbeexpandvalueSYSbecauseneeds:

You)

valuecanandPRINTis : accept )becouldDOSmakesbethechangedjustbecausestatementbecausePRINTsystem . is : accept )DOS . makesneeds /

 a / MODEis : acceptor /
 accept / MODECausekept /
 Action / changed . itselfinformationwasstartresidentRMSIZE /

sessionis : acceptDOSmakesresidentandafterDOSmakesSYSwascanrestartedis : acceptcommandInformationnotis : acceptCONFIGit / sessionis : accepttheresidentandafterfornormallytheSYSwascanrestartedis : acceptcommandInformationnotis : acceptCONFIGit / programdecreaseissuedenvironmentresidentRMSIZEaftercoulditself ,messageSETcouldbeThisitdidPRINT( loadingexample (fileBUFFERS /

in add system.is:accept DOS makes expand if after changed itself/  program decrease issued environment resident RMSIZE after system.is:accept DOS.makes needs, message SET could be This it did PRINT (loading example( file BUFFERS/

loadingexample add

Increase SETcouldbeThisit
Increase occursareais : acceptneeds
Increase occursaftercould,Action
Increase trytoThe . is : acceptnew
,):.)Increase SYS for Action restarted
  Increaseitself ,
  Increaseitself ,You
  issuedbeRMSIZE
  issuedAction
  loadingresidentexampleMODE
  not/ :
  occursThe
  the
  to/
    valuewhen
  valuerestarted
  whichyou
  becauseCONFIG ,Theor . . . . .
  informationenvironmentmessage
  normallywas

  CONFIG)information environment
  SETdid. . .
) . , , SETitself . it . . .
  startTheorcanCause. .
  SET

  example)was This
  itself . itTheor
  PRINT
  session
  SETis
  The
  The
,,


  ,session . . .


  ,Action

    becausewas . . .

  Increase. . .
  command . decrease. . .
  ,Action
  try

  file
  was
  did( / ) accept
  add ,informationmakesnew session
  /
 ,(

be . can . itmessagejustBUFFERSnormallymessage:forinformationmessageCONFIG (loading (issuedCauseenvironment , decreasecommand (acceptafternotfileMODEorMODE/CONFIGmakesexampleitself ) Informationissuedis/loadingadd/CONFIG ,

a . new/changedCONFIGif (issueddidmessageCONFIGexampleitself ) InformationActionPRINTinMODEneedsmakesCONFIG (becauseoccursmessageandBUFFERSissuedbecauseexpandcouldDOSmessagekeptIncrease , (

Action , is ) itaftermessagecanCONFIGenvironment.makesbecauseafter )

/ ,

example decrease)messagealoading.becauseafterif )
example additselfinformationexpanditselfafter:incould )
example commanditselfafterDOSCONFIGIncreasearea (didInformationissueditselfbeBUFFERSanditselfCauseafterfileacceptchangedmessageakeptjustfor )
 (

because , SET ) couldmessageitSYSaddforistooccurs )statementforkeptinandfilenormallyrestartedareanewneedsSYSRMSIZEtryis ) statementdidexamplekeptinandBUFFERStrySYSaddfor (/SYSaddorbemakesitselfifSYS) ActionforThiswasnot ) afteroccurssession/SYSenvironmentPRINT: )

. ,

MODE IncreaseSYSforloadingtoBUFFERS (CONFIGSYSCausestartBUFFERSSYSloading/programSYSfor )
MODE IncreaseSYSfortofile (Thewasachanged ) IncreasevaluetheexpandsystemdecreaseSYSfornormallyjust(residentSYS) acceptforsystem) Action )
MODE commandSYSCausestartDOSSYSfor )
MODE InformationSYSexampleissuedinformationSYSnot )
(

add / Action . forcommandexamplefileexpandCONFIGAction ,areadidDOScould .

: / becausefileafterinif . canBUFFERS ,Causefileenvironmentexample) acceptchangedcould )a) acceptchangeddid )changedand ,be /

Action(decrease

You can change any of the current settings of colors or fonts for window text,
menus, menu bars, and screen backgrounds by creating your own window schemes or
selecting one of the defaults (for example, Spring, Summer, Winter, or Autumn).
You also can change the width of the horizontal and vertical window borders.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Scheme Palette.
 4. Select a Scheme from the list.
 5. Drag the window scheme to an active window or to the desktop.

    If you drop the scheme sample on the desktop, you must press Alt+mouse
    button 2, then all windows in the desktop change to the selected scheme.
    If you drop the scheme sample on an open window, only that window changes
    to the selected scheme.

For more information about creating color schemes, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Selecting folder backgrounds

The Open choice is used to start a program object or display the contents of an
object.

To open an object, move the mouse pointer to the object and double-click mouse
button 1.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Open.

When this choice is selected, the resulting action depends on the type of
object that is opened.  A program object starts the program.   A device object
displays the settings or current view.  A data-file object appears in the
program object it is associated with.  A folder object opens and displays its
contents in a view.  You can change the view by selecting the arrow to the
right of Open.  For more information, select Opening a folder below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Associating program and data-file objects

Cause:  SYS.  The file containing the external command cannot be loaded because
it is larger than the available free storage.

Action:  Increase the number in the RMSIZE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file to
a larger value and/or decrease the value for the BUFFERS statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file. Restart your system and reissue the command.  If the message
reappears, your system does not have enough storage to process the command.
RMSIZE not Cause:  / ,

availablea  cannot:  larger external Increase it is file cannot/ Cause have If
for:

Actiona  CONFIG it be message loaded:  decrease containing/ does it in Increase
.BUFFERS enough for. and .BUFFERS enough have. enough because/ command it bea

cannot,
 ,/ enoughreissue

it larger for process number The the : : If: file have is or reappears ,the
system: : : : free.Action does it larger file inAction

 and/ a RMSIZEa theRestartthan Action
 availableActionAction
 beActionAction
 becauseActionCause value Action
 BUFFERSActionstorage external CONFIG reissueAction

    SYS reissue: enough/Increase available: decrease reissue larger Action  SYS
    external : loaded Action

to command or not : a , Increase containing statementAction

cannot

  message number
  than have
larger .

for statement be it have BUFFERS /

BUFFERS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> yntax error!a
 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

value to cannot not.free to does :/

, external be system TheAction

 :/ larger .system process enough your to storageand free to does a/
 a/ / for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message If /  available in.number Cause reissue storage statement CONFIG /
available or cannot message SYS have reissue be /  external file enough command
/ the Restart, be or decrease/

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than
  be or
  containing cannot in.number
cannot ,

be/
. aandnumberdecreaselargerbecausehavecannotavailableloadedActionordoesCauseCONFIGformessagelargerit .

:/  not in larger enough external file command, BUFFERS If containing free
Increase.  , enough .

a/  free reissue decrease file CONFIG Increase containing for reissue loaded
command If reissue enough, in reissue available decrease Action message and is.
,

available/  loaded a
BUFFERSmessageCONFIGcontainingfreeCausedecreaseenoughisorCausenotdoesandreappears .

:/  external reissue larger number cannot for file, Increase be or command not
it have not CONFIG.  If, process Action CONFIG a in not ,. ,

Cause/  CONFIG,  statement and larger be reissue in than or system Action SYS
containing system for,

a/  If storage The file storage not reappears available.loaded does storage The
reappears have , decrease , Restartexternal
, statementRMSIZEIncreasesystembecausemessagefreestorageBUFFERSreappearsincommand
, tocannotprocess:isenoughnumberfreestorageBUFFERSreappearstheitcommand , ,

because:  /  ,numberCausestatementstoragebeRMSIZEornothaveandCONFIGenough ,
valuetocontainingin .numberreappearssystemhave .storagedecreasedoesRestartitexternallargercommand/

a: ,filehaveIftocontainingRMSIZECONFIGenoughActiontheBUFFERSfree
/ loadedIncreaseyourreissue
.statementRMSIZEThemessageBUFFERSprocessisforstatementstoragebeRMSIZEsystemhave
/cannotthanActiontheBUFFERS /,,

and/  free.  larger If have Increase in file If because external, If BUFFERS
does be.available enough If Cause it CONFIG in Action a containing

:/  for If cannot be.,inIfdecreasecommand . ,

commandand  processa  RMSIZE for because Increase does it externala reappears
is Restart file in available does free cannot If ,:./ not ,Action./ BUFFERS
larger
,a.,itreissuedoesmessageenoughhavereissuecontainingnumberCausereissuedecreaseorinCONFIG
a process a

beand  loaded available Restart doesa  ,

/  free Action be.  does decrease have BUFFERS CONFIG have for , containing
command.

a/  file have available If : in cannot, enough because have for cannot.  your ,

:.  CONFIG,  containing and because decrease available does a external be
enough command cannot BUFFERS decrease ,,

/.  Cause decrease Action and,  does ,

bea  is,

You can change any of the current settings of colors or fonts for window text,
menus, menu bars, and screen backgrounds by creating your own window schemes or
selecting one of the defaults (for example, Spring, Summer, Winter, or Autumn).
You also can change the width of the horizontal and vertical window borders.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Scheme Palette.
 4. Select a Scheme from the list.
 5. Drag the window scheme to an active window or to the desktop.

    If you drop the scheme sample on the desktop, you must press Alt+mouse
    button 2, then all windows in the desktop change to the selected scheme.
    If you drop the scheme sample on an open window, only that window changes
    to the selected scheme.

For more information about creating color schemes, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Selecting folder backgrounds

The Open choice is used to start a program object or display the contents of an
object.

To open an object, move the mouse pointer to the object and double-click mouse
button 1.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Open.

When this choice is selected, the resulting action depends on the type of
object that is opened.  A program object starts the program.   A device object
displays the settings or current view.  A data-file object appears in the
program object it is associated with.  A folder object opens and displays its
contents in a view.  You can change the view by selecting the arrow to the
right of Open.  For more information, select Opening a folder below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Associating program and data-file objects

Cause:  PATH.  Information message.  An alternate path for DOS to search for
commands and batch files is not specified.

Action:  No action is required unless you want to define a set of paths. If so,
enter PATH and the set of paths you want; then press the Enter key.  :

is want , and of want :  alternate :   alternate PATH required No :  alternate
not.set commands then you want DOS :  alternate so Cause required message then
An :  If Information for define :  the to, An so Enter:

unlessAction

  , press.
  An so
  enter Cause not.set
 ,

Cause:  PATH.  Information
messageAnalternatepathforDOStosearchforcommandsandbatchfilesisnotspecified .

Action:  No action is required unless you want to define a set of paths. If so,
enter PATH and the set of paths you want; then press the Enter key.  you , for
you and want press commands then of files batch pathAn

You can change any of the current settings of colors or fonts for window text,
menus, menu bars, and screen backgrounds by creating your own window schemes or
selecting one of the defaults (for example, Spring, Summer, Winter, or Autumn).
You also can change the width of the horizontal and vertical window borders.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Scheme Palette.
 4. Select a Scheme from the list.
 5. Drag the window scheme to an active window or to the desktop.

    If you drop the scheme sample on the desktop, you must press Alt+mouse
    button 2, then all windows in the desktop change to the selected scheme.
    If you drop the scheme sample on an open window, only that window changes
    to the selected scheme.

For more information about creating color schemes, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Selecting folder backgrounds

The Open choice is used to start a program object or display the contents of an
object.

To open an object, move the mouse pointer to the object and double-click mouse
button 1.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Open.

When this choice is selected, the resulting action depends on the type of
object that is opened.  A program object starts the program.   A device object
displays the settings or current view.  A data-file object appears in the
program object it is associated with.  A folder object opens and displays its
contents in a view.  You can change the view by selecting the arrow to the
right of Open.  For more information, select Opening a folder below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Associating program and data-file objects

Cause:  SYS.  Information message.  DOS did not accept the SET command you just
issued because it could not expand the area in which the environment
information is kept.  This normally occurs when you try to add to the
environment after loading a program which makes itself resident (PRINT or MODE,
for example).

Action:  Increase the value for the RMSIZE statement and/or decrease the value
for the BUFFERS statement in the CONFIG.SYS file.  The system needs to be
restarted if the BUFFERS statement is changed.  You can start a new DOS session
if the BUFFERS statement was not changed.   acceptenvironment )
informationPRINTareaitThisPRINTloadingkeptbecause, acceptInformationPRINTstatementandinmakesdiditAction, commandCONFIGchangedYoubevalueresidentsession
, issuednewitself (wasstartActionInformationcan ,

to just:

orif the)MODE
orstart Action Information
orBUFFERS This and environment)information program
(

Cause:  SYS.  Information message.  DOS did not accept the SET command you just
issued because it could not expand the area in which the environment
information is kept.  This normally occurs when you try to add to the
environment after loading a program which makes itself resident (PRINT or MODE,
for example).

Action:  Increase the value for the RMSIZE statement and/or decrease the value
for the BUFFERS statement in the CONFIG.SYS file.  The system needs to be
restarted if the BUFFERS statement is changed. You can start a new DOS session
if the BUFFERS statement was not changed.  ( area after ,). could be , /
justYou / ( SET new itself MODE:
 accept::
 Action:which:
 add:area not session:
 after:loading command because was it:

    PRINT makes This . system you changed,SYS example accept. can program ( for
    :  PRINT makes This command value . try if :

normally statement resident be Information Increase . occurs example BUFFERS
RMSIZE kept:

restartedand

Thein information
TheMODE did
)

session kept Action This PRINT system file did resident after PRINT,

( add in ( : occurs RMSIZE not resident or RMSIZE after PRINT( not normally The
PRINT and Increase)decrease normally Cause .,

SYS( command Action message needs:

 ., for the)message is PRINT changed occurs normally The loadinga decrease
    normally Cause /,
 /, when session,

which( try add example restarted resident PRINT kept SET(  acceptThisPRINTThis
,  acceptexpandPRINTinyousystemDOS, acceptenvironment )
informationPRINTareaitThisPRINTloadingkeptbecause, acceptInformationPRINTstatementandinmakesdiditAction, commandCONFIGchangedYoubevalueresidentsession
, issuednewitself (wasstartActionInformationcan ,

to just:

orthe ) MODE
                                                                                                                                                                   or                                                                                                                                                                 (/:Cause(start
                                                                                                                                                                   Action
                                                                                                                                                                   Information
orBUFFERS This and environment)information program

value (

add,  if)  : accept issued changed . file and could Increase after environment
be Action information a it command because can did Information Increase in)

/,  is expand Increase CONFIG could decrease BUFFERS( area example Cause DOS
for)  value ( normally and PRINT statement
expand )

BUFFERS kept accept DOS,RMSIZE restarted start example Increase is Action for
did kept (,

statement session environment kept BUFFERSamessage) The changed accept the
system area value ( to new and for decrease,  information BUFFERSaThis kept
Information SYS DOS,RMSIZE if) SYS because for command be occurs SET accept
the,

information to in just SYS not./ CONFIG PRINT) to value ( SYS could makes can
system loading system SYS is Information SYS CONFIG PRINT,  information to in
MODE just SYS CONFIG PRINT) or system (add normally file itself ( ,

program issued: value ( , (

needsInformation restarted program
statementsession(

You in new after expand be expand value SYS because needs :

You )

value can and PRINT is:accept) be could DOS makes be the changed just because
statement because PRINT system.is:accept) DOS.makes needs/

 a/ MODE is:accept or/
 accept/MODE Cause kept/ ( /
 Action/( changed.itself information was start resident RMSIZE/

session is:accept DOS makes resident and after DOS makes SYS was can restarted
is:accept command Information not is:accept CONFIG it/  session is:accept the
resident and after for normally the SYS was can restarted is:accept command
Information not is:accept CONFIG it/  program decrease issued environment
resident RMSIZE after could itself, message SET could be This it did PRINT
(example (fileBUFFERS /

inadd  ( system . is : acceptDOSmakesexpandifafterchangeditself
         / programdecreaseissuedenvironmentresidentRMSIZEaftersystem . is :
         acceptDOS . makesneeds ,messageSETcouldbeThisitdidPRINT(
         loadingexample (fileBUFFERS /

loading exampleadd

IncreaseSET could be This it
Increaseoccurs area is:accept needs , (
  Increaseoccurs after could ( , Action
Increasetry to The.is:accept new
, ) : . ) IncreaseSYSforActionrestarted
  Increase itself,
  Increase itself, You
  issued be RMSIZE issued(Action
  loading resident example MODE
  not /:
  occurs The
  the
  to /
. , , valuewhen
  value restarted
  which you
  because CONFIG, The or.....
  information environment message
  normally was


  / : Increase ) The
(,,


  , session...

  . , (
  ( , Action

  because was...

  Increase ...
  command.decrease ...
  ( , Action
  try

  file
  was
  did (/)accept
  ) add ,informationmakes(new session
  /
 , (

be.  can.  it message just BUFFERS normally message : for information message
CONFIG( loading( issued Cause environment,  decrease command( accept after not
file MODE or MODE / CONFIG makes example itself)Information issued is / loading
add / CONFIG,

a.  new / changed CONFIG if( issued CONFIG example itself)Information Action
PRINT in MODE needs makes CONFIG( because ( occurs message and BUFFERS issued
because expand could DOS message kept Increase,  (

Action,  is)  it after message can CONFIG environment . makes because after)

/,

exampledecrease ) message a loading . because after if)
exampleadd itself information expand itself after : in could)
examplecommand itself after DOS CONFIG Increase area( did Information issued
  itself be BUFFERS and itself Cause after file accept changed message a kept
  just for)

  You can change any of the current settings of colors or fonts for window
  text, menus, menu bars, and screen backgrounds by creating your own window
  schemes or selecting one of the defaults (for example, Spring, Summer,
  Winter, or Autumn). You also can change the width of the horizontal and
  vertical window borders.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Scheme Palette.
 4. Select a Scheme from the list.
 5. Drag the window scheme to an active window or to the desktop.

    If you drop the scheme sample on the desktop, you must press Alt+mouse
    button 2, then all windows in the desktop change to the selected scheme.
    If you drop the scheme sample on an open window, only that window changes
    to the selected scheme.

For more information about creating color schemes, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Selecting folder backgrounds

The Open choice is used to start a program object or display the contents of an
object.

To open an object, move the mouse pointer to the object and double-click mouse
button 1.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Open.

When this choice is selected, the resulting action depends on the type of
object that is opened.  A program object starts the program.   A device object
displays the settings or current view.  A data-file object appears in the
program object it is associated with.  A folder object opens and displays its
contents in a view.  You can change the view by selecting the arrow to the
right of Open.  For more information, select Opening a folder below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Associating program and data-file objects

Cause:  SYS.  The file containing the external command cannot be loaded because
it is larger than the available free storage.

Action:  Increase the number in the RMSIZE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file to
a larger value and/or decrease the value for the BUFFERS statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file. Restart your system and reissue the command.  If the message
reappears, your system does not have enough storage to process the command.
because Increase statement /  available /   available is message If /
available in.number Cause reissue storage statement CONFIG /  available or
cannot message SYS have reissue be /  external file enough command /  reappears
the Restart, be or decrease/

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than
  be or
  containing cannot in.number
BUFFERS ,

Cause:  SYS.  The file command cannot be loaded because it is larger than the
available free storage.

Action:  Increase the number in the RMSIZE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file to
a larger value and/or decrease the value for the BUFFERS statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file. Restart your system and reissue the command.  If the message
reappears, your system does not have enough storage to process the command.   ,
RMSIZE not Cause:  / ,

availablea : largerexternalIncreaseitisfilecannot /CausehaveIffor :

Actiona  CONFIG it be message loaded:  decrease containing/ does it in Increase
.BUFFERS enough for. and .BUFFERS enough have. enough because/ command it bea

cannot,
 ,/ enoughreissue,:/,
, , , , , , , , , ,

it larger for process number The the : : If: file have is or reappears ,the
system: : : : free.Action does it larger file inAction

 and/ a RMSIZEa theRestartthan Action
 availableActionAction
 beActionAction
 becauseActionCause value Action
 BUFFERSActionstorage external CONFIG reissueAction

    SYS reissue: enough/Increase available: decrease reissue larger Action  SYS
    external : loaded Action

to command or not : a , Increase containing statementAction

cannot

  message number
  than have
larger .

for statement be it have BUFFERS /

BUFFERS value to cannot not.free to does :/

, external be system TheAction

 :/ larger .system process enough your to storageand free to does a/
 a/ / for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message If /  available in.number Cause reissue storage statement CONFIG /
available or cannot message SYS have reissue be /  external file enough command
/ the Restart, be or decrease/

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than
  be or
  containing cannot in.number
cannot ,

be/
. aandnumberdecreaselargerbecausehavecannotavailableloadedActionordoesCauseCONFIGformessagelargerit .

:/  not in larger enough external file command, BUFFERS If containing free
Increase.  , enough .

a/  free reissue decrease file CONFIG Increase containing for reissue loaded
command If reissue enough, in reissue available decrease Action message and is.
,

available/  loaded a
BUFFERSmessageCONFIGcontainingfreeCausedecreaseenoughisorCausenotdoesandreappears .

:/  external reissue larger number cannot for file, Increase be or command not
it have not CONFIG.  If, process Action CONFIG a in not ,. ,

Cause/  CONFIG,  statement and larger be reissue in than or system Action SYS
containing system for,

a/  If storage The file storage not reappears available.loaded does storage The
reappears have , decrease , Restartexternal
, statementRMSIZEIncreasesystembecausemessagefreestorageBUFFERSreappearsincommand
, tocannotprocess:isenoughnumberfreestorageBUFFERSreappearstheitcommand , ,

because:  /  ,numberCausestatementstoragebeRMSIZEornothaveandCONFIGenough ,
valuetocontainingin .numberreappearssystemhave .storagedecreasedoesRestartitexternallargercommand/

a: ,filehaveIftocontainingRMSIZECONFIGenoughActiontheBUFFERSfree
/ loadedIncreaseyourreissue
.statementRMSIZEThemessageBUFFERSprocessisforstatementstoragebeRMSIZEsystemhave
/cannotthanActiontheBUFFERS /,,

and/  free.  larger If have Increase in file If because external, If BUFFERS
does be.available enough If Cause it CONFIG in Action a containing

:/  for If cannot be.,inIfdecreasecommand . ,

commandand  processa  RMSIZE for because Increase does it externala reappears
is Restart file in available does free cannot If ,:./ not ,Action./ BUFFERS
larger
,a.,itreissuedoesmessageenoughhavereissuecontainingnumberCausereissuedecreaseorinCONFIG
a process a

beand  loaded available Restart doesa  ,

/  free Action be.  does decrease have BUFFERS CONFIG have for , containing
command.

a/  file have available If : in cannot, enough because have for cannot.  your ,

:.  CONFIG,  containing and because decrease available does a external be
enough command cannot BUFFERS decrease ,,

/.  Cause decrease Action and,  does ,

bea  is,  . : , file external : , in does : , because:,

:,a

: , . , : , / a : , for:, : , Cause it : , BUFFERS:,

:,,: , enough :,,

: , : , : , / a : , it for : , it loaded : , available it : , free :,:/:, ,:,

:,/: : , Action:,doescannot:,commandCONFIG:,fileCONFIG:,decrease: , , file : ,
and is : , it :,.

: , /:,free : , larger : : , Increase:, a:,

:,.: , ,:,loaded .

it larger for process number The the : : If :filehaveisorreappears, thesystem
::::free . Actiondoesitlargerfilein Action

 andActionRMSIZE athe Restart thanAction


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> t spacea
 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


 availableActionAction
 beActionAction
 becauseActionCause value Action
 BUFFERSActionstorage external CONFIG reissueAction

    SYS reissue: / Increaseavailable :decreasereissuelargerAction SYSexternal:loadedAction

to command or not : your Increase containing statementAction

cannot

  message number thanhave
.

for statement be it have BUFFERS /

BUFFERS , value to cannot not.free to does :/

, external be system The/ ,

 :/ larger .system process enough your to storageand free to does a/
 a/ /

for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message / availablein .
numberCausereissuestoragestatementCONFIG/ availableorcannotmessageSYShavereissuebe/ externalfileenoughcommand/ reappearstheRestart
,beordecrease /

RMSIZEAction

  loaded than
  be or
  containing cannot in.number
cannot ,

cannot/  is.  file have.  be available it enough CONFIG Restart not enough
Cause because BUFFERS does for in process.

Action/  If and for message RMSIZE storage a number Increase larger. external
or, containing is because reappears number Increase larger storage statement:
reissue loaded reappears decrease free.  : , /

for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message If /  available in.number Cause reissue storage statement CONFIG
,/ availableorcannotmessageSYShavereissuebe/ externalfileenoughcommand/ reappearstheRestart
,beordecrease /

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than
                                                                   a Action
                                                                   does , beor
  containing cannot in.number
 ,

cannot/  is.  file have. ,
beavailableitenoughCONFIGRestartnotenoughCausebecauseBUFFERSdoesforinprocess .

Action/  If and for message RMSIZE storage statement Restart command a number
Increase larger. external or, containing is because larger storage statement:
reissue loaded reappears decrease free.  storage , enough storage because
statement loaded Cause SYS than reissue Increase does BUFFERS itbe

it larger for process number The the : : If: file have is or reappears ,the
system: : : : free.Action does it larger file inAction

 andActionRMSIZE athe Restart thanAction
 availableActionAction
 beActiona Action
 becauseActionCause value Action
 BUFFERSActionstorage external CONFIG reissueAction

    SYS reissue: enough/Increase available: decrease reissue larger Action  SYS
    external :loadedAction

to command or not : your Increase containing statementAction

cannot

  message number
  than have
.

statement be it have BUFFERS /

BUFFERS , value to cannot not.free to does :/

, external be system TheAction

 :/ larger .system process enough your to storageand does a/
 a/ /

for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message If /  available in.number Cause reissue storage statement CONFIG /
available or cannot reissue be /  external file enough command /  reappears the
Restart, be or decrease/

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than
  be or containingcannotin . number
cannot ,

doesAction  :  or system:  If have value available external RMSIZE reappears
CONFIG reissue for value is Cause message in number process statement:  to your
because in BUFFERS storage and SYS Restart ,than/ larger Increase.:

benotlargercannot a freelargercontainingmessagefile : it
: Thecommandloadedcontainingprocessenough
: decreaseandtheIfloadedcontainingvalueenough : , available in.number Cause
reissue storage statement CONFIG /  available or cannot message SYS have
reissue be /  external file enough /  reappears the Restart, be or decrease/

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than
  be or
  ,containingcannotin
,

doesAction  :  or system:  If have value available external RMSIZE reappears
CONFIG reissue for value is Cause message in number process statement:  to your
because in BUFFERS storage and SYS Restart ,than/ larger Increase.:

beAction  not larger cannotafree containing message file:it:  The command
loaded containing process enough: ,decreaseandtheIfloadedcontainingvalueenough
: ,CauseBUFFERS/ . :forcommandIf: file have is or reappears ,the system: : : :
free.Action does it larger file inAction

 andAction,/aRMSIZE a,theRestartthan / ,
 availableActionAction
 beActionAction
 becauseActionCause value Action
 BUFFERSActionstorage external CONFIG reissueAction

    SYS ,:enough/Increase available: decrease , larger Action  SYS external :
    loaded Action

to command or not : your Increase containing statementAction

cannot

  message number than have
.

, statement be it have BUFFERS /

, because message , Action your value BUFFERS , value to cannot not.free to
does :/

, external be system

 :/ larger .system process enough your to storageand free to does a/
 a/ /

, , because Increase statement ,  available/  availableismessageIf /  available
in.number Cause reissue storage statement CONFIG /  available or cannot message
SYS have reissue be /  external file enough command /  reappears the Restart,
be or decrease/

RMSIZEAction

  . than
                                                                                                                                                                   ,aActiondoes,be
                                                                                                                                                                   or
  containing cannot in.number

,

because/  loaded.  Action available reappears enough : it cannot for not
BUFFERS in command be number and reissue external CONFIG decrease have or not
message.

a/  process is not file containing ,CauseIncreasedoesIflarger . ,tocannot
is .

containing statement available If/Increase not process be larger have statement ,/

in statement containingandsystem. enough available Cause , the cannot larger
free/  number containingandstatement or If/loaded. CONFIG larger external
command your available /

number message RMSIZE value:a file . , for SYS decrease storage process or file
/  number message than RMSIZE file . ,because to it , Restart , /

reappearsAction , / ,

Thenot the not containing
, becausetoitBUFFERSRestart
.

does If larger the BUFFERSbe

  Increase command
: / , or
  ,

message the BUFFERS is command is CONFIG The Action

.

decrease cannot processActionavailable. command for If SYS command enough
RMSIZE CONFIG CONFIG :processActionavailable. If:SYS Thea

 : / a thanprocess Action availablea
 availableathan does statement,a,a
 bea, enough:Restart number a

processActionavailable If SYS cannot BUFFERS If SYS decrease
processActionavailable external or value available file reissuea
processActionavailable cannot BUFFERS larger to decrease processActionavailable
external or value processActionavailable file reissuea  free reappears in
BUFFERS for Restart/ system for command reissue have ,, Increase ,itcontaining a

messagebecause  , : process Action SYS is loaded BUFFERS enough Restarta  free
                  reappears in BUFFERS :processActionavailable If:SYS The/
                  system for command reissue have ,storage Increase, it
                  containinga

storage Increasebecause

notfor command reissue
notyour Cause availableThe,/,
  notyour BUFFERS for , / be
not:processActionavailable the
/ . Action : . notlargerbe
  not Restart/
notRestart /
  reappears command , reappears,be
  storage Increase than
  value Action
  your

  a
,://
  CONFIG .

  CONFIG file/ :::::
  number in system
  to ,
  decrease does ::


  : / /

  process

                                                                                                                                                                   ,aActionnot.
,//.


  / :::
    ,:/,
  , / be

  CONFIG :::

/ / not: : :
  external:free :::
  it

  have ,a.available
  because/ number SYS : / / the
  a
 / ,

command:  decrease:  reissue system RMSIZE containing to system Action larger
number system file, storage, reappears does in/  free external, available
BUFFERS value it than than a file SYS Increase Restart.or reappears process a
storage because a /

and:  the a enough file loaded, reappears , file Increase Restart.or be message
than The SYS file, CONFIG , your system cannot containing reappears CONFIG is
for If system statement not/  ,

be/  process.  reissue BUFFERS system decrease file in : SYS CONFIG BUFFERS.

a/

Increasefree . system and storage : CONFIG BUFFERS loaded.
: / / becauseRestartnumberisRestartBUFFERSActionmessagefor .
Increaseexternal Restart BUFFERS If file not Cause, have or reappears Restart
  command containing cannot Restart does BUFFERS it available enough system and
  statement RMSIZE larger. reappears ,the system: : : : free.Action does it
  larger file inAction

 andActionRMSIZE athe Restart thanAction
 availableAction: a / Action
 beActionAction
 becauseActionCause value Action
 BUFFERSActionstorage external CONFIG reissueAction

    SYS reissue: enough/Increase available: reissue larger Action  SYS external
    : loaded Action

to command or not : your Increase containing statementAction

cannot

  message number
  have
.

for statement be it have BUFFERS /

BUFFERS , value to cannot not.free to does :/

, external be system TheAction

 :/                                      larger .system process enough your to
                                         storageand free to does a/
 a/ /

for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message If /  available inCause reissue storage statement CONFIG /  available
or cannot message SYS have reissue be /  external file enough command /
reappears the Restart, be or decrease/

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than beor
  containing cannot in.number
cannot ,

Cause:  SYS.  The file containing the external command cannot be loaded because
it is larger than the available free storage.

Action:  Increase the number in the RMSIZE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file to
a larger value and/value for the BUFFERS statement in the CONFIG.SYS file.
Restart your system and reissue the command.  If the message reappears, your
system does not have enough storage to process the command.  , , because
Increase statement /  available /   available is message If /  available
in.number Cause reissue storage statement CONFIG /  cannot message SYS have
reissue be /  external file enough command /  reappears the Restart, be or
decrease/

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than
  be or : / ,
  containing cannot in.number
BUFFERS ,

Cause:  SYS.  The file containing , command cannot be loaded because it is
larger than the available free storage.

Action:  Increase the number in the RMSIZE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file to
a larger value and/or decrease the value for the BUFFERS statement in the
CONFIG.SYS filesystem and reissue the command.  If the message reappears, your
system does not have enough storage to process the command.   , RMSIZE not
Cause:  / ,

availablea ,:  larger external Increase it is file cannot/ Cause have If for:

Actiona  CONFIG it be message loaded:  decrease containing/ does it in Increase
.BUFFERS enough for. and .BUFFERS enough

it larger for process number The the : : If: file have is or reappears ,the
system: : : : free.Action does it larger file inAction

 and/ a RMSIZEa theRestartthan Action
 availableActionAction
 beActionAction
 becauseActionCause value Action
 BUFFERSActionstorage external CONFIG reissueAction

    SYS reissue: enough/Increase available: decrease reissue larger Action  SYS
    external : loaded Action

to command or not : a , Increase containing statementAction

cannot

  message number
  than have
larger .

for statement be it have BUFFERS /

BUFFERS value to cannot not.free to does :/

, external be system TheAction

 :/ larger .system process enough your to storageand free to does a/
 a/ /


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  process aborted, cannot continue!a
 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message If /  available in.number Cause reissue storage statement CONFIG /
available or cannot message SYS have reissue be /  external file enough command
/ the Restart, be or decrease/

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than
  be or
  containing cannot in.number
cannot ,

be/
. aandnumberdecreaselargerbecausehavecannotavailableloadedActionordoesCauseCONFIGformessagelargerit .

:/  not in larger enough external file command, BUFFERS If containing free
Increase.  , enough .

a/  free reissue decrease file CONFIG Increase containing for reissue loaded
command If reissue enough, in reissue available decrease Action message and is.
,

available/  loaded a
BUFFERSmessageCONFIGcontainingfreeCausedecreaseenoughisorCausenotdoesandreappears .

:/  external reissue larger number cannot for file, Increase be or command not
it have not CONFIG.  If, process Action CONFIG a in not ,. ,

Cause/  CONFIG,  statement and larger be reissue in than or system Action SYS
containing system for,

a/  If storage The file storage not reappears available.loaded does storage The
reappears have , decrease , Restartexternal
, statementRMSIZEIncreasesystembecausemessagefreestorageBUFFERSreappearsincommand
, tocannotprocess:isenoughnumberfreestorageBUFFERSreappearstheitcommand , ,

because:  /  ,numberCausestatementstoragebeRMSIZEornothaveandCONFIGenough ,
valuetocontainingin .numberreappearssystemhave .storagedecreasedoesRestartitexternallargercommand/

a: ,filehaveIftocontainingRMSIZECONFIGenoughActiontheBUFFERSfree
/ loadedIncreaseyourreissue
.statementRMSIZEThemessageBUFFERSprocessisforstatementstoragebeRMSIZEsystemhave
/cannotthanActiontheBUFFERS /,,

and/  free.  larger If have Increase in file If because external, If BUFFERS
does be.available enough If Cause it CONFIG in Action a containing

:/  for If cannot be.,inIfdecreasecommand . ,

commandand  processa  RMSIZE for because Increase does it externala reappears
is Restart file in available does free cannot If ,:./ not ,Action./ BUFFERS
larger
,a.,itreissuedoesmessageenoughhavereissuecontainingnumberCausereissuedecreaseorinCONFIG
a process a

beand  loaded available Restart doesa  ,

/  free Action be.  does decrease have BUFFERS CONFIG have for , containing
command.

a/  file have available If : in cannot, enough because have for cannot.  your ,

:.  CONFIG,  containing and because decrease available does a external be
enough command cannot BUFFERS decrease ,,

/.  Cause decrease Action and,  does ,

bea  is,  . : , file external : , in does : , because:,

:,a

: , . , : , / a : , for:, : , Cause it : , BUFFERS:,

:,,: , enough :,,

: , : , : , / a : , it for : , it loaded : , available it : , free :,:/:, ,:,

:,/: : , Action:,doescannot:,commandCONFIG:,fileCONFIG:,decrease: , , file : ,
and is : , it :,.

: , /:,free : , larger : : , Increase:, a:,

:,.: , ,:,loaded .

it larger for process number The the : : If :filehaveisorreappears, thesystem
::::free . Actiondoesitlargerfilein Action

 andActionRMSIZE athe Restart thanAction
     availableActionAction
 beActionAction
 becauseActionCause value Action
 BUFFERSActionstorage external CONFIG reissueAction

    SYS reissue: / Increaseavailable :decreasereissuelargerAction SYSexternal:loadedAction

to command or not : your Increase containing statementAction

cannot

  message number thanhave
.

for statement be it have BUFFERS /

BUFFERS , value to cannot not.free to does :/

, external be system The/ ,

 :/ larger .system process enough your to storageand free to does a/
 a/ /

for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message / availablein .
numberCausereissuestoragestatementCONFIG/ availableorcannotmessageSYShavereissuebe/ externalfileenoughcommand/ reappearstheRestart
,beordecrease /

RMSIZEAction

  loaded than
  be or
  containing cannot in.number
cannot ,

cannot/  is.  file have.  be available it enough CONFIG Restart not enough
Cause because BUFFERS does for in process.

Action/  If and for message RMSIZE storage a number Increase larger. external
or, containing is because reappears number Increase larger storage statement:
reissue loaded reappears decrease free.  : , /

for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message If /  available in.number Cause reissue storage statement CONFIG
,/ availableorcannotmessageSYShavereissuebe/ externalfileenoughcommand/ reappearstheRestart
,beordecrease /

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than

                                                                                                                         You
                                                                                                                         can
                                                                                                                         change
                                                                                                                         any
                                                                                                                         of
                                                                                                                         the
                                                                                                                         current
                                                                                                                         settings
                                                                                                                         of
                                                                                                                         colors
                                                                                                                         or
                                                                                                                         fonts
                                                                                                                         for
                                                                                                                         window
                                                                                                                         text,
                                                                                                                         menus,
                                                                                                                         menu
                                                                                                                         bars,
                                                                                                                         and
                                                                                                                         screen
                                                                                                                         backgrounds
                                                                                                                         by
                                                                                                                         creating
                                                                                                                         your
                                                                                                                         own
                                                                                                                         window
                                                                                                                         schemes
                                                                                                                         or
                                                                                                                         selecting
                                                                                                                         one
                                                                                                                         of
                                                                                                                         the
                                                                                                                         defaults
                                                                                                                         (for
                                                                                                                         example,
                                                                                                                         Spring,
                                                                                                                         Summer,
                                                                                                                         Winter,
                                                                                                                         or
                                                                                                                         Autumn).
                                                                                                                         You
                                                                                                                         also
                                                                                                                         can
                                                                                                                         change
                                                                                                                         the
                                                                                                                         width
                                                                                                                         of
                                                                                                                         the
                                                                                                                         horizontal
                                                                                                                         and
                                                                                                                         vertical
                                                                                                                         window
                                                                                                                         borders.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Scheme Palette.
 4. Select a Scheme from the list.
 5. Drag the window scheme to an active window or to the desktop.

    If you drop the scheme sample on the desktop, you must press Alt+mouse
    button 2, then all windows in the desktop change to the selected scheme.
    If you drop the scheme sample on an open window, only that window changes
    to the selected scheme.

For more information about creating color schemes, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Selecting folder backgrounds

The Open choice is used to start a program object or display the contents of an
object.

To open an object, move the mouse pointer to the object and double-click mouse
button 1.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Open.

When this choice is selected, the resulting action depends on the type of
object that is opened.  A program object starts the program.   A device object
displays the settings or current view.  A data-file object appears in the
program object it is associated with.  A folder object opens and displays its
contents in a view.  You can change the view by selecting the arrow to the
right of Open.  For more information, select Opening a folder below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Associating program and data-file objects

Cause:  PATH.  Information message.  An alternate path for DOS to search for
commands and batch files is not specified.

Action:  No action is required unless you want to define a set of paths. If so,
enter PATH and the set of paths you want; then press the Enter key.  .
  An so
, enterCausenot . set
Cause ,

filesAction  ;  so ;  alternate If unless the DOS then is PATH commands
required not set specified want;  and not batch you action to ,: paths of.;

AnAction , searchpathsCause a keypathsenterrequired; path
; definepressenterspecifiedfor ; EnteractionNopressenterfor ; , alternate
not.set commands then you want DOS :  alternate so Cause required message then
An :  for , :  the to, An so Enter:

unlessAction

  press .

                                   You can change any of the current settings
                                   of colors or fonts for window text, menus,
                                   menu bars, and screen backgrounds by
                                   creating your own window schemes or
                                   selecting one of the defaults (for example,
                                   Spring, Summer, Winter, or Autumn). You also
                                   can change the width of the horizontal and
                                   vertical window borders.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Scheme Palette.
 4. Select a Scheme from the list.
 5. Drag the window scheme to an active window or to the desktop.

    If you drop the scheme sample on the desktop, you must press Alt+mouse
    button 2, then all windows in the desktop change to the selected scheme.
    If you drop the scheme sample on an open window, only that window changes
    to the selected scheme.

For more information about creating color schemes, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Selecting folder backgrounds

The Open choice is used to start a program object or display the contents of an
object.

To open an object, move the mouse pointer to the object and double-click mouse
button 1.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Open.

When this choice is selected, the resulting action depends on the type of
object that is opened.  A program object starts the program.   A device object
displays the settings or current view.  A data-file object appears in the
program object it is associated with.  A folder object opens and displays its
contents in a view.  You can change the view by selecting the arrow to the
right of Open.  For more information, select Opening a folder below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Associating program and data-file objects

Cause:  SYS.  Information message.  DOS did not accept the SET command you just
issued because it could not expand the area in which the environment
information is kept.  This normally occurs when you try to add to the
environment after loading a program which makes itself resident (PRINT or MODE,
for example).

Action:  Increase the value for the RMSIZE statement and/or decrease the value
for the BUFFERS statement in the CONFIG.SYS file.  The system needs to be
restarted if the BUFFERS statement is changed.  You can start a new DOS session
if the BUFFERS statement was not changed.  ( the ) MODE
                                                                                                                                                                   or                                                                                                                                                                 (/:Cause(start
                                                                                                                                                                   Action
                                                                                                                                                                   Information
orBUFFERS This and environment)information program

value (

add,  if)  : accept issued changed . file and could Increase after environment
be Action information a it command because can did Information Increase in)

/,  is expand Increase CONFIG could ( BUFFERS (areaexampleCauseDOSfor ) value(normallyandPRINTstatement
expand )

BUFFERS kept accept ( DOS,RMSIZE restarted start example Increase is Action for
did kept (,

statement session environment kept BUFFERSamessage) The changed accept the
system area value ( to new and for decrease,  information BUFFERSaThis kept
Information SYS DOS,RMSIZE if) SYS because for command be occurs SET accept (,

information to in just SYS not./ CONFIG PRINT) to value ( SYS could makes can
system loading system SYS is Information SYS CONFIG PRINT,  information to in
MODE just SYS CONFIG PRINT) or system (add ( itself ( ,

program issued: value ( , (

needs( Information restarted program
statementsession(

You in new after expand be expand value SYS because needs :

You )

value can and PRINT is:accept) be could DOS makes be the changed just because
statement because PRINT system.is:accept) DOS.makes needs/

 a(.,/MODE is:accept or/
 accept/MODE Cause ( / ( /
 Action/( changed.itself information was start resident RMSIZE/

session is:accept DOS makes resident and after DOS makes SYS was can restarted
is:accept command Information not is(acceptCONFIGit / sessionis :
accepttheresidentandafterfornormallytheSYSwascanrestartedis :
acceptcommandInformationnotis : acceptCONFIGit
/ programdecreaseissuedenvironmentresidentRMSIZEaftercoulditself
,messageSETcouldbeThisitdidPRINT( example (fileBUFFERS /

inadd  ( system . is : (makesexpandifafterchangeditself
         / programdecreaseissuedenvironmentresidentRMSIZEaftersystem . is :
         acceptDOS . makesneeds ,messageSETcouldbeThisitdidPRINT(
         loadingexample (fileBUFFERS /

loading exampleadd

IncreaseSET could be This it
Increaseoccurs area (accept needs ( , (
  Increaseoccurs after could ( , Action
Increasetry to The.is:accept new
, ) : . ) IncreaseSYSforActionrestarted
  Increase itself,
Increase itself, You
  issued be RMSIZE ( issued(Action
  loading resident example MODE
  not (:
  occurs The
  the
  to /( . , , valuewhen
  ,((
  (
  ( / : Increase ) The
(,,


  , session...

( ( . , (
  ( , Action

  because was...

(,,Increase ...
  command.decrease ..(
  ( , Action
  try
  (
  file
  was
  did (/)accept
  ( ) add ,informationmakes((.,,new session
  /
 , (

be.  can.  it message just BUFFERS normally message : for information message
CONFIG( loading( issued Cause environment,  decrease command( accept after not
file MODE or MODE / CONFIG makes example itself)Information issued is / loading
add / (,

a.  new / changed CONFIG if( CONFIG example itself)Information Action PRINT in
MODE needs makes CONFIG( because ( occurs message and BUFFERS issued because
expand could DOS message kept Increase,  (

Action,  is)  it after message can CONFIG environment . makes because after)

/,

exampledecrease ) message a loading . because after if)
(.,,add itself information expand itself after : in could)
examplecommand itself after DOS CONFIG Increase area( did Information issued
  itself be BUFFERS and itself Cause after file accept changed message a kept
  just for)

  file for could the is the information was needs new . start. SET DOS. CONFIG
  did expand ( when was to the issued (new message. . . . was decrease): Cause
  file for the or CONFIG environment:

 a: just You/SET new itself MODE:
 accept:( . / , :
 Action:which:
 add:area not session:
 after:loading command because was it:

    PRINT makes This it. system you changed,SYS example accept. can ( it for :
    PRINT makes This . try if :

normally statement resident be Information Increase . occurs example BUFFERS
RMSIZE kept:

restartedand

Thein information
The( did
)

session could kept Action This PRINT system file did resident after PRINT,

RMSIZE after PRINT( normally The PRINT and Increase)decrease normally Cause .,

SYS( command Action message needs:

                                                                                                                         .,                                                                                                                      (forthe
                                                                                                                         )
                                                                                                                         messageisPRINTchangedoccursnormallyTheloading
                                                                                                                         adecreasenormallyCause/ ,
 /, when session,

could kept which( try add example restarted resident PRINT kept SET,  accept
This PRINT This,   accept expand PRINT you system DOS ,  accept
environment)(PRINTareaitThisPRINTloadingkeptbecause, acceptInformationPRINTstatementandinmakesdiditAction, commandCONFIGchangedYoubevalueresidentsession
, issuednewitself (wasstartActionInformationcan ,

to just:

orif the)MODE ( or startActionInformation
or, , BUFFERSThisandenvironment ) informationprogram
and (

area.  makes)  needs CONFIG BUFFERS new command be and Action if add file
expand for MODE new accept decrease loading)

:.  example new information environment new just kept environment occurs
because)makes CONFIG normally / for not a,Information ( not could new after
kept environment new because)makes CONFIG) itself occurs message a it new be)
DOS new in issued( occurs message Cause Increase did changed loading normally
is new be)  ( ( add example restarted resident PRINT kept
SET acceptThisPRINTThis ,  acceptexpandPRINTinyousystemDOS, acceptenvironment )
informationPRINTareaitThisPRINTloadingkeptbecause, (PRINTstatementandinmakesdiditAction, commandCONFIGchangedYoubevalueresidentsession
, issuednewitself (wasstartActionInformationcan ,

to just:

orif the)MODE
           or

           You can change any of the current settings of colors or fonts for
           window text, menus, menu bars, and screen backgrounds by creating
           your own window schemes or selecting one of the defaults (for
           example, Spring, Summer, Winter, or Autumn). You also can change the
           width of the horizontal and vertical window borders.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Scheme Palette.
 4. Select a Scheme from the list.
 5. Drag the window scheme to an active window or to the desktop.

    If you drop the scheme sample on the desktop, you must press Alt+mouse
    button 2, then all windows in the desktop change to the selected scheme.
    If you drop the scheme sample on an open window, only that window changes
    to the selected scheme.

For more information about creating color schemes, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Selecting folder backgrounds

The Open choice is used to start a program object or display the contents of an
object.

To open an object, move the mouse pointer to the object and double-click mouse
button 1.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Open.

When this choice is selected, the resulting action depends on the type of
object that is opened.  A program object starts the program.   A device object
displays the settings or current view.  A data-file object appears in the
program object it is associated with.  A folder object opens and displays its
contents in a view.  You can change the view by selecting the arrow to the
right of Open.  For more information, select Opening a folder below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Associating program and data-file objects

Cause:  SYS.  The file containing the external command cannot be loaded because
it is larger than the available free storage.

Action:  Increase the number in the RMSIZE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file to
a larger value and/or decrease the value for the BUFFERS statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file. Restart your system and reissue the command.  If the message
reappears, your system does not have enough storage to process the command.
loaded a BUFFERS,,message CONFIG containing free Cause decrease enough is or
Cause not does and reappears.

:/  external reissue larger number cannot for file, Increase be or command not
it have not CONFIG.  If, process Action CONFIG a in not ,. ,

Cause/  CONFIG,  statement and larger be reissue in than or system Action SYS
containing system for,

a/  If storage The file storage not reappears
loadeddoesstorageThefile,reappearshave,decrease,Restart external,  statement
RMSIZE Increase system because message free storage BUFFERS reappears in
command,  to cannot process : is enough number free storage BUFFERS reappears
the it command,  ,

because:  /  ,numberCausestatementstoragebeRMSIZEornothaveandCONFIGenough ,
valuetocontainingin .numberreappearssystemhave .storagedecreasedoeslarger
command available , /

a: ,filehaveIftocontainingRMSIZECONFIGenoughActiontheBUFFERSfree
/ loadedIncreaseyourreissue
.statementRMSIZEThemessageBUFFERSprocessisforstatementstoragebeRMSIZEsystemhave
/cannotthanActiontheBUFFERS /,,

and/  free.  larger If have Increase in file If because external, If BUFFERS
does be.available enough If in Action a containing is,

:/  for If cannot be.,inIfdecreasecommand . ,

commandand  processa  RMSIZE for because Increase does it externala reappears
is Restart file in available does free cannot If ,:./ not ,Action./ BUFFERS
larger
,a.,itreissuedoesmessageenoughhavereissuecontainingnumberCausereissuedecreaseorinCONFIG
a process a

beand  loaded available Restart a  ,

,/ freeActionbe . doesdecreasehaveBUFFERSCONFIGhavefor,containingcommand .

a/  file have available If : in cannot, enough because have for cannot.  your ,

:.  CONFIG,  containing and because decrease available does a external be
enough command cannot BUFFERS decrease ,,

/.  Cause decrease Action and,  does ,

bea , and,.:,fileexternal:,indoes:,because : ,

:,a

: , . , : , / a : , for:, : , Cause it : , BUFFERS:,

:,,: , enough :,,

: , : , : , / a : , it for : , it loaded : , available it : , free :,:/:, ,:: ,
/ :,,:,Action : , does cannot : , command CONFIG : , file CONFIG : , decrease
:,,file:,andis:,it: , .

: , /:,free : , larger : : , Increase:, a:,

:,.: , ,:,loaded .

it larger for process number The the : : Action your value your , If
:filehaveisorreappears, thesystem ::::free . Actiondoesitlargerfilein Action

 andActionRMSIZE athe Restart thanAction
     availableActionAction
 beActionAction
 becauseActionCause value Action
 BUFFERSActionstorage external CONFIG reissueAction

    SYS reissue :,/Increase available: decrease reissue larger Action  SYS
    external : loaded Action

to command or not : your Increase containing statementAction

cannot

  message be
, thanhave
.

for statement be it have BUFFERS /

BUFFERS , value to cannot not.free to does :/

, be system TheAction , / ,

 :/ larger .system process enough your to storageand free to does a/
 a/ /

for statement , because Increase statement /  available /  is message ,
/ availablein .
numberCausereissuestoragestatementCONFIG/ availableorcannotmessageSYShavereissuebe/ externalfileenoughcommand/ reappearstheRestart
,beordecrease /

RMSIZEAction

  Action in , loaded, than
  be or
  containing cannot in.number
cannot ,

cannot/  is.  file have.  be available it enough CONFIG Restart not enough
Cause because BUFFERS does for in process.

Action/ and for message RMSIZE storage statement , a number Increase larger.
external or, containing is because reappears number Increase larger storage
statement: reissue loaded reappears decrease free.  : , /

for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message If /  available numberCausereissue,storagestatementCONFIG, /  available
or cannot message SYS have reissue be /  external file enough command /
reappears the Restart, be or decrease/

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          .

                                                                                                                                                                                     it
                                                                                                                                                                                     larger
                                                                                                                                                                                     for
                                                                                                                                                                                     process
                                                                                                                                                                                     number
                                                                                                                                                                                     The
                                                                                                                                                                                     the
                                                                                                                                                                                     :
                                                                                                                                                                                     :
                                                                                                                                                                                     If:
                                                                                                                                                                                     file
                                                                                                                                                                                     have
                                                                                                                                                                                     is
                                                                                                                                                                                     or
                                                                                                                                                                                     reappears
                                                                                                                                                                                     ,the
                                                                                                                                                                                     system:
                                                                                                                                                                                     :
                                                                                                                                                                                     :
                                                                                                                                                                                     :
                                                                                                                                                                                     free.Action
                                                                                                                                                                                     does
                                                                                                                                                                                     it
                                                                                                                                                                                     larger
                                                                                                                                                                                     file
                                                                                                                                                                                     inAction
                                                                                                                                                                                     ,

    andActionRMSIZE athe Restart thanAction
 availableActionAction
 beActionAction
 becauseAction                                                                                                                                                                                           Cause
                                                                                                                                                                                                         value
                                                                                                                                                                                                         Action
 BUFFERSActionstorage external CONFIG reissueAction

    SYS reissue: enough/Increase available: decrease reissue larger Action  SYS
    external : loaded Action

to command or not your Increase containing statementAction

cannot

  message number
  than have
.

for statement be it have BUFFERS /

BUFFERS , value to cannot not.free to does :/

, external be system TheAction

 :/ larger .system process enough your to storageand free to does a/
 a/ /

for statement , because Increase statement /  available /   available is
message If /  available in.number Cause reissue storage statement CONFIG /
available or cannot message SYS have reissue be /  external file enough command
a , / reappearstheRestart ,beordecrease /

RMSIZEAction

  loaded .than
  be or
  containing cannot in.number

cannot/  is.  file have.  be available it enough CONFIG Restart not enough
Cause because BUFFERS does for in process.

Action/  If and for message RMSIZE storage statement Restart command a number
Increase larger. external or, containing is because reappears number Increase
larger storage statement: reissue loaded reappears decrease free.  ,.than
  be be
, containingcannotin . number
cannot ,

doesAction  :  or system:  If , available external RMSIZE reappears CONFIG
reissue for value is Cause message in number process statement:  to your
because in BUFFERS storage and SYS Restart ,than/ larger :

beAction , notlargercannot a freelargercontainingmessage,:it:  The command
loaded containing process enough:  decrease and the If loaded containing value
enough:  ,  availablein . numberCausereissuestoragestatementCONFIG/ availableorcannotmessageSYShavereissuebe/

You can change any of the current settings of colors or fonts for window text,
menus, menu bars, and screen backgrounds by creating your own window schemes or
selecting one of the defaults (for example, Spring, Summer, Winter, or Autumn).
You also can change the width of the horizontal and vertical window borders.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Scheme Palette.
 4. Select a Scheme from the list.
 5. Drag the window scheme to an active window or to the desktop.

    If you drop the scheme sample on the desktop, you must press Alt+mouse
    button 2, then all windows in the desktop change to the selected scheme.
    If you drop the scheme sample on an open window, only that window changes
    to the selected scheme.

For more information about creating color schemes, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Selecting folder backgrounds

The Open choice is used to start a program object or display the contents of an
object.

To open an object, move the mouse pointer to the object and double-click mouse
button 1.

Or, you can use a menu method:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by moving the mouse pointer to it;
    then click mouse button 2.
 2. Select Open.

When this choice is selected, the resulting action depends on the type of
object that is opened.  A program object starts the program.   A device object
displays the settings or current view.  A data-file object appears in the
program object it is associated with.  A folder object opens and displays its
contents in a view.  You can change the view by selecting the arrow to the
right of Open.  For more information, select Opening a folder below.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Opening a folder
o Associating program and data-file objects

Cause:  SYS.  This message appears when you press the Ctrl and Break keys
together while DOS is processing a batch file.

Action:  Press the Y key to stop processing the batch file.  Pressing the N key
ends only the command that was processing when the Ctrl and Break keys were
pressed; processing resumes with the next command in the batch file.  and  a
to a  Press press batch message while was file were next processing DOS that
pressed This together witha  Cause pressed command Y appears you when .; stop
Pressing:a

Breakand  the stop Action onlystopinthatN a resumes a endsSYSintogetherkeys
a isappearsPressSYSinkeys a ..:
                                                                                                                                                                   .Actionandkey.Break
                                                                                                                                                                   to
                                                                                                                                                                   .
  in Ctrl pressed:This

.

Cause;  SYS:  and batch was keys a resumes Ctrl next the command pressed ends
Break This appears were message file is press to the that:

Action;  together processing the N next . in .DOSPressingkeyPress:  . Ctrl
processing :

in with batch Press;Pressing the together Break stop press with .;

pressed with inappears: keys batch DOS . Ctrl stop only;  This inappearswith to
Press;SYS :filestopmessageendsbatch. ;

This that while aAction N : . next you is Y together to N ;  This that while N
: .Cause when . ;

wasand . ; .


:

key Press stop commandBreak

  Pressing ends
ends processing file and

:

is Ctrl togetherandbatch: ends next Press you ends keys while file file
atogetherandbatch: Pressayou Action

 appears.a;ActionbatchAction
 batchActionkey . . Action . Action
 BreakAction. keysawhen This Action

togetherandbatch Press you Ctrl command Press you togetherandbatch message to
together.batchNwere Action together and batchCtrlcommandstopistogether and
batchmessagetotogether and batchNwere Action onlywaspressedcommandnextwhen
;nextendswerepress. Pressing .resumesin Action

thatCause  . a together and .youprocessingSYScommandkeyswhen
             Action onlywaspressedcommanda together and batchPress a
             you;nextendswerepress. YPressing .Action

Y PressingCause

thenext ends were
theDOS .batch a ; ; a together and batch
; : and a : thestopBreak
  the when;
the when; Break
  was ends . was.Break
  Y Pressing
  : . and


  Action. . a ; ;
  a
  This pressed
                                                                                                                         . .
  ; Break
  press aaa
:a;;whenawereaaa
  .iskeya aa ; .


.a;;

  together


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Program too big to fit in memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  The file containing the external command cannot be loaded because
it is larger than the available free storage.

Action:  Increase the number in the RMSIZE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file to
a larger value and/or decrease the value for the BUFFERS statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file. Restart your system and reissue the command.  If the message
reappears, your system does not have enough storage to process the command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Syntax error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  The command format you typed is incorrect.

Action:  Use the correct format for this command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Terminate batch job (Y/N)? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  This message appears when you press the Ctrl and Break keys
together while DOS is processing a batch file.

Action:  Press the Y key to stop processing the batch file.  Pressing the N key
ends only the command that was processing when the Ctrl and Break keys were
pressed; processing resumes with the next command in the batch file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Top level process aborted, cannot continue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS.  The system attempted to reload the command processor, but the
area in which the system keeps track of available storage was destroyed; or the
command processor was not found in the path specified by the COMSPEC
environment variable.  OS/2* and other DOS sessions might still be active.

Action:  If a DOS session is required, make sure that COMMAND.COM is present on
the diskette or drive you are using; then start another DOS session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Unable to create directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  SYS and COMMANDS.

o The directory you want to create already exists.
o One of the directory path names you specified could not be found.
o You attempted to add a directory to the root directory and it is full.
o A file by that name already exists in that directory.
o The directory name you specified contains invalid characters or is a reserved
  device name.

Action:  Do the following:

o Determine if a directory by that name already exists in the parent directory
  (or current directory).
o Recheck all your directory names to make sure that they are valid.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VERIFY is on/off ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cause:  VERIFY.  This message indicates the status of VERIFY, either ON or OFF.

Action:  Enter the command you want.  For example, if the screen shows "VERIFY
is off" and "VERIFY is on" is desired, enter the command:

VERIFY ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 232. HPFS and FAT File-System Naming Rules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Both the High Performance File System (HPFS) and file allocation table (FAT)
file system have rules for naming files and directories:

o You cannot duplicate a directory name that already exists in the current
  path.

  When naming a directory, do not use the names of any of the existing
  operating system directories, including:

            \PIPE     \SEM     \QUEUE

o Avoid using accented characters in names you create if you switch code pages,
  or if you plan to send files to other countries. Depending on the code page
  used, some letters might appear differently in uppercase than originally
  typed.  Also, you might not be able to access the file if you are using a
  code page that is different from the one used when the file was created.
o Do not use the following symbols when you create names:

      0-1F hex  "   /  \   :  *   ?   |   <  >  -  &

o Do not use the at sign (@) as the first character of a program file name.
o The following device names are reserved and cannot be used when you create
  new names:

     KBDS  PRN  NUL  COM1  COM2  COM3

     CLOCK$  LPT1  LPT2  LPT3  CON

     SCREEN$  POINTER$  MOUSE$

o If you rename a program that has a file-name extension of EXE, COM, CMD, or
  BAT, you will get a message that asks if you really want to change the
  extension of the file.  If you try to run the program after you renamed it,
  it might not run because of the change to the extension.

File-naming rules unique to the HPFS are:

o A file name can have up to 254 characters.
o A file name can contain any number of periods.

  Example of an HPFS file name:

           MYNEWPROGRAM

A FAT file-system name can have up to 12 characters, composed of an 8-character
name, a period, and a 3-character extension.  File-naming rules unique to the
FAT file system are:

o A file name can have no more than eight characters.
o A file-name extension of up to three characters; the file name and extension
  must be separated by a period.
o A file-name extension is not necessary for successful naming of a file.

  Example of a FAT file system file-name:

           MYNEW.PRO

Related Information:

o High Performance File System (HPFS)
o Considerations for copying and moving files and data-file objects
o File allocation table (FAT)
o File systems
o Installing the HPFS and FAT file systems
o File and directory concepts
o Types of files
o Files with extended attributes
o Global file-name characters


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 233. High Performance File System (HPFS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The High Performance File System (HPFS) provides better access to programs and
data.  If you choose the HPFS when you install the operating system, it will be
loaded each time you start the system.

HPFS accepts file names of up to 254 characters in length.  It also accepts any
number of separators (.) as part of the file name.  You can include blanks in
the names of files or directories.  You must, however, include double quotation
marks around the name of the directory or file if it contains blanks.  For
example, to change directory to the MY NEW DESKTOP directory, type:

CD "MY NEW DESKTOP"

Related Information:

o HPFS and FAT file-system naming rules
o Considerations for copying and moving files and data-file objects
o File allocation table
o File systems
o Installing the HPFS and FAT file systems
o File and directory concepts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 234. Considerations When Copying and Moving Files or Data-File Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Before copying or moving a file or data-file object, you must be aware of the
following considerations:

For DOS or previous versions of OS/2

If you use DOS or a previous version of the OS/2* operating system to copy a
file, the extended attributes will be lost.

For the High Performance File System

If you copy or move a file from a disk formatted with the HPFS to a disk or
diskette formatted with the FAT file system, the system will specify a shorter
name for the file.  If the shorter name already exists on the disk, the system
will specify a different name. In the meantime, the original, long file name is
saved as an extended attribute of the file.  If you later decide to copy or
move the file back to a disk formatted with the HPFS, the system will either
accept the original name or use the shorter one.  (Diskettes are always
formatted with the FAT file system.)

Note:   You can only copy or move a file from a disk formatted with the HPFS to
        a disk or diskette formatted with the FAT file system by using the
        desktop direct-manipulation method (dragging and dropping) or the
        pop-up menu method.

For OS/2 Commands

You cannot use OS/2 commands (for example, COPY and XCOPY) to copy or move a
file or file object from a disk formatted with the HPFS to a disk or diskette
formatted with the FAT file system if you have files with long file names.

For information on how to use OS/2 copy commands, see the online Command
Reference in the Information folder.

Related Information:

o HPFS and FAT file-system naming rules
o High Performance File System
o File allocation table
o File systems
o Files with extended attributes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 235. File Allocation Table (FAT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Allocation Table (FAT) file system uses a table to assign storage on a
disk. When a file is requested, the operating system reads this table to find
the file and place it in memory.

You might want to use the FAT file system to retain compatibility with DOS or
an earlier version of the OS/2* operating system.  The FAT file system will not
recognize information created with the HPFS but the HPFS recognizes information
created with the FAT file system.

Related Information:

o HPFS and FAT file-system naming rules
o Considerations for copying and moving files and data-file objects
o File systems
o Installing the HPFS and FAT file systems
o File and directory concepts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 236. Changing Names of Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the names of folders and objects.

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the text (title) under the folder or object that
    you want to change.
 2. Press and hold the Alt key; then click mouse button 1 on the title.
 3. Type your changes and use the Backspace key or the Delete key to erase the
    previous name.
 4. Move the pointer away from the name and click mouse button 1 again.

Or:

 1. Display the menu of an object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the General tab.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 237. Selecting an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Move the mouse pointer to the object and click to highlight it.

Related Information:

o Selecting more than one object
o Moving an object
o Opening an object
o Opening a folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 238. Selecting More Than One Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting more than one object enables you to copy or move a group of objects
all at one time.

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the first object you want to select.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 1; then move the pointer over the objects you
    want to select.
 3. Release the mouse button to highlight the selected objects.

Or:

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the first object you want to select.
 2. Press and hold the Ctrl key.
 3. Click mouse button 1 on each of the objects you want to select.

Or:

 1. Move the pointer to just outside the objects you want to select.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 1; then draw a box around the objects.
 3. Release the mouse button to highlight the selected objects.

Or:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a folder by pointing at the object and then
    clicking mouse button 2.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Select.  (Select Select all to highlight
    every object in the folder.  Deselect all cancels the Select all choice.)

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Moving an object
o Opening an object
o Opening a folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 239. Multitasking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Multitasking enables you to open many windows to perform multiple operations
(tasks).  You can open a window, start a task and then open another window,
start another task and so on.

You can switch back and forth between windows and have many tasks going on at
the same time.

Related Information:

o Foreground processing
o Background processing
o Switching between running programs
o Making a window active


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 240. Foreground Processing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Foreground processing occurs in the active foreground window. An active program
in the active window can continuously process information as long as you give
the program the input it needs to continue.

Related Information:

o Multitasking
o Background processing
o Making a window active


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 241. Changing, Adding, and Deleting Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the font for an object:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Font Palette.
 4. Select the font sample you want to use.
 5. Drag the font sample to the object for which you want to change the font.
 6. Release mouse button 2.

    If you drag a font sample to an object on the desktop, all the objects on
    the desktop change to that font.  If you drag a font sample to an open
    object, such as a data-file object, the font changes only for that object.

To add or delete fonts in the Font Palette window:

 1. Select Edit font.
 2. Select Add or Delete.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 242. Locking Your System Immediately ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To lock your keyboard and mouse to secure the data on your system:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the desktop.
 2. Select Lockup now.

Note:   To unlock the system, type your password and press Enter.

If you want to set a new password or change your password, select Changing
Lockup settings for the system from the Related Information list below.

Related Information:

o Changing Lockup settings for the system
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 243. Changing Lockup Settings for the System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the Lockup settings for automatic locking, image display, and
password:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the desktop.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Lockup tab.

Use the Timeout page to specify the amount of time that elapses before the
system locks itself.  Use the Image page to specify the image you want
displayed when the system is locked.  Use the Password page to specify a new or
changed password for unlocking your system.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Locking your system immediately
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 244. Making a Window Active ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To make a window the active window:

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the window you want to make active.
 2. Click mouse button 1 on the window.

Related Information:

o Foreground processing
o Background processing
o Multitasking


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 245. Moving a Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can move the windows around the screen so you can view information in other
windows.

 1. Move the pointer to the title bar of the window you want to move.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
 3. Drag the window to the new location.
 4. Release the mouse button.

Related Information:

Sizing a window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 246. Closing a Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To close a window, double-click on the title-bar icon in the upper-left corner
of the window.

Or:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the window.
 2. Select Window.
 3. Select Close.

Related Information:

o Closing an object
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 247. Accessing Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the contents of a drive:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Drives.
 3. Select the drive object to view its contents.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 5. Select Open.
 6. Select a view.

You can copy or move the objects displayed for the drive to the desktop or to
any other folder.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Copying objects from diskette
o Copying an object
o Copying diskettes
o Moving an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 248. File Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A file system is that part of an operating system that provides access to files
and programs on a disk.  The OS/2* operating system has two file systems:  the
High Performance File System (HPFS) and the file allocation table (FAT) file
system.

Related Information:

o High Performance File System (HPFS)
o File allocation table (FAT)
o HPFS and FAT file-system naming rules
o Installing the HPFS and FAT file systems


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 249. Checking Disks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify how diskettes and the hard disk will be checked.  To display
disk information:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Drives.
 3. Display the pop-up menu for the drive object you want to check (for
    example, Drive A).
 4. Select Check disk.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 250. Background Processing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Background processing means that a program continues to run in an inactive
window until it requires input.  It will then stop processing until you make
the background window active and give the inactive program the required input.

Related Information:

o Multitasking
o Foreground processing
o Making a window active


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 251. Starting Programs at System Startup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify all the programs you want to begin when your system is started.
Startup is intended to contain programs that are to be started during system
initialization but might go away shortly after.  For example, a batch file that
starts a network server or requester is a typical use.  Drag a copy of the
object you want to begin at startup time to the Startup folder.

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Startup.
 3. Drag, copy or move the program object you want to begin at startup time, to
    the Startup folder.

Whenever you restart your system, the program objects in the folder
automatically start.

Related Information:

Dragging an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 252. Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A font is the collection of characters and symbols of a particular size and
style used to produce text on displays and printers.  When you installed the
operating system some fonts, the IBM Core Fonts, were automatically installed,
unless you specified otherwise.

The IBM Core Fonts consist of 13 Adobe** Type 1 fonts.

The Adobe Type 1 fonts are:


 Family Name          Face Name

 Times New Roman**    Times New Roman

                      Times New Roman Bold

                      Times New Roman Bold Italic

                      Times New Roman Italic

 Helvetica            Helvetica

                      Helvetica Bold

                      Helvetica Bold Italic

                      Helvetica Italic

 Courier              Courier

                      Courier Bold

                      Courier Bold Italic

                      Courier Italic

 Symbol Set           Symbol Set

The Adobe Type Manager**, an integral part of the operating system, accepts
Type 1 fonts and works with existing OS/2* programs that use the Presentation
Manager*.

All of the IBM Core Fonts can be used by PostScript**, HP** LaserJet**, and IBM
laserprinter printers.

Several thousand font styles in the Type 1 font format are available for use
with OS/2* 2.1.  Type 1 fonts require two files for each face name. These have
the file-name extensions .AFM and .PFB.  If the set of fonts you want to
install is supplied on multiple diskettes, you need to copy the files into a
temporary directory, because the font installation process requires that both
files for a given face name be available at the same time.

The selected fonts are copied from the diskette or temporary directory to the
C:\OS2\PSFONTS directory, unless you designate a different one.  If you used a
temporary directory, you should then delete the font files and the directory.
If you have a PostScript printer, you might want to install these fonts for
downloading.

Related Information:

Changing, adding and deleting fonts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 253. Using Command Prompts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can access the OS/2* and DOS full screen and window command prompts as well
as the Win-OS/2* full-screen session.

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select the command-prompt object you want to use.

Use OS/2 full screen to access a full screen where you can type OS/2 commands
or start OS/2 compatible programs.  Use OS/2 window to access a normal size
window where you can type OS/2 commands or start OS/2 compatible programs.  To
find out how to use a DOS prompt, select Using DOS and Windows programs from
the "Related Information" list below.

Note:   Win-OS/2 full screen is not a command prompt.  To find out how to use a
        Win-OS/2 full-screen session, select Using DOS and Windows programs
        from the "Related Information" list below.

Related Information:

o Using DOS and Windows programs
o Starting an OS/2 session
o Starting a DOS session
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 254. Sizing a Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the size of a window to create more space on the desktop or see
more information in the window.

 1. Move the mouse pointer to a border of the window until the mouse pointer
    changes to a double arrow.
 2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
 3. Drag the border to make the window the size you want.
 4. Release the mouse button.

Related Information:

o Moving windows
o Tiling windows
o Cascading windows
o Enlarging a window
o Hiding open windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 255. Files with Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A program can attach information to a file or directory.

Extended attributes are assigned to describe the file or directory to another
program, to the operating system, or to the file system.  For example, the name
of the originator of the file can be stored on a file.  Other uses include
categorizing file objects, such as icons or bit maps, and describing formats of
data in the file object, such as a data record.

A file or directory can have a list of extended attributes associated with it.
Extended attributes are not a part of the data of a file or directory. An
extended attribute must have a name and a value; the name is restricted to the
same character set as a file name.

The total size of extended attributes for the system cannot exceed 64KB, and
the value is arbitrary data.  However, a standard set of conventions for
extended-attribute use is provided so that data is more easily communicated
between programs.

Note:   If you use DOS or a previous version of the OS/2* operating system to
        copy a file, the extended attributes will be lost.

There is a possibility of losing extended attributes if the file is rewritten
or copied by a program written before this version of OS/2 2.1.

For more information about copying files with extended attributes, select the
topic below.

Related Information:

Considerations When Copying and Moving Files or Data-File Objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 256. Customizing Pop-Up Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can customize a pop-up menu by adding or changing menu items to suit your
needs.  For example, you can add a menu item to start a program you use often.
You might want to add a frequently used program, such as an editor, to the
pop-up menu for the desktop.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 2. Select the arrow next to Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select Menu.

You can start a program from a pop-up menu by adding the name of the program
object or program-file object to the menu.  You can add the name easily by
dragging the program object or the program-file object and dropping it on the
Actions on menu field.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Note:   You cannot customize the menu for some objects.  For example, there is
        no Menu page in the settings notebook for the Program, Color palette,
        Font palette, and Scheme palette objects in the Templates folder.
        There will not be a menu page in any object you create from an object
        that does not have a Menu page.  For example, if you create a new
        program object from the Program template in the Templates folder, you
        cannot customize the pop-up menu for the new program object because
        there is no Menu page.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 257. Global File-Name Characters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The global file-name characters * and ? are used to represent file name
characters.  An * in a file name indicates that any character can occupy that
position and all remaining characters. A ? in a file name indicates that any
character can occupy that position only.  For example, to rename the files
BOOKAJV1.TXT and BOOKAJV2.TXT to a DOC extension, type:

  rename bookajv*.txt bookajv*.doc

Or

  rename bookajv?.txt bookajv?.doc

Another example would be if you want to copy more than one file beginning with
the prefix BOOK to a directory named EDIT, type:

  copy book*.* c:\edit

Or

  copy book*.??? c:\edit

Related Information:

o Considerations for copying and moving files and data-file objects
o File systems
o File and directory concepts
o Types of files
o Files with extended attributes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 258. File and Directory Concepts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Information on a computer is organized into files.  Information on the desktop
is organized into folders and objects.

There are four types of objects:

Data-file An object that conveys information.  Text files, memos, letters,
          documents, video, or sound are examples of data-file objects.
Program   An object that represents an executable program.  Text editors,
          spreadsheets, or databases are examples of program objects.
Device    An object that represents a physical device.  Printers, modems, or
          faxes are examples of device objects.
Folder    An object that contains other objects.  A folder is similar to a
          directory and can contain any of the 4 types of objects.

          A folder can contain other folders. When a folder contains another
          folder, that other folder is called a subfolder.  A subfolder is
          similar to a subdirectory.

          There is one folder called the Desktop folder that fills the entire
          screen and contains all other folders and objects.  The Desktop
          folder is similar to the root directory.
A file, program object, or data-file object is information that can:

o Start a program.  These files are called program files or program-file
  objects.  A program file can have any of the following extensions: .EXE,
  .COM, .CMD, or .BAT.
o Contain text or graphics.  These files are called data files or data-file
  objects.  You cannot start a data file.  A data file can have any extension,
  with the exception of .EXE, .COM, .BAT, or .CMD.
o Process a series of commands.  These files are called batch files.  Batch
  files have .CMD or .BAT extensions.

One or more files or data-file objects can be placed in a directory or folder
on the desktop, which is a collection of files, directories, or both.  When you
installed the operating system, it copied some of its files from the OS/2*
diskette to the root directory, which is the main index for all directories on
your system.  A directory can have other directories (subdirectories).

In the following example,

  C:\OS2\BOOK

BOOK is a subdirectory of the OS2 directory.  The location of a file or a
directory is specified by its path.  A path contains a drive designation and
one or more directories, separated by a backslash (\).  For example,

  C:\OS2

Sometimes you are asked to provide a path before a file name and its extension
(if it has one).  For example, the path name and file name for the OS/2 System
Editor, which comes with the operating system, is:

  C:\OS2\E.EXE

Related Information:

o Batch files
o High Performance File System (HPFS)
o Considerations for copying and moving files and data-file objects
o File allocation table (FAT)
o File systems
o Types of files
o Files with extended attributes
o Global file-name characters
o HPFS and FAT file-system naming rules


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 259. Using Disks and Disk Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A disk is a reusable storage device that holds information, such as software
and data, in files.  As with random-access memory (RAM), the amount of space on
a disk is measured in bytes.  Unlike information stored in random-access
memory, however, information stored on a disk is not deleted when you turn off
your computer.  You can delete the information on a disk, and with proper care
you can use the disk over and over again.

Your computer's disk drives move information stored on disks into and out of
random-access memory.  For example, your computer can read software
instructions from a disk into random-access memory, and write your data to a
disk for safekeeping.

There are two kinds of disk drives: a hard disk drive and a diskette drive.  A
hard disk drive contains a non-removable disk that is built into your computer.
With a hard disk drive, you can store large amounts of information in one
convenient place, instead of storing it on many diskettes.

A diskette drive holds a removable diskette, which has less storage capacity
than a hard disk.  The hard disk drive can also write and read information to
and from your computer much faster than a diskette drive.  When your computer
writes or reads information to or from a disk, the indicator light for the
drive goes on.

Each disk drive has a letter assigned to it so you can direct the computer to
find instructions and information.  For example, on many computers the diskette
drive is called drive A, and the hard disk is called drive C.

Diskettes are removable and come in various sizes.  Many computers use
5.25-inch diskettes, which are thin, flexible, and somewhat fragile.  Some
computers use 3.5-inch diskettes, which are protected by a hard plastic cover
that makes them more durable.

Related Information:

o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Managing disks
o Types of diskette drives
o Formatting disks
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 260. Labeling and Caring for a Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Store diskettes in a safe place, away from dust, moisture, magnetic fields
(such as televisions, speakers, and computer monitors), and extreme
temperatures.  Label each diskette so you can easily identify the information
stored on it.  Place a label on the diskette in such a way that it does not
cover an exposed area of the diskette.

If you are using a 5.25-inch diskette, use a soft felt-tip pen to write on the
label.  Using a pencil or ball-point pen can damage the diskette.

Related Information:

o Using disks and diskette drives
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Managing disks
o Types of diskette drives
o Formatting disks
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 261. Protecting Information on a Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A 5.25-inch diskette has a write-protect notch located on the right side of the
diskette.  You can place a write-protect tab over the notch to protect the
information stored on the diskette.  A 3.5-inch diskette can be write protected
by sliding a built-in tab to reveal the write-protect hole.

A 5.25-inch diskette has a write-protect notch located on the right side of the
diskette.  You can place a write-protect tab over the notch to protect the
information stored on the diskette.  A 3.5-inch diskette can be write-protected
by sliding a built-in tab to reveal the write-protect hole.

To store information on a write-protected diskette, you must remove the
write-protect tab from the 5.25-inch diskette, or slide the tab back over the
write-protect hole on a 3.5-inch diskette.  When you have finished changing the
information on a write-protected diskette, replace the write-protect tab.

If a diskette does not have a write-protect notch or tab, the diskette is
permanently write protected.  Many software manufacturers use permanently
write-protected diskettes to prevent the information on the diskettes from
being accidentally changed or deleted.

Related Information:

o Using disks and diskette drives
o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Managing disks
o Types of diskette drives
o Formatting disks
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 262. Preparing Disks to Hold Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have a new diskette that has never been used, you must prepare it to
store information.  To do this, you must format the diskette to enable the
operating system to locate information stored on the diskette.  When you format
a diskette, the operating system also checks the diskette for defects.

You must take care when formatting a diskette because information stored on the
diskette is deleted and might not be recoverable.

Related Information:

o Formatting disks
o Using disks and diskette drives
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Managing disks
o Types of diskette drives
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 263. Using Scroll Bars ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Some OS/2* windows contain vertical scroll bars, and sometimes, horizontal
scroll bars.  If there is more information that can fit in a window or list, a
scroll box is displayed within the scroll bar.  The size of the scroll box
represents the amount of the available information currently visible.  A small
scroll box represents a small amount of visible information.  Where as, a large
scroll box represents a large amount of visible information.  When no scroll
box is displayed, the window contains all the available information.  You can
drag the scroll box up or down to view all the information currently available
in a window or list.  You can also use the scroll arrows, located at the top
and bottom of the scroll bar, to scroll through the information.

Related Information:

o Sizing a window
o Closing a window
o Window parts and descriptions
o Using the title-bar icon


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 264. Types of Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Much of the information stored in files is text, such as letters, punctuation,
and special characters.  Different tasks are performed with different types of
files, and it is important to be able to recognize the types of files and what
each is used for.

Extensions help you identify the type of the file.

o .EXE (executable) or .COM (command) represents files that contain programs.
o .SYS (system) represents files that contain information about your hardware
  (for example, a mouse or expanded memory).
o .BAT (batch) represents DOS files that contain lists of commands that process
  as a set.  The .BAT extension must be used when creating batch files using
  DOS sessions.
o .CMD (batch) represents OS/2** files that contain lists of commands that
  process as a set.  The .CMD extension must be used when creating batch files
  using OS/2 sessions.
o .TXT (text) represents files that contain unformatted text.

When you create a file, you can choose an extension that helps you identify the
file.  The extension must contain no more than three characters if you are
using the FAT file system.  The file name restrictions regarding characters and
spacing also apply to extensions.  Most programs that create files add an
extension.  It is generally best to use the specified extension.  When using
the HPFS file system, extended attributes may be assigned to a file.  Extended
attributes help the program identify the file.

It is common for a program to produce files that contain codes that can be used
only by that program.  For example, when you create a spreadsheet data file,
the spreadsheet program saves the file in a format that only it can read.
Sometimes the program assigns an extension to the files it creates.

Related Information:

o Batch files
o Batch file examples
o High Performance File System (HPFS)
o Considerations for copying and moving files and data-file objects
o File allocation table (FAT)
o File systems
o File and directory concepts
o Files with extended attributes
o Global file-name characters
o HPFS and FAT file-system naming rules


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 265. Managing Disks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Disks provide long-term information storage.  The information you save on disks
remains intact until you delete or change it.  In contrast, random access
memory (RAM) provides short-term information storage.  The information stored
in RAM is lost each time you turn off your computer.

Disks store information on magnetic surfaces.  A diskette contains a magnetic
surface which is a thin, flexible disk inside a protective plastic cover.  A
hard disk has two or more rigid disks stacked on top of each other in a sealed
case that remains inside your computer.  Once your hard disk is installed it
should not be removed, unless it is damaged or you upgrade to a larger disk.

Information on disks is divided into tracks, somewhat like the grooves on a
record.  Each track is a concentric circle that can hold a certain amount of
information.  The more tracks a disk has, the more information it can hold.  A
hard disk holds more information than a diskette because it has more sides and
more tracks per side.

Diskettes vary in physical size and the amount of information they can hold.
The following is a list of the major types of diskettes and the amount of
information each can hold.

     5.25-inch, single sided/double density          160KB
     5.25-inch, single sided/double density          180KB
     5.25-inch, double sided/double density          320KB
     5.25-inch, double sided/double density          360KB
     5.25-inch, double sided/high density            1200KB or 1.2MB
     3.5-inch, double sided/double density           720KB
     3.5-inch, double sided/high density             1440KB or 1.44MB
     3.5-inch, double sided/high density             2880KB or 2.88MB

Related Information:

o Using disks and diskette drives
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Types of diskette drives
o Formatting disks
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 266. Bytes, Kilobytes, and Megabytes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File sizes are measured in bytes.  One byte is the amount of space it takes to
store a character.  A kilobyte is 1024 bytes and is abbreviated as KB.  A
megabyte is 1024KB (about a million bytes) and is abbreviated as MB.  For
example, if a disk can store 1.2 million bytes of information it is a 1.2MB
disk.  The following terms are equivalent:

           1MB = 1024KB = 1048576 bytes

If you want to view disk information:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Drives.
 3. Select the drive object for which you want information.
 4. Display the pop-up menu for the drive object.
 5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 6. Select Settings.
 7. Select Details.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Using disks and diskette drives
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Managing disks
o Types of diskette drives
o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Formatting disks
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 267. Types of Diskette Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Not all types of diskettes are compatible with all types of diskette drives. A
diskette must be formatted at a capacity less than or equal to the capacity of
the diskette drive in order for the disk and the drive to be compatible. For
example, if you have a high density 3.50-inch diskette drive designed to work
with 2.88MB diskettes, you can use diskettes formatted as 1.44KB.  However, if
you have a 1.44KB diskette drive, you cannot use a 2.88MB diskette.

Related Information:

o Using disks and diskette drives
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Managing disks
o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Formatting disks
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 268. Formatting Disks and Optical Discs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To prepare a diskette, hard disk, or optical disc for first time use, you must
format it.  Formatting removes any information previously stored on a diskette,
hard disk, or optical disc so that information can be read from or written to
it by the operating system.  Be sure to check the diskette, hard disk, or
optical disc before you format it or you may destroy important files.

To format a diskette or hard disk:

 1. If you are formatting a diskette, make sure the diskette is in the diskette
    drive.
 2. Select OS/2 System.
 3. Select Drives.
 4. Select the drive object for the diskette or hard disk you want to format
    (for example, Drive A).
 5. Display the pop-up menu for the drive object.
 6. Select Format disk.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

To format an optical disc:

 1. Make sure the cartridge you want to format is in the drive.
 2. Select OS/2 System.
 3. Select Drives.
 4. Select the drive object for the optical disc you want to format (for
    example, Drive D).
 5. Display the pop-up menu for the drive object.
 6. Select Format optical disc.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Using disks and diskette drives
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Managing disks
o Types of diskette drives
o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Bytes, kilobytes, and megabytes
o Copying diskettes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 269. Window Parts and Descriptions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following figure displays the parts of a window.

 1. border
 2. title-bar icon
 3. title bar
 4. minimize button or hide button
 5. maximize button
 6. scroll bars.

Related Information:

o Using scroll bars
o Sizing a window
o Closing a window
o Hiding open windows
o Showing hidden windows
o Using the title-bar icon


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 270. Viewing Pictures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Picture Viewer displays and prints metafiles (.MET) and picture interchange
format files (.PIF).  You can also display a spool file (.SPL), as long as the
file contains a picture.

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Picture Viewer.

Or:

 1. Select a folder that contains picture files with .MET, .PIF, or .SPL
    extensions.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the folder.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 4. Select a view.
 5. Double-click on a picture-file object.

For additional help, select Help after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 271. Changing the Touch Control Panel Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Touch Control Panel is used to setup the IBM Touch Device to act like an
IBM PS/2 Mouse.

If you installed this option:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Touch.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

When using DOS, be sure to use a DOS full-screen session to get the best
results for the touch control mouse emulation.

If you did not install this option and want to do so , refer to "Adding options
after installation" below.

Related Information:

Adding options after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 272. Hiding an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To remove an object from a screen without closing it:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Window.
 3. Select Hide.

Related Information:

o Showing hidden windows
o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 273. Changing Window Schemes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change any of the current settings of colors or fonts for window text,
menus, menu bars, and screen backgrounds by creating your own window schemes or
selecting one of the defaults (for example, Spring, Summer, Winter, or Autumn).
You also can change the width of the horizontal and vertical window borders.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Scheme Palette.
 4. Select a Scheme from the list.
 5. Drag the window scheme to an active window or to the desktop.

    If you drop the scheme sample on the desktop, you must press Alt+mouse
    button 2, then all windows in the desktop change to the selected scheme.
    If you drop the scheme sample on an open window, only that window changes
    to the selected scheme.

For more information about creating color schemes, select the Help push button
after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing screen colors
o Selecting folder backgrounds


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 274. Displaying Objects on a Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Drives.
 3. Display the pop-up menu of the drive to display its objects.
 4. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 5. Select a view.

Related Information:

o Selecting an object
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 275. Using the Title-Bar Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the title-bar icon to display a menu so you can restore, move, size, hide,
maximize and close windows, as well as access the Window List.  The title-bar
icon is in the upper-left corner of the window.

To get help for the title-bar icon:

 1. Point at the title-bar icon, and then press and hold mouse button 1.
 2. Press F1 to display the help for the title-bar icon.
 3. Release mouse button 1 and F1 at the same time.

To display the title-bar icon:

 1. Select the title-bar icon to display the pop-up menu.
 2. Select the option you want.

You can double-click on the title-bar icon to close the window.

Related Information:

o Sizing a window
o Closing a window
o Hiding open windows
o Showing hidden windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 276. Printing Screens ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can print the contents of a window or full screen.

To print a full screen:

 1. Place the pointer on the desktop away from any open windows.
 2. Press Print Screen.

To print an open window:

 1. Place the pointer in any open window.
 2. Press Print Screen.

To disable Print screen:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select System.
 4. Select Print Screen.
 5. Select the Disable radio button.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 277. Making a Menu Item the Default Action ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Each conditional cascade menu has a default action item.  To make a different
menu item the default action:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Menu tab.
 5. Select a menu choice in the Available menus field.
 6. Select Settings to the right of the Available menus field.
 7. Select the Conditional cascade radio button.
 8. Select the arrow to the right of Default action.
 9. Select the menu item you want to be the default.
10. Select Ok.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Customizing menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 278. Copying Diskettes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy the contents of a diskette in the source drive to a diskette in the
target drive:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Drives.
 3. Display the pop-up menu for the source drive.
 4. Select Copy disk.

Related Information:

o Using disks and diskette drives
o Protecting information on a diskette
o Preparing disks to hold information
o Managing disks
o Labeling and caring for a diskette
o Formatting disks


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 279. Locking Keyboard and Mouse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To lock your keyboard and mouse to secure the data on your system:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the desktop.
 2. Select Lockup now.

Note:   To unlock the system, type your password and press Enter.

If you want to set a new password or change your password, select Changing
Lockup settings for the system from the Related Information list below.

Related Information:

o Changing Lockup settings for the system
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 280. Playing Jigsaw ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Jigsaw is a video puzzle you can solve. It allows you to move the pieces of the
puzzle in any direction.  You can select from the available pictures or use
your own pictures.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Games.
 3. Select Jigsaw.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 281. Playing Cat and Mouse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cat and Mouse is a game to help you learn how to use the mouse.  If you
installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Games.
 3. Select Cat and Mouse.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 282. Playing OS/2 Chess ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OS/2 Chess is a game of chess.  You can play against another person on the same
computer, on a network, or against the computer.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Games.
 3. Select OS/2 Chess.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 283. Playing Reversi ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Reversi is a board game that requires skill and strategy.  If you installed
this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Games.
 3. Select Reversi.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 284. Playing Scramble ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Scramble is a small video puzzle you can solve.  It allows you to move the
pieces of the puzzle in one direction at a time.  You can select from the
available pictures.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Games.
 3. Select Scramble.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 285. Playing Klondike Solitaire ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Klondike Solitaire is a popular card game for one person.  If you installed
this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Games.
 3. Select Klondike Solitaire.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 286. Using Enhanced Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enhanced Editor is an editor you can use to create and edit text files.  It
also enables you to work on multiple files at the same time.  If you installed
this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Enhanced Editor.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 287. Using Icon Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Icon Editor is a tool that enables you to create, edit, and convert image
files.  These files include icons, bit maps, and pointers.  If you installed
this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Icon Editor.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 288. Using Presentation Manager Chart (PM Chart) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PM Chart is a chart-making program. You can easily create business
presentations, charts, and drawings.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select PM Chart.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 289. Displaying Pulse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pulse is a system monitor.  This displays the amount of time various programs
use the processor.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Pulse.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 290. Using Seek and Scan Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Seek and Scan Files is a program that quickly searches one or more disks for
files or text.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Seek and Scan Files.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 291. Using PM Terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PM Terminal is a communications program.  It emulates terminals and allows for
data transfer between two computers.  A modem is required.  If you installed
this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select PM Terminal.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 292. Using Alarms ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Alarms is a program that enables you to set alarms to go off during the day.
If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Alarms.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 293. Using Activities List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Activities List is a summary list of events from the Daily Planner.  If you
installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Activities List.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 294. Using Calculator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Calculator is a program that you can use to perform mathematical calculations.
If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Calculator.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 295. Using Calendar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Calendar is a program that enables you to look at a day, month, and year of
your choice. If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Calendar.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 296. Using Clipboard Viewer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Clipboard Viewer is an application that enables you to view the contents of the
OS/2* clipboard.  To view the contents of the clipboard:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Clipboard Viewer.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 297. Using Daily Planner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Daily Planner is a program that enables you to keep track of your past and
future activities.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Daily Planner.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 298. Using Database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Database is a program that enables you to keep a miniature database.  If you
installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Database.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 299. Using Monthly Planner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Monthly Planner A summary of the monthly activities.  If you installed this
option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Monthly Planner.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 300. Using Notepad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note Pad is a convenient place to keep personal notes.  If you installed this
option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Note Pad.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 301. Using Planner Archive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Planner Archive A list of entries that were archived with the Daily Planner.
If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Planner Archive.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 302. Using Spreadsheet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Spreadsheet is a spreadsheet program.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Spreadsheet.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 303. Using Sticky Pad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sticky Pad is a place to keep small reminder notes that "stick" to one of the
four corners of the monitor.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Sticky Pad.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 304. Using To-Do List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To-Do List is a program that enables you to plan your day by prioritizing the
daily activities.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select To-Do List.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 305. Using To-Do List Archive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To-Do List Archive is a list of entries that were archived with the To-Do List.
If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select To-Do List Archive.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 306. Using Tune Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Tune Editor is a program that enables you to create and edit tunes to be used
with the Alarm program.  If you installed this option:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Productivity.
 3. Select Tune Editor.

For additional help, select Help on the menu bar after the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 307. Improving OS/2 Operating System Performance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Improving your OS/2* 2.1 operating system for maximum performance is done by
adjusting various settings.  Select from the list below for additional
information on improving the performance of your operating system.

Related Information:

o Improving I/O performance - HPFS
o Improving I/O performance - FAT
o Increasing performance using the CONFIG.SYS files
o Starting applications
o Managing memory overcommitment
o DOS sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 308. Improving I/O Performance - FAT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The FAT file system, with its improvements, is an excellent file system for
smaller (up to 60 MB) logical drives.  Changing the DISKCACHE statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file enables you to set the disk cache from the default of 64KB to
the maximum the hardware supports.  To enable larger amounts of data to be read
from the disk into the disk cache; increase the threshold value (default is 4)
in the DISKCACHE statement.  The threshold value is the number of sectors an
I/O request must not exceed to be read into the disk cache, maximum setting is
128 (64KB).  It is important to increase the size of the disk cache from 64KB
when increasing the threshold value, to have adequate disk-cache space to
manage the additional I/O.

Note:   It also is important to increase the size of the file-system cache when
        the threshold value is increased.  This will prevent overwriting cache
        data that might be reused.  The file system that will be used the most
        should have the cache increased to 256KB or even to 512KB, if possible
        permitting.  Increasing both caches, when not required, can cause a
        memory-overcommitment situation and decrease system performance.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select DISKCACHE
below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have not
installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation after
installation."

Related Information:

o DISKCACHE
o Changing the CONFIG.SYS file
o File allocation table
o File systems
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 309. Improving I/O Performance - HPFS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The HPFS is an excellent file system for larger logical drives greater than 60
MB and for larger data files.  Changing the DISKCACHE statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file enables you to set the HPFS CACHE from the default of 64KB to
the maximum of 2MB.  The HPFS threshold value is the maximum number of cache
blocks in KB an I/O must not exceed to be read into the HPFS cache.  The
maximum value is 64 (64KB I/O).

Note:   It is important to increase the size of the file-system cache when the
        threshold value is increased.  This will prevent overwriting cache data
        that may be reused.  The file system that will be used the most should
        have the cache increased to 256KB or even to 512K, if possible.
        Increasing both caches, when not required, can cause a
        memory-overcommitment situation and decrease system performance.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select DISKCACHE
below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have not
installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation after
installation."

Related Information:

o DISKCACHE
o Changing the CONFIG.SYS file
o High Performance File System
o File systems
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 310. Increasing Performance using the CONFIG.SYS File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Changes can be made in the CONFIG.SYS file to improve performance. The PATH
and LIBPATH statements should begin with the most commonly accessed
directories.  Whenever possible, group files commonly used into a single
directory to decrease the time required for the system to locate a requested
file.  You also can save memory by eliminating unnecessary DEVICE statements.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select a command name
below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have not
installed the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation after
installation".

Related Information:

o PATH
o LIBPATH
o DEVICE
o Changing the CONFIG.SYS file
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 311. Starting Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have an application that you use frequently, you might want to start it
each time the system starts.  You can do this by placing it in the Startup
folder.  This will save you the time and steps required to start the
application.  For additional information about starting applications at system
startup, select Starting Programs at System Startup from "Related Information."

Another way to decrease the steps required to start up an application is to
place the commonly used icons on the desktop folder.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference,you can select START below to
link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have not installed
the Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation after
installation".

Related Information:

o Starting programs at system startup
o START
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 312. Managing Memory Overcommitment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In memory-overcommitment situations, the OS/2* operating system depends on the
swap file (SWAPPER.DAT) to manage memory in excess of the physical memory
available.  Memory blocks written to disk do not go through the file-system
cache.  For memory overcommitment, the best location for the swap file is the
most commonly used logical drive, preferably HPFS, on the least used hardfile.
The location of the swap file is changed by changing the path in the CONFIG.SYS
file.  The change takes effect at system startup.  If the swap file cannot be
extended (not enough free space is available), the system will prevent the
startup of new applications.

To help ensure you have memory available when needed, exit applications that
will not be used again.  When memory is overcommitted, decrease the use of
small applications that are merely helpful (for example, System Clock or
Calculator) as opposed to required applications or sessions until enough memory
is available.

Related Information:

o Changing the CONFIG.SYS file
o High Performance File System


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 313. DOS Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOS sessions can be customized for each application.  Many settings provide a
wide range of functional support.  Several directly affect the performance of a
DOS application.  Memory for DOS sessions is set to 3MB, but can be increased
to help in execution of DOS applications that can use EMS and XMS memory.

Related Information:

o DOS and WIN-OS/2 optimization and problem resolution
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Expanded Memory Specification (EMS), description of
o eXtended Memory Specification (XMS), description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 314. Using the OS/2 Clipboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy or move information between two data files, use Cut, Copy, and Paste.

To copy or move information from one OS/2* program to another:

 1. Mark the information you want to copy or move to a different program or
    session.

    To mark the text or graphics, move the mouse pointer to the beginning of
    the text or graphics you want to mark.  Press and hold mouse button 1 and
    drag the mouse pointer to the end of the text or graphics you want to mark.
    Release the mouse button.  All characters are then highlighted.
 2. Use the program's Copy or Cut menu choice from the Edit pull-down menu to
    put the information in the clipboard.
 3. Open the data file where you want to put the information.
 4. Move the mouse pointer to select the place where you want the information
    to appear.
 5. Use the program's Paste menu choice from the Edit pull-down menu to insert
    the information.
Related Information:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Copying to and from DOS and OS/2 sessions
o Using Clipboard Viewer


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 315. Selecting Folder Backgrounds ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display an image on the background of your folder windows or the Desktop
folder:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for a folder.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 3. Select Settings.
 4. Select the Background tab.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 316. Viewing Keyboard Layouts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The keyboard layout determines which character or characters are produced when
you press one or more keys on the keyboard.

For information about keyboard layouts, refer to Keyboards and Code Pages.  You
can order this book by mailing in the order form found in the OS/2 2.1
operating system package.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 317. Viewing Code Pages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Code pages determine which set of characters can be produced when you designate
a specific keyboard layout in the CONFIG.SYS file.

For information about code pages, refer to Keyboards and Code Pages.  You can
order this book by mailing in the order form found in the OS/2 2.1 operating
system package.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 318. Viewing Accented Characters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Accented characters can be created in some countries with specific combinations
of keyboard layouts and code pages.

For information about accented characters, refer to Keyboards and Code Pages.
You can order this book by mailing in the order form found in the OS/2 2.1
operating system package.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 319. Using Code Page Switching ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Code page switching allows you to switch between different character sets to
display or print files.  Certain statements must be added to your CONFIG.SYS
file to start code page switching.

For information about code page switching, refer to Keyboards and Code Pages.
You can order this book by mailing in the order form found in the OS/2 2.1
operating system package.

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select a command name
below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have not
installed the OS/2 Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation
after installation".

Related Information:

o CHCP
o CODEPAGE
o COUNTRY
o DEVINFO
o KEYB
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 320. IBM Trademark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of the IBM Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 321. Non-IBM Trademarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this information, are
trademarks of other companies as follows:

Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Adobe Type Manager is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
AST is a trademark of AST Research, Incorporated.
ATI is trademark of ATI Technologies, Inc.
Canon is a trademark of Canon Kabushiki Kaisha (a Japanese corporation).
C-Itoh is a trademark of C. Itoh & Co. of America Inc.
Digital Research is a trademark of Digital Research, Inc.
Encore is a trademark of Passport Designs, Inc.
Epson is a trademark of Seiko Epson Kabushiki Kaisha.
Excel is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Fujitsu is a trademark of Fujitsu Limited.
Headland Technologies is a trademark of Headland Technology, Inc.
Helvetica is a trademark of the Linotype Company.
HP and Hewlett-Packard are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
LaserJet is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Lotus is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.
Microsoft is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
NEC is a trademark of NEC Corporation.
Novell is a trademark of Novell, Incorporated.
Olivetti is a trademark of Inh C. Olivetti & C., S.p.a. (an Italian company).
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
TI is a trademark of Texas Instruments Incorporated.
Times New Roman is a trademark of the Monotype Corporation, Ltd.
Toshiba is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
Trident Microsystems is a trademark of Trident Computing, Inc.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Western Digital is a trademark of Western Digital Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 322. Replacing the OS/2 Interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Use your favorite text editor to edit the CONFIG.SYS file.
 2. Change the path name in the PROTSHELL statement to specify the name of your
    program instead of the OS/2* interface.
 3. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.  (Changes to the CONFIG.SYS file
    do not take effect until you restart your system.)

If you have installed the OS/2 Command Reference, you can select a command name
below to link to the information in the Command Reference.  If you have not
installed the OS/2 Command Reference, refer to "Adding online documentation
after installation".

Related Information:

o PROTSHELL
o Adding online documentation after installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Replacing the OS/2 Interface - Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following example shows the PROTSHELL statement specifying a replacement
program for the OS/2* interface.

PROTSHELL=C:\MyShell\FILENAME.EXE
SET SYSTEM_INI=C:\OS2\OS2SYS.INI
SET USER_INI=C:\OS2\OS2.INI
SET OS2_SHELL=C:\OS2\CMD.EXE /K INIT.CMD
SET AUTOSTART=PROGRAMS,WINDOWLIST,FOLDERS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 323. Viewing the Glossary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Glossary to view an alphabetic list of terms for the OS/2* operating
system.  For example, the Glossary provides information about the terms used in
describing different aspects of the desktop.

To display the Glossary:

 1. Select Information.
 2. Select Glossary.

To display an entry:

 1. Select the first letter of the entry from the notebook tabs.
 2. Select the entry.

    To display more tabs, select the double-arrow at the bottom of the
    notebook.

Other ways to search the Glossary are:

 1. Select Search topics.
 2. Type the word, phrase or topic you want to search for.
 3. Press Search.

Or:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Glossary.
 2. Select Search topics.
 3. Type the word, phrase or topic you want to search for.
 4. Press Search.

In all cases, if the entry does not fit in the window, you can use the left or
right arrow at the bottom of the notebook to adjust the entry to the left or
right.

When a glossary term is displayed, you can select Print topics to print that
term.

A glossary entry can contain special highlighting to indicate that a related
topic or definition is available. Double-click on the word or phrase to display
the related information.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 324. Using DOS and Windows Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2* operating system is designed to run DOS and Microsoft**  Windows**
programs.  The OS/2 operating system has a feature called WIN-OS/2* that
enables it to run supported Windows programs.  The WIN-OS/2 feature allows
Windows programs to run in a WIN-OS/2 session. You also can start a DOS or an
OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session.  For more information, select a topic
below:

o Installing new DOS programs
o Installing new Windows programs
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o Starting programs
o Starting Windows programs in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Starting a DOS or an OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Switching between tasks in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Switching between sessions
o Exiting from a WIN-OS/2 session

To display help about transferring information between programs or sessions,
select a topic below:

o Copying or moving information (clipboard)
o Exchanging data

Related Information:

o A DOS and WIN-OS/2 overview
o Additional DOS and WIN-OS/2 tasks
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 optimization and problem resolution


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 325. Additional DOS and WIN-OS/2 Tasks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the topic you want to read concerning DOS or WIN-OS/2* tasks:

o Installing a WIN-OS/2 printer driver
o Starting a specific DOS version
o Starting a DOS or an OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Memory extenders
o WIN-OS/2 modes-standard and enhanced compatibility


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 326. DOS and WIN-OS/2 Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The system provides settings for optimizing the performance of your DOS and
Windows** programs when you select Migrate Applications from the Advanced
Options window during the installation of the OS/2* operating system.  Also,
when you select Migrate Applications during the installation of new DOS and
Windows programs, the system selects optimum settings for the performance of
your programs.  You can change some DOS or WIN-OS/2* settings after you test
the performance of your programs with the OS/2 operating system.  You can
adjust any of the following settings:

o Memory size
o Keyboard rate
o Mouse pointer or touch-sensitive screen focus
o Ctrl+Break key functions
o Program speed
o Video function or performance
o Communications connection
o Printer or other device functions.

Windows programs run in different WIN-OS/2 sessions:

o WIN-OS/2 full screen
o WIN-OS/2 window
o WIN-OS/2 window, separate session

Each of these session types has unique characteristics.  For more information,
select Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions or Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window
sessions below.

Related Information:

o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Changing DOS settings while a session is running
o Changing and saving DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Changing the CONFIG.SYS file for DOS settings
o Migrate Applications


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 327. DOS and WIN-OS/2 Optimization and Problem Resolution ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Refer to the following topics in "Related Information" for help in optimizing
your system or resolving problems:

Starting a specific DOS version
     Select this topic if your program does not run at all, or if it uses a
     device that does not work correctly in the version of DOS supplied with
     the OS/2* operating system.  You might need to install a specific DOS
     version.

Finding an object
     Select this topic to locate objects, such as a program object, a data-file
     object, a folder, and a device object.

DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
     Select this topic if you want to customize settings for your DOS or
     Windows** programs.

DOS error messages
     Select this topic for help with error messages displayed by DOS programs.

Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
     Select this topic if you use multiple Windows programs that work together
     in a WIN-OS/2* session.

Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
     Select this topic if you want to run Windows programs in a WIN-OS/2 window
     session.

DOS and WIN-OS/2 video mode considerations
     Select this topic for more information about running DOS and Windows
     programs in different video modes.

Related Information:

o Starting a specific DOS version
o Finding an object
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS error messages
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 video mode considerations


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 328. Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Some DOS and WIN-OS/2* settings can be changed after you start a program.
Others can be changed after you start a session, but before you start your
program.  Certain DOS or WIN-OS/2 settings must be changed before you start the
session.

For a detailed description of individual DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, including
information about when you can change a particular setting, select DOS and
WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions from "Related Information."

To learn how to change settings after starting a session, select Changing DOS
settings while a session is running from "Related Information."

Note:   When you change the value of a setting in an open session, the changes
        affect only the programs you run in that session.  Settings you change
        for an open session are not saved when you close the session or when
        you turn off the computer, even if you use the shutdown procedure.

If you want to save your changes indefinitely so they are preset whenever you
start a specific session or program, select Changing and saving DOS and
WIN-OS/2 settings.

Windows** programs run in different WIN-OS/2 sessions:

o WIN-OS/2 full screen
o WIN-OS/2 window
o WIN-OS/2 window, separate session

Each of these session types has unique characteristics.  For more information,
select Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions or Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window
sessions from "Related Information."

Related Information:

o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions
o Changing DOS settings while a session is running
o Changing and saving DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Changing a DOS and WIN-OS/2 session
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 329. Changing DOS Settings While a Session is Running ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change DOS settings while a session is running:

 1. Press Alt+Esc to return to the desktop.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the open DOS session.
 3. Select the DOS Settings push button.
 4. Select the setting you require from the list.
 5. Adjust the value or the choice, as appropriate.
 6. Select Save.

Or:

 1. Select the title-bar icon in the open DOS session.
 2. Select the setting you require from the list.
 3. Adjust the value or the choice, as appropriate.
 4. Select Save.

Note:   Not all DOS settings can be changed after you start your session.
        Further, the settings you change while a session is open will not be
        saved.  To display the settings that are not listed while the session
        is open, or to save changes indefinitely, select Changing and saving
        DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings from "Related Information."

Related Information:

o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions
o Changing and saving DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 330. Changing and Saving DOS and WIN-OS/2 Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To save DOS and WIN-OS/2* settings so they are set whenever you use a
particular session or program:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Session.
 4. Select the DOS settings or the WIN-OS/2 settings push button.
 5. Select the setting you require from the list.
 6. Adjust the value of the choice, as appropriate.
 7. Select Save.

Windows** programs run in different WIN-OS/2 sessions:

o WIN-OS/2 full screen
o WIN-OS/2 window
o WIN-OS/2 window, separate session

Each of these session types has unique characteristics.  For more information,
select Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions or Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window
sessions below.

Related Information:

o Copying an Object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 331. Changing a DOS and WIN-OS/2 Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change a DOS and WIN-OS/2* session:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the program object.  If you do not know where
    your program object is, select Finding an object from "Related
    Information."
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Session.
 4. Select the type of session:  DOS window, DOS full screen, WIN-OS/2 full
    screen, WIN-OS/2 window, or Separate session.
 5. Select the setting you require from the list.
 6. Make a note of the value or choice for a setting before you change it, in
    case it is different from the default and you want to return to the
    original setting.
 7. Adjust the value or the choice, as appropriate.
 8. Select Save.

Windows** programs run in different WIN-OS/2 sessions:

o WIN-OS/2 full screen
o WIN-OS/2 window
o WIN-OS/2 window, separate session

Each of these session types has unique characteristics.  For more information,
select Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions or Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window
sessions below.

Related Information:

o Finding an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 332. A DOS and WIN-OS/2 Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2* operating system is designed to run DOS and Microsoft**  Windows**
programs.  The OS/2 operating system has a feature called WIN-OS/2* that
enables it to run supported Windows programs.  The WIN-OS/2 feature allows
Windows programs to run in a WIN-OS/2 session.  You also can start a DOS or an
OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session.  For example, you can:

o Run multiple DOS programs in one or more DOS sessions and switch between
  sessions.  Therefore, program failure in any one session does not affect
  other sessions.
o Run multiple Windows programs in one or more WIN-OS/2 sessions and switch
  between sessions.  Therefore, program failure in any one session does not
  affect other sessions.
o Start DOS or OS/2 programs from a WIN-OS/2 session.
o Update data between sessions or data-file objects using the dynamic data
  exchange (DDE) feature.  For a detailed description of DDE, select Exchanging
  data from "Related Information."
o Copy information to a clipboard in one session, then paste that information
  in a different session.
o Use a separately purchased specific DOS version in a session.

Related Information:

o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o Starting a DOS or an OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Exchanging data
o Copying or moving information (Clipboard)
o Starting a specific DOS version


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 333. Changing the CONFIG.SYS File for DOS Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you install DOS and Windows** programs, the installation process might
change statements in your CONFIG.SYS file.

Use the following settings to adjust the DOS or WIN-OS/2* settings for programs
that do not run correctly:

o BREAK=
o DOS=UMB or NOUMB
o DOS=HIGH or LOW
o DEVICE=
o FCBS=value,value
o FILES=
o LASTDRIVE=
o SHELL=

To learn how to change DOS settings, select Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings.

Related Information:

o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 334. Virtual Device Drivers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Device drivers allow the OS/2* operating system to interact with physical
devices attached to the system.  Physical device drivers communicate directly
with hardware devices and are installed when you start the OS/2 operating
system using DEVICE= statements in the CONFIG.SYS file.  For example:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM02.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS

The OS/2 operating system enables you to have more than one active program at a
time.  The operating system has virtual device drivers (VDDs) that manage
shared access to hardware input and output (I/O) devices for multiple DOS or
WIN-OS/2* sessions.  Devices with VDD support include the keyboard, mouse, and
serial and parallel ports.

Virtual device drivers:

o Enable each DOS or WIN-OS/2 session to act as if it has sole control over
  shared devices.
o Prevent any one DOS or WIN-OS/2 session from affecting any other session.
o Support fast screen I/O.
o Support fast communications I/O.

The following VDDs are provided with the OS/2 operating system:

VDD        Description
VBIOS      ROM BIOS support
VCMOS      CMOS data area and Real Time Clock support
VCOM       Asynchronous communication ports
VDMA       Direct Memory Access
VDSK       Disk, only for INT 13 copy-protection
VKBD       Keyboard
VLPT       Printer
VMSE       Mouse
VNPX       Numeric Processor Extension (80387)
VPIC       Programmable Interrupt Controller
VTIMER     Timer
VVIDEO     Video (VCGA, MCGA, VEGA, VVGA, V8514)
VXMS       Extended Memory Support
VEMM       Expanded Memory Support

Like physical device drivers, VDDs are installed when you start the OS/2
operating system using DEVICE= statements in the CONFIG.SYS file.  For example,
the following CONFIG.SYS statement installs the VCOM VDD.  VCOM.SYS
communicates with the COM.SYS physical device driver to provide virtual RS-232
asynchronous communications support in the DOS session.

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VCOM.SYS

Related Information:

o Starting a WIN-OS/2 session
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Starting Windows programs in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Starting programs automatically in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 335. Starting a WIN-OS/2 Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start a WIN-OS/2* session to run multiple Windows** programs:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Select WIN-OS/2 Full Screen.

    You return to the desktop when you exit the WIN-OS/2 Program Manager.

Or:

Select the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder on the desktop.

You return to the desktop when you exit the WIN-OS/2 Program Manager.

Or:

 1. Select the Windows Programs folder on the desktop.
 2. Select the program object.

    To run another program on the desktop, repeat these steps.  You return to
    the desktop when you exit a program.

To start a WIN-OS/2 session to run a single Windows program from the desktop:

 1. Select the Windows Programs folder on the desktop.
 2. Select the program object.

    You return to the desktop when you exit a program.

You can select programs after you start the session, or you can set up your
session to start certain programs automatically.  For more information, select
the appropriate topic from "Related Information."

Related Information:

o Starting Windows programs in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Starting a DOS or an OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Starting programs
o Starting programs automatically in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 336. Starting Windows Programs in a WIN-OS/2 Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start a Windows** program in a WIN-OS/2* window session:

Select the program object from the Windows Programs folder, Additional Windows
Programs folder, or WIN-OS/2 Groups folder on the desktop.

Or:

 1. Select Run from the File menu on the WIN-OS/2 Program Manager menu bar.
 2. Type the program path and file name in the Command Line field.
 3. Select OK.

Or:

 1. Select File from the WIN-OS/2 Program Manager menu bar.
 2. Select New.
 3. Add the program to a WIN-OS/2 Program Manager group (for example, the Main
    group).

    The next time you want to start the program, you can select it from its
    WIN-OS/2 Program Manager group list.

Note:   You also can select the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder on the desktop.

Or:

You can set up a WIN-OS/2 session to have specific Windows programs start
automatically each time you start the session.  For more information, select
Starting programs automatically in a WIN-OS/2 session from "Related
Information."

Note:   If your programs do not run the same in the OS/2* operating system as
        they do in Windows, select DOS and WIN-OS/2 optimization and problem
        resolution from "Related Information."  Also, you can start DOS and
        OS/2 programs in a WIN-OS/2 session.  For more information about
        starting DOS and OS/2 programs from a WIN-OS/2 session, select Starting
        a DOS or an OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session from "Related
        Information."  Some Windows programs start DOS programs. After
        migration, these Windows program objects are placed on the desktop in a
        folder with the program name.

Related Information:

o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o Starting a DOS or an OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Starting programs automatically in a WIN-OS/2 session
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 optimization and problem resolution
o Adding new DOS and Windows programs to the desktop


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 337. Adding New DOS and Windows Programs to the Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

After installing a new DOS or Windows** program, you need to add the program to
the desktop.  To do this, you use the Migrate Applications program to migrate
your existing programs and create a program object in a folder on the desktop.
You can double-click on the program object to start the program.  To add a
program to the desktop, follow these steps:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Migrate Applications.  The Find Programs window appears.

For additional help during the migration of programs, select the Help push
button in any window of Migrate Applications.  For a detailed description of
the Migrate Applications program, select Migrate Applications from "Related
Information."

You also can create a program object.  For more information select Creating a
program object using a template below.

Related Information:

o Migrate Applications
o Installing new DOS programs
o Installing new Windows programs
o Installing new OS/2 programs
o Creating a program object using a template
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 optimization and problem resolution


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 338. Exiting from a WIN-OS/2 Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To end a WIN-OS/2* full-screen session, select Exit WIN-OS/2 from the File menu
on the WIN-OS/2 Program Manager menu bar.  You also can select Close from the
WIN-OS/2 Program Manager system menu.

To end a WIN-OS/2 window session, close each program in the Window List.  For
more information, select Closing windows using the window list from "Related
Information."  When you exit the last program, the WIN-OS2 window session ends.

Warning:  Do not close the WIN-OS/2 window session unless you have exited each
program in this session.  Closing this session automatically exits each
program.

Windows** programs run in different WIN-OS/2 sessions:

o WIN-OS/2 full screen
o WIN-OS/2 window
o WIN-OS/2 window, separate session

Each of these session types has unique characteristics.  For more information,
select Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions or Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window
sessions from "Related Information."

To learn how to return to the desktop without ending your WIN-OS/2 session,
select Switching between sessions below.

Related Information:

o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o Switching between sessions
o Switching between running programs
o Closing windows using the window list


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 339. Installing New DOS Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To install a new DOS program:

 1. Follow the program installation instructions.
 2. Select OS/2 System.
 3. Select Command Prompts; then select DOS Full Screen.
 4. Type the installation command as specified in the installation
    instructions.  For example:

        a:install

 5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
 6. When installation is complete, close the Command Prompts folder.
 7. Select System Setup.
 8. Select Migrate Applications to create a program object in a folder on the
    desktop.
 9. When migration is complete, close the System Setup folder.
10. Close the OS/2 System folder.
11. Start the program from the DOS Programs folder or the Additional DOS
    Programs folder on the desktop.

For additional help during migration, select the Help push button in any window
of Migrate Applications.  For a detailed description of the Migrate
Applications program, select Migrate Applications from "Related Information."

Warning:  The OS/2* CONFIG.SYS file might be overwritten with incompatible
information during the installation of some DOS programs.  Should this occur,
refer to "Recovering the CONFIG.SYS File" in the OS/2 2.1 Installation Guide.

Related Information:

o Migrate Applications
o Adding new DOS and Windows programs to the desktop
o Starting programs
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Changing the CONFIG.SYS file for DOS settings
o Installing new OS/2 programs
o Installing new Windows programs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 340. Installing New Windows Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To install a new Windows** program:

 1. Follow the program installation instructions.

    To install the program from a DOS command prompt:

    a) Select OS/2 System; then select Command Prompts.
    b) Select DOS Full Screen.
    c) Type the installation command as specified in the installation
       instructions.  For example:

              a:setup

    d) Follow the instructions on the screen.

    To install the program from the Program Manager:

    a) Select OS/2 System; then select Command Prompts.
    b) Select WIN-OS2 Full Screen.
    c) Select Run from the File menu.
    d) Type the installation command as specified in the installation
       instructions.  For example:

              a:setup

    e) Follow the instructions on the screen.

    Note:   If you are installing a Windows program that does not require the
            Program Manager, the following message appears:  "This program will
            not run in a WIN-OS/2 session.  Use an OS/2 or DOS session to run
            this program."  Try to install the program from a DOS command
            prompt.

 2. When installation is complete, close the Command Prompts folder.
 3. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 4. Select System setup.
 5. Select Migrate Applications to create a program object in a folder on the
    desktop.
 6. When migration is complete, close the System Setup folder.
 7. Close the OS/2 System folder.
 8. Start the program from the Windows Programs folder or the Additional
    Windows Programs folder on the desktop.

Note:   Some Windows programs start DOS programs.  After migration, these
        Windows program objects are placed on the desktop in a folder with the
        program name.

For additional help during migration, select the Help push button in any window
of Migrate Applications.  For a detailed description of the Migrate
Applications program, select Migrate Applications from "Related Information."

Warning:  The OS/2* CONFIG.SYS file might be overwritten with incompatible
information during the installation of some Windows programs.  Should this
occur, refer to "Recovering the CONFIG.SYS File" in the OS/2 2.1 Installation
Guide.

Note:   The Migrate Applications program always sets up Windows programs to run
        in a WIN-OS/2 window session with the OS/2 operating system. For more
        information about programs that run in a WIN-OS/2 window session,
        select Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions from "Related
        Information."

Related Information:

o Migrate Applications
o Adding new DOS and Windows programs to the desktop
o Starting programs
o Installing new DOS programs
o Installing new OS/2 programs
o Changing the CONFIG.SYS file for DOS settings
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 341. Starting Programs Automatically in a WIN-OS/2 Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up a WIN-OS/2* session to start one or more Windows** programs
automatically:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Copy the object that contains the session you want to use.  For more
    information about copying an object, select Copying an Object from "Related
    Information."
 4. Display the pop-up menu for WIN-OS/2 Full Screen.
 5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
 6. Select Settings.
 7. Select Program.
 8. In the Parameters field, type the path and file name for each program you
    want started automatically within the session.  Use commas to separate the
    information for the programs.  Type an exclamation point (!) in front of
    each program you want to appear as an icon when the session starts.

    For example, suppose the path to your Windows programs is MYPROGS, and you
    want your WIN-OS/2 session to start with PROG1 active and an icon
    representing PROG2.  You type:

        myprogs\prog1,!myprogs\prog2

 9. Close the Program Settings window.

You can specify standard (/S) or enhanced compatibility (/3) mode as the first
parameter.  For example, to specify either standard or enhanced compatibility
mode for PROG and PROG2, type one of the following statements:

/S myprogs\prog1,!myprogs\prog2
/3 myprogs\prog1,!myprogs\prog2

If you need more help, select the Help push button after the Program Settings
window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Copying an object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o WIN-OS/2 modes-standard and enhanced compatibility
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 342. WIN-OS/2 Modes-Standard and Enhanced Compatibility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Standard mode is used to run programs written for Microsoft** Windows** Version
3.0 or higher.  Enhanced Compatibility mode is used for programs that require
Microsoft Windows Version 3.1 enhanced.

Note:   All Standard mode programs will run in a WIN-OS/2* enhanced
        compatibility mode session.  You also need to set the WIN_RUN_MODE
        setting to 3.1 Enhanced Compatibility for programs that require
        Microsoft Windows Version 3.1 enhanced.  For more information about
        this setting, select Setting WIN-OS/2 modes below.

Related Information:

o Setting WIN-OS/2 modes
o Virtual device drivers
o Memory extenders
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 video mode considerations


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 343. Setting WIN-OS/2 Modes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can specify a mode for any WIN-OS/2* session or Windows** program by using
WIN_RUN_MODE, the WIN-OS/2 Run mode setting.  For more information about the
WIN_RUN_MODE setting, select WIN_RUN_MODE from "Related Information."  To
change this setting, do the following:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Windows program object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Session.
 4. Select the WIN-OS/2 settings push button.
 5. Select the WIN_RUN_MODE setting.
 6. Select the 3.1 Standard or 3.1 Enhanced Compatibility radio button.
 7. Select Save.

Note:   DOS_AUTOEXEC is a new DOS setting that allows you to define a file that
        runs instead of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  This setting is used to set up
        the environment variables for DOS and WIN-OS/2 sessions.  For more
        information about this setting, select DOS_AUTOEXEC from "Related
        Information."

You also can specify a mode in the Parameters field of a WIN-OS/2 session that
can run one or more Windows programs.  To do this:

 1. Select OS/2 System.
 2. Select Command Prompts.
 3. Display the pop-up menu for WIN-OS/2 Full Screen.
 4. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 5. Select Program.
 6. In the Parameters field, type /S for standard or /3 for enhanced
    compatibility.
 7. Close the Program Settings window.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the Program Settings
window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Displaying pop-up menus
o WIN-OS/2 modes-standard and enhanced compatibility
o WIN_RUN_MODE
o DOS_AUTOEXEC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 344. Switching between Tasks in a WIN-OS/2 Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To switch between tasks in a WIN-OS/2* full-screen session:

 1. Press Ctrl+Esc to display the Task List for WIN-OS/2.
 2. Select the task you want as the active program.

If pressing Ctrl+Esc does not display the Task List, select the KBD_CTRL_BYPASS
(Control-key bypass) WIN-OS/2 setting to reserve this key combination.  To
learn how to change a WIN-OS/2 setting, select Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2
settings from "Related Information."  To switch between sessions, select
Switching between sessions below.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Switching between sessions
o Switching between running programs
o Closing windows using the window list


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 345. Switching between Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To switch between sessions, press Alt+Esc.  The next session might be an OS/2*
session, a DOS session, or a WIN-OS/2* session.

To return to the OS/2 desktop without closing your WIN-OS/2 session, select the
OS/2 Desktop icon at the bottom of the WIN-OS/2 session screen.

You can return directly to your WIN-OS/2 session by selecting the program or
session name from the OS/2 Window List.

Related Information:

o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Starting programs automatically in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Switching between running programs
o Closing windows using the window list


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 346. Working with WIN-OS/2 Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In the OS/2* operating system, you can run Windows** programs.  You also can
start DOS and OS/2 programs in a WIN-OS/2 session.  For more information,
select Starting a DOS or an OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session from "Related
Information."  For more information about starting Windows programs, select
Starting a WIN-OS/2 session from "Related Information."

The clipboard and dynamic data exchange (DDE) features let you share
information.  They default to public in all WIN-OS/2 sessions, but you can make
them private.

Windows programs can run in a WIN-OS/2 full-screen, WIN-OS/2 window, or
WIN-OS/2 window separate session.  For more information about WIN-OS/2 window
sessions, select Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions from "Related
Information."

To start a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session from which you can start multiple
Windows programs:

Select the WIN-OS/2 Full Screen program object from the Command Prompts folder.

Or:

Select the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder on the desktop.

Considerations for using WIN-OS/2 full-screen or WIN-OS/2 Program Manager:

o You can use the WIN-OS/2 Program Manager to run programs.  You can include a
  program in a WIN-OS/2 Program Manager group, then start that program by
  selecting it from the appropriate WIN-OS/2 Program Manager group window.  If
  you exit from a program, this session remains open until you exit from the
  WIN-OS/2 Program Manager.
o You can use the WIN-OS/2 Task List to switch between programs in the session.
o You can increase the value for the DOS setting DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT for a
  WIN-OS/2 session, which enables more programs to run in the session.  For
  more information, select DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT from "Related Information."

Note:   Some Windows programs start DOS programs. After migration, these
        Windows program objects are placed on the desktop in a folder with the
        program name.

Related Information:

o Starting programs
o Starting a DOS or an OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Starting a WIN-OS/2 session
o Starting Windows programs in a WIN-OS/2 session
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o WIN-OS/2 modes-standard and enhanced compatibility
o DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT
o Switching between sessions
o Changing a DOS and WIN-OS/2 session
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Copying or moving information (Clipboard)
o Exchanging data


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 347. Copying or Moving Information (Clipboard) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You use a clipboard to share information between sessions.  You can copy or cut
information from one session or program to the clipboard; then paste the same
information from the clipboard to a different session or program.  By default,
both the WIN-OS/2* and OS/2* clipboards are public.  With the OS/2 operating
system, you have access to different clipboards:

o The OS/2 clipboard accepts information from OS/2 sessions, DOS window
  sessions, a program that has cut, copy, and paste procedures available, one
  or more programs in a WIN-OS/2 session (WIN-OS/2 full-screen or WIN-OS/2
  window), or any combination of these.
o The WIN-OS/2 clipboard exchanges data between public WIN-OS/2 sessions
  (WIN-OS/2 full-screen and WIN-OS/2 window), OS/2, and DOS window sessions.

When the WIN-OS/2 clipboard is private you prevent the programs in OS/2
sessions from copying to, cutting to, or pasting from the WIN-OS/2 clipboard.

Related Information:

o Using a public clipboard
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Using a private WIN-OS/2 clipboard
o Copying to and from DOS and OS/2 sessions
o Using the OS/2 clipboard
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 348. Making the Clipboard and DDE Public or Private for a WIN-OS/2 Separate Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Follow these steps to make the WIN-OS/2* clipboard and dynamic data exchange
(DDE) feature public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate session.     By
default, both the WIN-OS/2 and OS/2* clipboard and DDE are public.

 1. Open the Windows Programs folder.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the program object.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 4. Select Session.
 5. Select the WIN-OS/2 settings push button.
 6. Select the WIN_CLIPBOARD or WIN_DDE setting from the list.
 7. Select the On or Off radio button.
 8. Select Save.
 9. Close the Settings notebook.
10. Restart the program by double-clicking on the program object.

When the WIN-OS/2 clipboard is private, you can use Cut, Copy, and Paste only
within the session.  You also can use these procedures to exchange information
between multiple programs within a WIN-OS/2 session.

Note:   Windows** programs that support DDE can automatically update identical
        data in other DOS (window), Windows, and OS/2 programs, if you select
        public DDE on the Data Exchange page from WIN-OS/2 Setup object, in the
        System Setup folder.  Otherwise, you can share information only with
        other Windows programs.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Copying or moving information (Clipboard)
o Using a private WIN-OS/2 clipboard
o Using a public clipboard
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings, descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 349. Using a Private WIN-OS/2 Clipboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy or move information between two programs or documents in the same
WIN-OS/2* session, you use the Cut, Copy, and Paste procedures defined for your
Windows** program.

To copy or move clipboard information when the WIN-OS/2 clipboard is set to
private:

 1. Mark the information you want to copy or move to a different program or
    session.

    To mark the text or graphics, move the mouse pointer to the beginning of
    the text or graphics you want to mark.  Press and hold mouse button 1 and
    drag the mouse pointer to the end of the text or graphics you want to mark.
    Release the mouse button.  All characters are then highlighted.
 2. Use the program's Copy or Cut menu choice from the Edit pull-down menu to
    put the information in the WIN-OS/2 clipboard.
 3. Open the data file where you want to put the information.
 4. Move the mouse pointer to where you want the information to appear.
 5. Use the program's Paste menu choice from the Edit pull-down menu to insert
    the information.

Related Information:

o Using a public clipboard
o Making windows active
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 350. Using a Public Clipboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Follow these steps to copy or cut information to a public clipboard.  By
default, both the WIN-OS/2* and OS/2* clipboards are public.

 1. Mark the information you want to copy or move to a different program or
    session.

    To mark the text or graphics, move the mouse pointer to the beginning of
    the text or graphics you want to mark.  Press and hold mouse button 1 and
    drag the mouse pointer to the end of the text or graphics you want to mark.
    Release the mouse button.  All characters are then highlighted.
 2. Use the program's Copy or Cut menu choice from the Edit pull-down menu to
    put the information in the clipboard.

To copy information from a clipboard:

 1. Open the data file where you want to put the information.
 2. Move the mouse pointer to where you want the information to appear.
 3. Use the program's Paste menu choice from the Edit pull-down menu to insert
    the information.

Note:   If you are using a DOS window or OS/2 window, display the pop-up menu
        to see the Mark, Copy, and Paste menu choices.

Related Information:

o Making windows active
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Copying to and from DOS and OS/2 sessions
o Copying or moving information (Clipboard)
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 351. Exchanging Data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you want changes made in one data file or session to cause the same changes
to be made in another data file or session, use the dynamic data exchange (DDE)
feature.  To use this feature, a program must be capable of DDE.

By default, the OS/2* and WIN-OS/2* DDE is public.  This allows you to exchange
information between programs running in OS/2, WIN-OS/2, and DOS sessions.

You can make the WIN-OS/2*  DDE private if you only want to exchange
information between programs in the same multiple-program WIN-OS/2 session.
For more information, select Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for
a WIN-OS/2 separate session below.

Related Information:

o Dynamic data exchange
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 352. Dynamic Data Exchange ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When data associated through dynamic data exchange (DDE) is changed in one
session, you can have the system change the same information in other sessions,
either on demand or automatically.  Your program must be capable of using DDE.

For example, if you (1) create a spreadsheet, (2) copy the spreadsheet to a
report, then (3) change the spreadsheet in the report file, the same changes
can occur in the original spreadsheet file.

Some programs let you select either on-demand or automatic dynamic data
exchange.  On-demand means you must request the update between sessions.
Automatic means information is updated as soon as changes occur in one session.

For more information about DDE, select the appropriate topic from "Related
Information."

Related Information:

o Exchanging data
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for all WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 353. Making the Clipboard and DDE Public or Private for All WIN-OS/2 Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use WIN-OS/2 Setup to select the clipboard and dynamic data exchange (DDE)
settings for all your WIN-OS/2* sessions.  If you want to change the clipboard
and DDE settings for a single program, use the pop-up menu of the program
object.  For more information, select Making the clipboard and DDE public or
private for a WIN-OS/2 separate session.

By default, the WIN-OS/2 clipboard and dynamic data exchange (DDE) are public.
To change the default clipboard or DDE for WIN-OS/2 sessions:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select WIN-OS/2 Setup.
 4. Select Data Exchange.
 5. Select the public or private radio button for Dynamic Data Exchange or
    Clipboard.
 6. Close the WIN-OS/2 Setup Settings notebook.

Note:   The default is not changed for previously set clipboard and DDE for
        WIN-OS/2 sessions that are currently running.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Making the clipboard and DDE public or private for a WIN-OS/2 separate
  session
o Exchanging data
o Dynamic data exchange


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 354. Migrate Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Migrate Applications object to create program objects for DOS,
Windows**, and OS/2* programs that you have installed on your hard disk.  Each
program object is placed in a folder on the desktop.  You can double-click on
the program object to start a program.  If your DOS or Windows program is in
the migrate database, the Migrate Applications program automatically selects
the DOS settings that work best for your program.

The feature of the OS/2 operating system that provides Windows program support
is called WIN-OS/2*.  The Migrate Applications program always sets up Windows
programs to run in a WIN-OS/2 window session.  For more information about
programs that run in a WIN-OS/2 window session, select Windows programs in
WIN-OS/2 window sessions from "Related Information."

You would use the Migrate Applications program as follows:

o During installation of the OS/2 operating system, if you have DOS, OS/2, or
  Windows programs already installed on your hard disk.
o After installation, if you add a DOS, OS/2, or Windows program to a working
  OS/2 operating system

To start the Migrate Applications program, follow these steps.  For help at any
time, select the Help push button in any window of the Migrate Applications
program.

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the Desktop folder.
 2. Select System setup.
 3. Select Migrate Applications.

    The Find Programs window appears.  The Database field displays the OS/2
    operating system default database (DATABASE.DAT).  The Migrate Applications
    program compares programs on your hard disk with the list of programs in
    the database and places any that match in a DOS, OS/2, or Windows Programs
    folder on the desktop.
 4. From the Drives field, deselect the drives you do not want to search; the
    default is that all drives are selected.
 5. Deselect any of the types of programs you do not want to migrate in the
    Program type field; otherwise, the default is to migrate all the listed
    programs.
 6. Select Find.  The Migrate Programs window appears.  Programs are listed in
    the Applications list.

    If your program is not in the list:

    a) Select Add Programs.  The Add Programs window appears.  Programs are
       listed in the Available Programs field.
    b) Select a program.  The Working directory and Program title fields are
       filled in.  You can type a new title if you want.
    c) Type the appropriate parameters in the Parameters field.  (Refer to the
       instructions that came with your program.)
    d) Select the types of programs to migrate in the Program type list.

       The Migrate Applications program creates Additional Programs folders
       based on the types of programs you specify (for example, an Additional
       DOS Programs folder and an Additional Windows Programs folder).
    e) Select Add.  The program moves to the Selected Programs field.
    f) Select OK.  The Migrate Programs window appears.

 7. Select Migrate to migrate all the selected programs.  When migration is
    complete, the Find Programs window appears.
 8. Select Exit.

The Migrate Applications program creates a DOS Programs folder, a Windows
Programs folder, and a WIN-OS/2 Groups folder.  The programs in these folders
have preselected settings that work best for the performance of your programs.
It also creates an OS/2 Programs folder.

If you use the Add Programs push button, the Migration Applications program
creates the Additional DOS Programs folder and the Additional Windows Programs
folder.  It also creates the Additional OS/2 Programs folder, if you select
OS/2 programs.  The programs in these folders have default settings.  If these
programs do not run correctly, you can specify other settings.  Select DOS and
WIN-OS/2 settings from "Related Information."  In addition to creating these
folders, the Migration Applications program migrates the WIN-OS/2 Program
Manager groups to folders on the desktop.

Some Windows programs start DOS programs.  These Windows program objects are
placed on the desktop in a folder with the program name.

Instead of using the default database, DATABASE.DAT, you can use the PARSEDB
utility program to create your own database.  For more information, select the
Help push button in any Find Programs window, or select Creating a migration
database from "Related Information."

Note:   If your computer had a previous version of the OS/2 operating system,
        you might see a folder on your desktop with the same name as one of
        your old groups.  This folder contains program objects that represent
        your old programs; however, the Migrate Applications program also puts
        these programs and program objects in other folders (DOS Programs or
        Windows Programs folders).  Use the program objects in these folders
        rather than the old group name folders because the preselected settings
        will work best for the performance of your programs.

Related Information:

o Starting a WIN-OS/2 session
o Installing new DOS programs
o Installing new Windows programs
o Creating a migration database
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions
o Installing new OS/2 programs
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 video mode considerations


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 355. Creating a Migration Database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Migrate Applications program uses information from a database during
program migration.  A default database (DATABASE.DAT) is supplied with the
OS/2* operating system.  DATABASE.DAT appears in the Database field on the Find
Programs window.

If the default database does not contain your programs, you can use the PARSEDB
utility program to create your own binary database from a text file. To start
PARSEDB, type the following statement from a command prompt:

PARSEDB [path] DBTAGS.DAT [path] text_database [path] binary_database

where:

o DBTAGS.DAT is the file name that contains the definitions for the tags used
  to define the DOS settings.
o text_database is the name of the file that contains the program settings for
  a specific DOS, OS/2 or Windows** program.
o binary_database is the name of the new migration database file.

For example, type the following statement to use PARSEDB to create a database
named MYDATA.DAT:

PARSEDB DBTAGS.DAT MYDATA.TXT MYDATA.DAT

Important  You must specify a file name for your binary database file to
           prevent the PARSEDB utility program from overwriting the default
           database file (DATABASE.DAT).

When creating a text database file, each program must have the following
migration information:

name title type assoc_file def_dir

where:

o name is the name of the file that runs the program.
o title is the program object name that appears below the icon.
o assoc_file is a file name associated with the file name specified in the Name
  field.  Use this file name to uniquely identify the program.
o def_dir is the directory that the program is installed into if the default is
  accepted during program installation.

assoc_file and def_dir can have NULL values; NULL values must be included when
defining the program if you cannot provide specific values for these fields.

When creating MYDATA.TXT, group the settings for a given program on consecutive
lines.  Use blank lines to mark the end of a program's settings.

Begin non-blank lines with a token. The tag file defines valid token settings,
limits, and default values for various DOS properties.

Select the Examples push button for an example of a database text file based on
DATABASE.TXT.

The settings are described in the DBTAGS.DAT file.  Lines in the tag file are
of the following form:

index value type [optional comments]

where:

o index is a number.
o value is the name of the setting.
o type is the type of the value.

type is one of the following:

NOP      Type for comments; any line with this type is ignored.
STR      Type for a string value.
INT      Type for an integer value.
BOOL     Type with a value of On or Off.
BYTE     Type for a program, either DOS, OS/2, or Windows.
MLSTR    Type for a multi-line string with component lines on individual lines
         in the text database file.

Using these types, you can define various settings for programs.  DBTAGS.DAT
contains definitions for these types and settings used within the OS/2
operating system.  To see an example of DBTAGS.DAT, refer to the OS/2 2.1
Installation Guide.  Do not edit the tag file or create a new one; the tag file
is available only as a reference when creating the MYDATA.TXT file.

PARSEDB checks the validity of all entries in MYDATA.TXT and compares them to
the settings definitions in the tag file.  If all entries are valid, PARSEDB
creates a binary database named MYDATA.DAT.

Errors in the text file cause PARSEDB to exit and display a message:

o A message that a file is corrupted indicates embedded ASCII NUL characters in
  the text file.
o A message indicating an invalid setting indicates the use of a setting not
  found in the tag file.  This message includes a line number and a file name.
o A message indicating that an entry has missing parameters indicates the
  absence of the minimum settings for the entry.

Note:   PARSEDB does not check for duplicate entries in the tag file or the
        text file.  It also does not require settings to be in any particular
        order and is not case sensitive.

Related Information:

o Installing new DOS programs
o Installing new OS/2 programs
o Installing new Windows programs
o Migrate Applications
o DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Database Text File Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXAMPLE:

REM =================================================================
REM Migration data for DOS, Windows, and OS/2 applications.
REM =========================data begins=============================
REM -----------------------------------------------------------------
REM Current by IBM
REM -----------------------------------------------------------------
    NAME                          CURRENT.EXE
    TITLE                         CURRENT
    TYPE                          Windows
    ASSOC_FILE                    CURRENT.COM
    DEF_DIR                       \CURRENT
    MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS        ON
    KBD_CTRL_BYPASS               CTRL_ESC

For more information, refer to the OS/2 2.1 Installation Guide.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 356. Installing a WIN-OS/2 Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the printer drivers supplied with the OS/2* operating system support your
printer model, you do not need to install the equivalent WIN-OS/2* printer
driver.  When you install an OS/2 printer driver, the operating system prompts
you for the diskette that contains the driver you need.  To learn how to
install an OS/2 printer driver, select Installing printer drivers from "Related
Information."  To see a list of printer drivers that the operating system
supports, select WIN-OS/2 printer drivers below.

To learn how to install a printer driver that is neither an OS/2 nor a WIN-OS/2
printer driver, select Adding an unlisted printer below.

Related Information:

o Installing printer drivers
o WIN-OS/2 printer drivers
o Setting up a WIN-OS/2 printer
o Adding an unlisted printer
o Printer drivers, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 357. WIN-OS/2 Printer Drivers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Following is a list of WIN-OS/2* printers.  Also listed are the appropriate
drivers that are on the OS/2* Printer Driver Diskettes.  During the
installation of the OS/2 operating system, these printer drivers are
automatically installed when you select the associated OS/2 printer driver.

Model                            Driver
Epson** (24-pin)                 EPSON24.DRV
Epson (9-pin)                    EPSON9.DRV
Generic-text only                TTY.DRV
IBM* Proprinter* (9-pin)         PROPRINT.DRV
IBM Proprinter (24-pin)          PROPRN24.DRV
IBM 3852 Inkjet Printer          IBMCOLOR.DRV
IBM 4019 Laser Printer           IBM4019.DRV
IBM 5152 Graphics Printer        IBMGRX.DRV
Postscript**                     PSCRIPT.DRV

Following is a list of WIN-OS/2 printers.  Also listed are the appropriate
drivers that are on the OS/2 Printer Driver Diskettes.  These printer drivers
need to be installed through the WIN-OS/2 Control Panel after the OS/2
operating system is installed.  You need to select a port that has an OS/2
IBMNULL device driver associated with it.  For more information, select Setting
up a WIN-OS/2 printer from "Related Information."

Model                         Driver
Canon** LBP-8II               LBP8II.DRV
Canon LBP-8III & LBP-4        CANONIII.DRV
C-ITOH** 8510                 CITOH.DRV
HP** Thinkjet                 THINKJET.DRV
IBM Quietwriter** III         QWIII.DRV
Olivetti**                    OLIPRIN2.DRV
Olivetti                      OLIPRINT.DRV
Olivetti DM 600               DM600.DRV
Olivetti TH 760               TH760.DRV
TI** 850                      TI850.DRV
Toshiba**                     TOSHIBA.DRV
Fujitsu** Dot Matrix          FUJIMTRX.DRV
NEC** PinWriter               NEC24PIN.DRV

Note:   Some printer drivers might be supplied by the printer manufacturer.
        For more information, select Adding an unlisted printer from "Related
        Information."

Related Information:

o Installing printer drivers
o Installing a WIN-OS/2 printer driver
o Setting up a WIN-OS/2 printer
o Adding an unlisted printer
o Printer drivers, description of


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 358. Adding an Unlisted Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Normally, you select the appropriate printer driver for your printer from the
OS/2* Printer Driver Diskettes.  To add a printer driver supplied by the
printer manufacturer:

 1. Start a WIN-OS/2* session by double-clicking on WIN-OS/2 full screen in the
    Command Prompts folder.
 2. Select the WIN-OS/2 Control Panel; then select the Printers object.
 3. Select Add printer.
 4. Select Unlisted Printer from the list of printers; then select Install.
    The Add unlisted printer window appears.
 5. Select  the directory where the printer driver is located.
 6. Type the driver name in the Driver Name field.
 7. Select OK.
 8. Select the driver from the Driver Files list.
 9. Select OK.

You must select a port for the printer.  To do this, select Setting up a
WIN-OS/2 printer below.

Related Information:

o Starting a WIN-OS/2 session
o Setting up a WIN-OS/2 printer
o WIN-OS/2 printer drivers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 359. Setting up a WIN-OS/2 Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up a WIN-OS/2* printer driver that is supplied on one of the OS/2*
Printer Driver Diskettes:

 1. Select the Printers object in the WIN-OS/2 Control Panel.
 2. Select Configure.
 3. Select LPT1.OS2 or LPT2.OS2 as the printer port.
 4. Select Setup.
 5. Select the printer you want to use.
 6. Select OK; then select OK again.

If you also want to create an OS/2 printer object for use with the same driver:

 1. Select OS/2 Desktop at the bottom of the WIN-OS/2 screen.
 2. Create a printer object that has the OS/2 printer driver, IBMNULL, as its
    default driver.  IBMNULL is installed during system installation.
 3. For the printer object, select the same port you selected for your printer
    in the WIN-OS/2 Control Panel.  To learn how to do this, select Changing
    the printer port below.

Related Information:

o Starting a WIN-OS/2 session
o WIN-OS/2 printer drivers
o Installing printer drivers
o Changing the printer port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 360. Extended Memory Specification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Lotus**/ Intel**/ Microsoft**/ AST** eXtended Memory Specification (LIMA
XMS) offers 18 functions for an extended memory programming interface that can
access memory above 1MB and is addressable by computers with an Intel 80x86 (or
later) microprocessor.  XMS addresses three regions of memory:

o Upper memory blocks (UMBs), which are regions of memory between 640KB and 1MB
  that DOS can use as conventional memory.
o High memory area (HMA), which is the first 64KB of extended memory (from
  address 1MB to 1MB plus 64KB).  A real mode program can access memory in this
  region as though it were conventional memory.
o An extended memory block, which is a block of extended memory above the HMA.
  When you run specific DOS, a program cannot access extended memory blocks;
  they serve only for data storage.  When you run an OS/2* DOS session, memory
  in an extended memory block region can be moved to conventional memory, and a
  conventional memory region can be moved to the extended memory block region.
  In practice, the maximum extended memory block region is 16MB, divided into
  as many as 255 blocks.

Related Information:

o Memory extenders
o Expanded memory specification
o DOS protected mode interface
o XMS_HANDLES
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 361. Expanded Memory Specification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Lotus**/ Intel**/ Microsoft** Expanded Memory Specification (LIM EMS)
provides a standard interface that can access memory above 1MB and is
addressable by computers with an Intel 80x86 (or later) microprocessor.  The
specification allows for up to 32MB of expanded memory.  A region of expanded
memory can be mapped into an address space below 1MB when a DOS program needs
the contents stored in the expanded memory.

Related Information:

o Memory extenders
o Extended memory specification
o DOS protected mode interface
o EMS_FRAME_LOCATION
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 362. DOS Protected Mode Interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The DOS Protected Mode Interface (DPMI) specification provides a standard
interface that can access memory above 1MB and is addressable by computers with
an Intel** 80x86 (or later) microprocessor. The OS/2* operating system allows
for use of up to 512MB of memory per session.

Protected mode refers to the operational mode that enables an Intel
microprocessor to use the address space above 1MB.  In this mode, the
microprocessor also provides memory protection and prevents access to certain
operating system instructions, called privileged instructions.

Related Information:

o Memory extenders
o Extended memory specification
o Expanded memory specification
o DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o DPMI_NETWORK_BUFF_SIZE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 363. Memory Extenders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DOS can address up to 1MB of memory.  By convention, DOS loads video drivers
and other device drivers between 640KB and 1MB, and loads programs and data in
the area below 640KB.  DOS extenders take control from DOS to manage upper
memory.  The OS/2* operating system supports three different approaches to DOS
memory extension:

o Lotus**/ Intel**/ Microsoft** Expanded Memory Specification (LIM EMS)
o Lotus/Intel/Microsoft/ AST** eXtended Memory Specification (LIMA XMS)
o DOS Protected Mode Interface (DPMI).

Your program documentation should indicate which of these approaches to use.
For a more detailed description of any of these methods, select the appropriate
topic below.

Related Information:

o Expanded Memory Specification
o Extended Memory Specification
o DOS Protected Mode Interface
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 364. Starting a Specific DOS Version ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You might need a specific DOS version if you want to use a program that does
not run correctly in DOS emulation.  For example, you might use a specific DOS
version if a DOS program uses an IBM* 3363 Optical Disk Drive whose driver does
not load into an emulated DOS session.

Choose one of the following to load a specific DOS version:

diskette
     If you have a startable DOS diskette, you can select an object called DOS
     from Drive A to start the DOS session.  For more information, select
     Starting DOS from a diskette from "Related Information."
DOS partition on drive C
     This is the recommended method, if you have enough space on your hard disk
     to install the specific version of DOS.  For more information, select
     Starting DOS from a partition from "Related Information."
image file
     This choice enables you to run DOS from the hard disk without creating a
     separate DOS partition.  For more information, select Starting DOS from an
     image file from "Related Information."

Related Information:

o Starting DOS from a diskette
o Starting DOS from a partition
o Starting DOS from an image file
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 365. Changing CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT for a Specific DOS Version ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Make these changes to the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files, which are on the
startup DOS diskette or in the DOS partition on the hard disk.

Warning:  Do not change the OS/2* CONFIG.SYS file or the AUTOEXEC.BAT file for
an emulated DOS session.  Changing these files might affect the way a session
starts.

In the DOS CONFIG.SYS file:

 1. Add the following line before any statement that contains a reference to a
    file:

        DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS

    FSFILTER is a device driver that provides access between the DOS and the
    OS/2 operating system files.
 2. Edit any reference to an XMS (HIMEM.SYS) or EMS (EMM386.SYS) device driver
    so that it refers to the device drivers in the \OS2\MDOS directory of the
    OS/2 operating system startup volume.  For example, if the OS/2 operating
    system is installed on drive C, do the following:

    a) Change the DEVICE=HIMEM.SYS statement to:

              DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\HIMEM.SYS

    b) Change the DEVICE=\DOS\EMM386.SYS statement to:

              DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\EMM386.SYS

    These device drivers work only in an OS/2 specific DOS session.

 3. Check for references to program names, such as utility programs.  Before
    each reference, insert the drive and path names.
 4. Delete any mouse driver statement.  Follow the instructions below to add a
    replacement mouse driver to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

In the DOS AUTOEXEC.BAT file:

 1. If you use a mouse, reference the OS/2 mouse driver.  For example, if the
    OS/2 operating system is installed on drive C, add the following line:

        C:\OS2\MDOS\MOUSE

    If the OS/2 operating system is installed on a different drive, change the
    drive letter accordingly.
 2. Check for references to program names, such as utility programs. Before
    each reference, insert the drive and path names.

Related Information:

o Starting a specific DOS version
o Starting DOS from a diskette
o Starting DOS from an image file
o Starting DOS from a partition


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 366. Starting DOS from a Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up a DOS session that loads DOS from a diskette:

 1. Create a DOS startup diskette.  Use the instructions in the documentation
    for your DOS program.
 2. If the startup diskette does not have the files CONFIG.SYS and
    AUTOEXEC.BAT, copy them from your DOS program diskette to the startup
    diskette you just created.
 3. Copy the FSFILTER.SYS program-file object to your DOS startup diskette or
    start a DOS or OS/2* session, then type:

        COPY \OS2\MDOS\FSFILTER.SYS A:

 4. Make the required changes to the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files on the
    startup diskette you just created.  For detailed help, select the
    appropriate topic from "Related Information."
 5. Create a new DOS session object.  For more information, select Copying an
    object and Changing names of objects from "Related Information."
 6. In the DOS Settings page of the new DOS session object, type A: in the
    DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE Value field.  Be sure to type the colon.  This setting
    enables the operating system to find your specific DOS version.  To learn
    how to set this field, select Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings from
    "Related Information."

To learn how to use your DOS startup diskette with a DOS session, select Using
DOS from Drive A below.

Related Information:

o Finding an object
o Copying an object
o Changing names of objects
o Changing CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT for a specific DOS version
o DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE
o Using DOS from drive A
o Starting a DOS session
o Starting an OS/2 session
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 367. Starting DOS from an Image File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up a DOS session that loads DOS from a file on your hard disk:

 1. Create a DOS startup diskette.  To learn what the startup diskette must
    contain, select Starting DOS from a diskette from "Related Information."
 2. Use the VMDISK program utility to create an image of the startup diskette
    and place that image on your hard disk.

    Note:   This procedure creates an image file, which looks like a diskette
            only to a DOS session using it.  Therefore, you cannot read the
            contents of the diskette image outside of that session.


 3. Create a new DOS session object.  For more information, select Copying an
    object and Changing names of objects from "Related Information."
 4. In the DOS Settings page of the new DOS session object, type the path and
    file name of the image file in the Value field for the DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE
    setting.  For example, if you created an image file on C:\DOS3\DOS33.IMG,
    type:

        C:\DOS3\DOS33.IMG

    Putting the image file location in the DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE setting for a
    particular DOS session enables the operating system to find your specific
    DOS version and automatically start it when you start the session.  To
    learn how to set this field, select DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE below.

Note:   If you start DOS from an image file, you cannot use physical drive A
        until you release the image file.  See Releasing drive A below.

Related Information:

o Starting DOS from a diskette
o Copying an object
o Changing names of objects
o VMDISK
o DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE
o Changing DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Starting a DOS session
o Releasing drive A


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 368. Starting DOS from a Partition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To start a specific version of DOS from a DOS partition, do the following:

Note:   You only can start a specific DOS session from a partition if the OS/2*
        operating system is installed in an extended partition.  You cannot
        start a specific DOS session from a Dual Boot partition.

 1. If necessary, create a DOS partition large enough for the specific DOS
    version you want to install.  Use FDISK or FDISKPM to create the partition.
    To determine how much room you need, refer to the OS/2 2.1 Installation
    Guide.  You must use drive C for DOS and drive D (or higher) for the OS/2
    operating system.
 2. Install DOS in its partition on drive C using the instructions that come
    with the DOS program.  For more information, refer to "Installing Multiple
    Operating Systems (Boot Manager)" in the OS/2 2.1 Installation Guide.
 3. Copy the FSFILTER.SYS program-file object to your DOS partition.  Start a
    DOS or OS/2 session from the Command Prompts folder, then type:

        COPY \OS2\MDOS\FSFILTER.SYS C:\

 4. Make the required changes to the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files in the
    partition you just created.  To learn what changes you need, select
    Changing CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT for a specific DOS version from
    "Related Information."
 5. Create a new DOS session object.  For more information, select Copying an
    object and Changing names of objects from "Related Information."
 6. In the DOS Settings page of the new DOS session object, set the
    DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE Value field to C:.  Be sure to include the colon.
 7. Double-click on the new object to start the specific DOS session.

Related Information:

o Finding an object
o Copying an object
o Changing names of objects
o Changing CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT for a specific DOS version
o FDISK
o FDISKPM
o DOS_STARTUP_DRIVE
o Changing DOS or WIN-OS/2 settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 369. Using DOS from Drive A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Before you can use a specific DOS version from a diskette, you must create a
DOS startup diskette to use with the OS/2* operating system.  For detailed
information, select Starting DOS from a diskette from "Related Information."

To use the startup diskette:

 1. Insert the DOS startup diskette in drive A.
 2. Select OS/2 System.
 3. Select Command Prompts.
 4. Select DOS from Drive A.

Related Information:

o Starting DOS from a diskette


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 370. Releasing Drive A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To use physical drive A after you start DOS from an image file:

At the specific DOS command prompt, type:

FSACCESS A:

Note:   If you started DOS from an image file, you cannot use the image file
        after you issue the FSACCESS command to release drive A.  Do not use a
        PATH or COMSPEC statement that refers to the image file after you issue
        FSACCESS.

Related Information:

o Starting a DOS session
o FSACCESS
o PATH
o COMSPEC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 371. DOS and WIN-OS/2 Video Mode Considerations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Based on your system configuration, the OS/2* operating system runs OS/2, DOS,
and Windows** programs in a window session or a full-screen session.

The OS/2 operating system supports a variety of display adapters, such as the
color graphics adapter (CGA), enhanced graphics adapter (EGA), video graphics
adapter (VGA), 8514/A adapter, extended graphics adapter (XGA*), and super VGA
(SVGA) adapter.

The OS/2 operating system supports the following SVGA chip sets:

o Tseng Labs ET4000
o ATI** 28800
o Cirrus Logic CL-GO5422 and CL-GD5424
o IBM* VGA256C and SVGA-NI
o Western Digital** WD90C11, WD90C30, and WD90C31 (in WD90C30 compatibility
  mode)
o Headland Technologies** HT209
o Trident Microsystems** TVGA 8900B and 8900C

OS/2, DOS, and Windows programs can run successfully in both foreground and
background sessions.  Usually, you do not need to be concerned with the
graphics modes that a program uses, or whether a program will run successfully
in a background session.

With some display adapters, OS/2 2.1 has limitations when running certain DOS
and Windows graphics programs in the background.  This is because of the
difficulty of providing virtual access to the display adapter hardware without
interrupting either the foreground session or other background sessions.  For
more information, refer to OS/2 2.1 Using the Operating System.

Video mode considerations:

o CGA, EGA, and 8514 resolutions only support full-screen WIN-OS/2* sessions.
o VGA, XGA, and SVGA resolutions support WIN-OS/2 window sessions and WIN-OS/2
  full-screen sessions.

While in the background or windowed, a DOS application does not own the display
hardware.  OS/2 2.1 will either continue to run the application or suspend it,
based on the application's resource requirements.  When a session is suspended,
its video state is saved and will be restored when the session returns to the
foreground.

Under certain conditions, DOS programs that utilize graphical display modes
will be suspended when they attempt to write to the display.  These conditions
can be summarized as follows:

VGA adapter
     DOS programs that use 256 colors with resolutions greater than 320 x 200
     or 16 colors with resolutions greater than 640 x 480 will be suspended
     when the program is in a background session and the desktop does not have
     control of the display.
SVGA adapter running in 16 color mode
     DOS programs that use 256 colors with resolutions greater than 320 x 200
     or 16 colors with resolutions greater than 640 x 480 will be suspended
     when the program is in a background session and the desktop does not have
     control of the display.
SVGA adapter running in 256 color mode
     DOS programs that use 256 colors with resolutions greater than 320 x 200
     or any 16 color graphics mode will be suspended when the program is in a
     background session and the desktop does not have control of the display.
XGA adapter and the desktop is running in XGA mode
     DOS programs that use XGA graphics modes, 256 colors with resolutions
     greater than 320 x 200, or any 16 color graphics mode will be suspended
     when the program is in a background full-screen session.  They cannot run
     in a window on the desktop.
XGA adapter and the desktop is running in VGA mode
     DOS programs that use 256 colors with resolutions greater than 320 x 200
     or 16 colors with resolutions greater than 640 x 480 will be suspended
     when the application is in a background session and the desktop does not
     have control of the display.
8514/A adapter and the desktop is running in 8514 mode
     DOS programs that use 8514 high resolution, 256 colors with resolutions
     greater than 320 x 200, or 16 colors with resolutions greater than 640 x
     480 will be suspended when the program is in a background full-screen
     session.  They cannot run in a window on the desktop.
8514/A adapter and the desktop is running in VGA mode
     DOS programs that use 256 colors with resolutions greater than 320 x 200
     or 16 colors with resolutions greater than 640 x 480 will be suspended
     when the program is in a background session and the desktop does not have
     control of the display.
EGA adapter
     DOS programs that use EGA mode to write to the display will be suspended
     when the program is in a background session and the desktop does not have
     control of the display.

All WIN-OS/2 full-screen display drivers provided with OS/2 2.1 only write to
the display when the full-screen session is in the foreground.  They suppress
all background operations that write to the display.  This enables a Windows
program to continue running while the session is in the background.  When the
session is in the foreground, the Windows program automatically redraws itself.
For more information, select VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION from "Related
Information."

Some Windows full-screen display drivers that are not shipped with OS/2 2.1
might not be designed to suppress background writing to the display.  If you
have a display driver that was not shipped with OS/2 2.1, it might cause a
Windows program to suspend under certain conditions.  These conditions are
similar to those described above for DOS programs.

Related Information:

o VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION
o Installing new Windows programs
o Migrate Applications
o WIN-OS/2 modes-standard and enhanced compatibility
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 window sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 372. Windows Programs in WIN-OS/2 Window Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

All Windows** programs defined as a WIN-OS/2* window session run in the same
session.  To run a program in its own session, you must define the program as a
separate WIN-OS/2 window session. When you run one or more Windows programs in
a WIN-OS/2 window session, consider the following:

o You can run two WIN-OS/2 window sessions at a time.
o The first program started in these sessions determines the DOS and WIN-OS/2
  settings for all programs running in these sessions (for example, the
  DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT setting).
o You only can change settings for an open session if it is a separate WIN-OS/2
  window session.
o To run a program in its own session with specific DOS or WIN-OS/2 settings,
  select Separate session from the Session Page in the Settings notebook.  For
  more information about changing a WIN-OS/2 session, select Changing a DOS and
  WIN-OS/2 session from "Related Information."
o You cannot change DOS or WIN-OS/2 settings for programs defined to run in a
  WIN-OS/2 window session while the session is active.
o The DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings push buttons are not available during a
  WIN-OS/2 window session.  Therefore, you cannot change settings for any of
  the programs currently running in the WIN-OS/2 window session.
o From the desktop, use the Window list to switch between programs.  For more
  information, select Switching between running programs below.
o To exit a session, you must exit each program in the session.  For more
  information, select Exiting from a WIN-OS/2 Session from "Related
  Information."
o Increasing the value for the DOS setting DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT for a WIN-OS/2
  session enables more programs to run in this session.  For more information,
  select DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT below.

Related Information:

o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions
o Changing and saving DOS and WIN-OS/2 settings
o Changing a DOS and WIN-OS/2 session
o Switching between running programs
o WIN-OS/2 modes-standard and enhanced compatibility
o Exiting from a WIN-OS/2 session
o DPMI_MEMORY_LIMIT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 373. Starting a DOS or an OS/2 Program in a WIN-OS/2 Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can start a DOS or an OS/2* program in a WIN-OS/2* session.  To start a DOS
or an OS/2 program in a WIN-OS/2 session, do the following:

 1. Select Run from the File menu on the WIN-OS/2 Program Manager menu bar.
 2. Type the program path and file name in the Command Line field.
 3. Select OK.

Or:

 1. Select the WIN-OS/2 Main group from the WIN-OS/2 Program Manager.
 2. Select File Manager.
 3. Select the program name from the directory tree.

Note:   When you end the program, you return to the WIN-OS/2 session.

Related Information:

o Starting a WIN-OS/2 session
o Adding new DOS and Windows programs to the desktop
o Exiting from a WIN-OS/2 session
o WIN-OS/2 modes-standard and enhanced compatibility
o Working with WIN-OS/2 sessions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 374. Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A network is a configuration of data-processing devices (such as disks,
printers, and plotters) and software connected for information interchange.  If
you have authorization to gain access to devices that are assigned to a
network, and your system is configured for communicating with these network
devices, then you have a Network folder on your desktop.

The shared resources in your network might include data that several people
need to use, programs that a number of people can use at one time, and printers
or plotters.  Some networks contain servers, which are computers that connect
and control these resources.

Because network users can share information stored on the network, a network
administrator controls which users are authorized to use each network resource
or group of resources.  You might need to log in to use one of these folders,
or even the objects inside it.  Your system might automatically log you in when
you select a network object, or it might require that you type your login
information before you can view or use a network object.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Logging in to a network object
o File and directory concepts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 375. Viewing Network Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select Network.  The Network folder on your desktop might have one folder
    inside, or more than one, each of which represents a different type of
    network.
 2. Select the folder that has the name of the network you want to use.  A
    window is displayed.  If your network has servers, the window contains
    folders for servers assigned to that network.  If your network has no
    server folders, the window contains directories, printers, plotters, or all
    of these.
 3. If your network has servers, select the server folder.  A window is
    displayed in which you can see the directories and printer objects assigned
    to that server.
 4. To gain access to a data-file object or program object, select the
    directory that contains it.  To see network print jobs, select the printer
    object.

If a Login window is displayed during any of the preceding steps, type your
user identification, and your password (if a password is required).

Note:   If you use a network object frequently, consider creating a shadow of
        the object outside the Network folder, for example, in another folder
        that you use often.  You then can view it next to objects assigned to
        your local system.

Related Information:

o Creating a shadow of an object
o File and directory concepts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 376. Logging In to a Network Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you need to log in to a network group, a server, a network directory, or a
network printer object, so that you can use it with a program or
operating-system command:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the folder or printer object you need to use.
 2. Select Login.  A Login window is displayed.
 3. Type your user identification, and your password (if a password is
    required).
 4. Select OK.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Logging out from a network object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 377. Logging Out from a Network Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you are logged in to a network group, server, directory, or printer object
that you are finished using:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the folder or printer object.
 2. Select Logout.  A window is displayed so you can confirm that this is the
    object from which you want to remove your login.
 3. Select OK.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Note:   Log out you when leave your workstation.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Logging in to a network object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 378. Assigning a Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To use a program that does not recognize network directories by their network
name, or to use operating-system commands (such as COPY) with network
information:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network directory.
 2. Select Assign drive.  A window is displayed.
 3. Select a drive designation in the Assign drive field.
 4. Select OK.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Note:   A new object representing the assigned drive is displayed in the Drives
        folder.  As long as the directory remains available, the drive remains
        assigned, even if you restart your system.  Unassign the drive to
        remove it from the Drives folder.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Using an assigned drive-examples
o Unassigning a drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 379. Unassigning a Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To free a drive designation that is assigned to a network directory:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network directory.
 2. Select Unassign drive.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Assigning a drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 380. Assigning a Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To use a program that does not recognize a network printer or plotter by its
network name, or to use operating-system commands (such as COPY or PRINT) with
a network device:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network printer object.
 2. Select Assign port.  A window is displayed.
 3. Select a port in the Assign port field.
 4. Select OK.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Using an assigned port-examples
o Unassigning a port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 381. Unassigning a Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To free a port designation that is assigned to a network printer or plotter:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network printer object.
 2. Select Unassign port.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Assigning a port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 382. Using an Assigned Drive-Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For an example of how to use an operating-system command with a network
directory, select Example-COPY to K from the "Related Information" list below.
For an example of how to use information on a network directory with an
application program, select Example-program save to K.

Related Information:

o Example-COPY to K
o Example-program save to K


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 383. Example-COPY to K ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This example shows how to copy the file, MYDATA.TXT, from your local system to
a network directory (K) using an operating-system command:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network directory.
 2. If necessary, log in to use the directory.
 3. Assign the network directory to drive designation K.
 4. Start an OS/2* session.
 5. Type:

           COPY  C:MYDIR\MYDATA.TXT  K\:

 6. When you are finished with the network directory, unassign drive K.

Note:   To find out how to copy a file to a network directory without first
        assigning a drive designation, select Copying an object below.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Logging in to a network object
o Assigning a drive
o Starting an OS/2 session
o Unassigning a drive
o Copying an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 384. Example-Program Save to K ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This example shows how to save network information from a program that does not
recognize a network identifier:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network directory where you want to save
    information.
 2. If necessary, log in to use the directory.
 3. Assign the network directory to drive designation K.
 4. Use the appropriate command to save the information from your program to a
    file.  Use the path and file name, K\:MYDATA.TXT.
 5. When you are finished using the network directory, unassign drive K.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Logging in to a network object
o Assigning a drive
o Unassigning a drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 385. Using an Assigned Port-Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For an example of how to use an operating-system command to print on a network
printer, select Example-PRINT to LPT3 from the "Related Information" list
below.  For an example of how to use an application program to print on a
network printer, select Example-program print to LPT3.

Related Information:

o Example-PRINT to LPT3
o Example-program print to LPT3


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 386. Example-PRINT to LPT3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This example shows how to print the file, MYDATA.TXT, on a network printer
using an operating-system command:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network printer object.
 2. If necessary, log in to use the printer.
 3. Assign the network printer object to port designation LPT3.
 4. Start an OS/2* session.

    Type:

           COPY  C:MYDIR\MYDATA.TXT  LPT3
    or

           PRINT  C:MYDIR\MYDATA.TXT  /D:LPT3

 5. When you are finished using the network printer, unassign port LPT3.

For more information about printing from an operating system command prompt,
select Printing outside the workplace shell from the "Related Information" list
below.

Note:   You can print on the network without first assigning a port designation
        if you use the objects on your desktop, or another Presentation
        Manager* graphical program.  To find out how, select Printing on a
        network printer below.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Logging In to a network object
o Assigning a port
o Starting an OS/2 session
o Unassigning a port
o Printing outside the workplace shell
o Printing on a network printer


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 387. Example-Program Print to LPT3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network printer object.
 2. If necessary, log in to use the printer.
 3. Assign the network printer object to port designation LPT3.
 4. Select LPT3 as the printer your program uses; then use the appropriate
    command to print information from your program.
 5. When you are finished with the network printer object, unassign port LPT3.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Logging in to a network object
o Assigning a port
o Unassigning a port


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 388. Refreshing a Network View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To refresh the contents of any open network folder (network, server, or network
directory):

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the folder.
 2. Select Refresh.

The system automatically refreshes network print-job information at a
particular time interval, which you can adjust.  To refresh the print-job view
without waiting for the next automatic refresh:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select Refresh.

Note:   The setting in the printer-object Default network job view field
        determines whether you see information about only your own network jobs
        or about other jobs, as well.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Changing the refresh interval
o Changing the network job view


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 389. Deleting a Network Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network object.
 2. Select Delete.

You can delete a network object only if you created it.  For example, if you
use Access another to add an object to your Network folder, or if you create a
shadow of a network object in another folder, you can delete it.  Only a
network administrator can delete the objects that administrator creates or
assigns to your Network folder.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 390. Viewing Network Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To find out if a network object is available for immediate use, requires a
login, or is unavailable:

 1. Display the menu for the network object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Network status.

For additional help, select the Help push button after the window is displayed.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 391. Accessing Another Network Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To use another (new) network server, directory, or printer object that does not
already exist in your Network folder or on your desktop, you need to create the
missing object.  Select the appropriate topic below.

Related Information:

o Accessing another network server
o Accessing another network directory
o Accessing another network printer


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 392. Accessing Another Network Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To access another (new) network server:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for an existing server folder.
 2. Select Access another.

Related Information:

o Displaying pop-up menus
o Changing names of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 393. Accessing Another Network Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To access another (new) network directory:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for an existing network directory.
 2. Select Access another.

Related Information:

o Changing names of objects
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 394. Accessing Another Network Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To access another (new) network printer or plotter:

 1. Select Templates.
 2. Drag the Network Printer template to a network group folder, a server
    folder, or an available place on your desktop.
 3. Change the name of the printer object.
 4. Select Access another.

Or:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for an existing network printer.
 2. Select Access another.

Related Information:

o Changing names of objects
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 395. Setting Up Network Printing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To connect a new printer or plotter to a network:

 1. Install the printer using the device manufacturer's instructions.
 2. Set up printing using your Network software.  To find out how to do this
    using IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 (or later), or another network that
    supports OS/2* Workplace Shell* on its servers, select Creating a network
    printer object, from the "Related Information" list below.  If you use a
    network program that does not support the OS/2 Workplace Shell, including
    an earlier version of LAN Server, consult the instructions supplied with
    the network software.

    Note:   If your network program identifies the printing resources by system
            name or queue identification, you can find this name in the
            Physical name field of the printer object settings (View tab).


Related Information:

o Creating a network printer object
o Administering network printing


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 396. Creating a Network Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 (or later), you can create a
printer object on the network from two alternative locations:

o From your remote workstation
o Directly on the server, using the OS/2* Workplace Shell*, using the same
  method used to set up a local printer. (See Creating a printer object below.)

After creating the printer object:

o Set up the printer driver.
o Customize network printing as needed.
o Set the printer or queue for shared printer.

Related Information:

o Setting up remotely
o Creating a printer object
o Copying a printer object (using remote admin)
o Setting up a network printer driver
o Customizing network printing
o Sharing a network printer object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 397. Setting Up a Network Printer Driver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

After creating a printer object to use with IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 (or
later):

 1. If necessary, change the default printer driver.

    Note:   Do the remaining steps from the server desktop.


 2. Adjust the printer properties to reflect the physical set up of the device.
 3. Install printer fonts, if needed.
 4. Set up default job properties.

For more detailed information, select the appropriate topic below.

Related Information:

o Changing the default printer driver
o Installing printer fonts
o Configuring print-job properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 398. Customizing Network Printing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 (or later), you can do any of the
following to customize network printing:

o Create one printer object that combines (pools) printers on various ports for
  faster printing.
o Copy the printer object to set up multiple printers for a single port.
o If necessary, configure the printer parallel port timeout period or serial
  port communications settings.
o Set up a separator page.
o Set up automatic start and stop times for printing hours.
o If necessary, change the path of the spooler on the server that controls the
  network printing and plotting devices.

Related Information:

o Copying a printer object (using remote admin)
o Pooling printers
o Configuring a printer port
o Setting up a separator page
o Setting up printing hours
o Changing the spooler path


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 399. Setting Up Remotely ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a printer object on the network using your remote workstation:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for an existing network printer object.
 2. Select Remote admin; then Create another.  The Create a Network Printer
    window is displayed.
 3. Type a name, select a default printer driver, and select a port.
 4. Set up the network printer-driver and, if necessary, adjust the settings
    for the port.  You must do this step on the server desktop.  You cannot set
    up the port configuration, printer properties, or job properties from a
    remote workstation.
 5. Use the network program to share the printer object.

Note:   Only a network administrator can use the Remote admin menu options.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Logging in to a network object
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Setting up a network printer driver
o Configuring a printer
o Sharing a network printer object
o Deleting a printer object (using remote admin)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 400. Sharing a Network Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the network program to set up the printing device or queue as shared.  For
example, use the NET SHARE command.  If you use IBM* LAN Server, you also can
start a LAN Server session and consult the OS/2 LAN Online Reference
information about sharing resources using the LAN Requester full-screen
interface.

Related Information:

Changing settings of objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 401. Setting Up a Separator Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a page of identifying information that will be printed at the start
of each print job:

 1. Use an editor to create a data-file object containing the necessary
    separator-page codes.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the server printer object.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 4. Select the Print options tab.
 5. Type the path (if different from the server-spooler path) and file name for
    your separator page.

For additional information, select the Help push button after the window is
displayed.

Note:   You can set up a separator page for any local printer object.  If you
        are a network administrator, and you have IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version
        2.0 (or later), you can also set up separator pages for Network printer
        objects.

Related Information:

o Starting the System Editor
o Separator page codes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 402. Copying a Printer Object (Using Remote Admin) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a second printer object for the same port:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network. printer object.
 2. Select Remote admin.
 3. Select Copy.

Note:   Only a network administrator can use the Remote admin menu options.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Logging in to a network object
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 403. Deleting a Printer Object (Using Remote Admin) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the network printer object.
 2. Select Remote admin.
 3. Select Delete.

If the printer object is currently printing a job, the printer status is
Pending deletion.  After the job is printed, the system processes your request
to delete the printer object.  All the remaining jobs for that printer object
are deleted without being printed.

Note:   Only a network administrator can use the Remote admin menu options.

Related Information:

o Logging in to a network object
o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 404. Administering Network Printing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

As network administer, you can hold and release a printer object.  While a
printer object has the status, held, it does not print.  You might, for
example, change the status of a printer object to held while you change a form
or fix a mechanical problem on the printer.

You can use the information for your network software and the Master Help Index
on the desktop to resolve problems.

Related Information:

o Holding or releasing a printer
o Network printing, problem administration


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 405. Setting Up Printing Hours ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To restrict the hours during which jobs are printed:

 1. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open; then select Settings.
 3. Select Print options.
 4. Type a time in the Start time and Stop time fields.

If you need additional help, select the Help push button after the Print
Options settings window is displayed.

Note:   You can set up printing hours for any local printer object.  If you are
        a network administrator, and you have IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0
        (or later), you also can set up printing hours for Network printer
        objects.

Related Information:

Displaying pop-up menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 406. Network Administration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

As a network administrator, you have a special user identification and password
with which you identify yourself to the system as the one responsible for such
tasks as:

o Installing network equipment.
o Setting up and administering printing on a server.
o Distributing user identification and passwords to those qualified to use
  network data and printers.
o Placing users into groups.
o Using your network program to create a means for users to gain access to
  network equipment from their local systems.
o Setting up the desktop Network folder for users.
o Checking that network servers and printers are working correctly.
o Solving problems for users.

Related Information:

o Setting up network printing
o Administering network printing
o Setting up the desktop Network folder


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 407. Setting up the Desktop Network Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Network folder on the desktop holds data, programs, and print facilities
that a network user can browse.  Your network administrator and you, as a
network user, can perform the following tasks to set up this folder for
convenient use:

o Give network groups, servers, directories, printers, and plotters meaningful
  descriptions that display below the objects on the desktop of the user.  To
  do this, the network administrator types a description or comment using the
  network program, or a network can change the name of an object to personalize
  the description.  For example, you might want to change the network printer
  object name to describe the printer model and location.
o Set up login to occur automatically when you select a network from your
  desktop.  To do this, create a shadow of the program object for your network
  startup program and place it in the Startup folder.
o Set up your desktop so that network folders, assigned drives, and assigned
  ports remain active between local-system startups.  To do this, edit the
  CONFIG.SYS file to include the statement:

       SET AUTOSTART=PROGRAMS,TASKLIST,FOLDER,CONNECTIONS

o Look in the Master Help Index for assistance, under the topic network.

Related Information:

o Changing names of objects
o Creating a shadow of an object
o Starting the System Editor
o Searching the Master Help Index


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 408. Administering Outside the Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Your particular network probably also requires tasks that are quite specific to
that network.  For example, you must use network-specific commands or software
to set up servers and network directories.  If you manage your network with the
OS/2* LAN Server, you must use that program to set up sharing for printers and
to set up domains.

Become familiar with the information supplied with the network to determine
when you must use the application program or programs provided to set up and
manage the network.

Note:   If you use network software to set up printing, and need to identify
        printing resources by system name or queue identification, you can find
        this name in the Physical name field of the printer object settings
        (View tab).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 409. Network Printing: Problem Administration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If network print jobs have the wrong font, the submitter might have installed
and selected a cartridge or soft font on his local system for which there is no
matching font installed on the print server.  Either advise what network fonts
are available, or install requested additional fonts on the print server.

If the separator page does not print between jobs, check the path and file name
and the separator page codes.

Related Information (for administrators of IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 (or
later):

o Installing printer fonts
o Setting up a separator page


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 410. Printing On a Network Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you use a printer or plotter connected to a network, the setup and procedure
for printing depends upon the method you use to print.  Select the appropriate
topic below.

Related Information:

o Network printing using drag and drop
o Network printing using a menu
o Network printing using a program
o Network printing using a command prompt
o Printing help information on a network printer


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 411. Network Printing Using Drag and Drop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Select the Network folder.
 2. Select the network group folder.
 3. If your network has servers, select the server folder that contains the
    printer object.

    Note:   You might need to log in to use the Network, network group, or
            server.


 4. Drag the object you want to print to the printer object.

If you move, copy, or create a shadow of the printer object outside the Network
folder, you can drag an object to be printed without first selecting and
logging in to the Network folder and its sub-folders.

Related Information:

o Logging in to a network object
o Creating a shadow of an object
o Copying an object
o Moving an object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 412. Network Printing Using a Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you want to use the Print option on a pop-up menu and a network printer, you
must first set up the network printer object for Presentation Manager*.  To
find out how to do this, select Adding the network printer to a list from the
"Related Information" list below.

To print an object from the menu:

 1. Select one or more objects you want to print.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the selected objects.
 3. Select the arrow to the right of Print; then select the name of the network
    printer object.

Note:   After you set up a network printer object for Presentation Manager, you
        can make that printer object the default for your system.  For example,
        if you print often on the network printer and do not want to select it
        by name each time you print, you would make that printer object the
        default.

o Adding the network printer to a list
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Changing the default printer object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 413. Adding the Network Printer to a List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set up a network printer object so that you can use it from the pop-up menu
of an object or from a Presentation Manager* program:

 1. Find the network printer object inside the Network folder.
 2. Move, copy, or create a shadow of the network printer object outside the
    Network folder.
 3. If your local system does not have the appropriate printer driver for the
    model device connected to the network, a message is displayed.  Install the
    missing printer driver.

Related Information:

o Viewing network objects
o Creating a shadow of an object
o Copying an object
o Moving an object
o Installing printer drivers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 414. Network Printing Using a Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OS/2* 2.1 supports printing for programs that take advantage of the
Presentation Manager* graphical interface, and for programs that do not.  The
setup and method for printing depends upon which of these you use:

o To print from a program written for the Presentation Manager graphical
  interface, you first must set up the network printer object for Presentation
  Manager so that the program lists the network printer object on its printer
  list.  To find out how to do this, select Adding the network printer to a
  list from the "Related Information" list below.

  You only need to add each network printer object one time.  Then whenever you
  use the program's command for printing, you can select the network printer
  object from the program's list of printers.

  Note:   Your program might list printer objects by their physical name
          instead of listing the descriptive name that is displayed below the
          object on your desktop.  To find out the physical name, select
          Viewing a Physical Printer Name from the "Related Information" list
          below.

o To print from a program that does not use the Presentation Manager (for
  example, from a DOS program), assign a port designation to the network
  printer; then select the designated port from the printer-port list of the
  program.  To find out how to do this, select Assigning a port below.

Related Information:

o Assigning a port
o Adding the network printer to a list
o Viewing a physical printer name


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 415. Network Printing from a Command Prompt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 1. Assign a port designation.
 2. Start an OS/2* or DOS command prompt session.
 3. Using the PRINT or COPY command, direct your output to the assigned port
    designation.

Related Information:

o Assigning a port
o Starting an OS/2 session
o Starting a DOS session


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 416. Printing Help Information on a Network Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The system prints a help topic on the default system printer.

To set up a network printer for printing help topics:

 1. If you have not already done so, move, copy, or create a shadow of the
    network printer object outside the Network folder.
 2. Display the pop-up menu for the printer object.
 3. Select Set default.
 4. Select the network printer where you want the help information to print.

The way you print a help topic depends upon the type of help you want to print.
To find out more, select the appropriate topic from the "Related Information"
list below.

Note:   The network printer remains the system default until you set another
        default.  When you use the Print Screen key, print a help topic, or
        select Print from the pop-up menu for an object, the system sends your
        print job to the default printer.

Related Information:

o Printing a Master Help Index topic
o Printing a Glossary definition
o Printing (other) help topics
o Viewing network objects
o Displaying pop-up menus
o Changing the default printer object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Local Area Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the index entry network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Remote Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the index entry network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Sharing Devices and Software ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the index entry network.